The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutApplication- PermitGARI+IELD COUNTY BUILDING, SANITATION and PLANNING DEPARTMENT 109 8th. Street, Suite 303 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601(970)945-8212 No. 7689 Job Address f/! f 2 441_0,1? z (CLF t1 Nature of Work Building Permit Use of Building 1 �; or I'll0 /0 Contractor(4)01 Amount of Permits 1 • oG -*Afk 3-17, 6,S F, tko3 Date rk c'cv, 1'L D d (L tf- rc., LC --Ar/-iT rt-EA1- EKn' PLANT I2 -7t-(17 6°2.8..37 = .3G4a or- cfcC�l��GQ�rprr�� 'i -e Ole 51.03 �t�sfws6 — c9 1 0 ‘877.S- 9.65 Apr -13-00 07:52A r GARFIELD COUNTY BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION GARFIELD COUNTY (C)[RNWOO1) SPRINOS). COLORADO TRI,RPHONE: (970) 943.3212 PERMIT NO. —7I4) S P_02 1 NsWCrIoN 1.1Nsr (976) 3 8 4-5003 PARCBUSCHHETM R.F. NO. JOB ADDRESS: 1 /411. WO. BLOCK NO. &cal 0,4 4C0X n AD Cid _ caw.,; rl +f ., suBD1VLSION/E EM TIC1N q Lt , �' „r Q9. . Cob .� , - , 2- 3 _ CtlRIPAC'IG..Gl3 `S7nS-tiL,Lr ciao Ti sr "°011rlalalt1 141611 912S04iaca Pdh011t 4 Itcttak,'�in 11�lA�ex- €4 C4 pka _,1-, 1-)e.noer Coco 80,911 66)3 4fo.c .. • 5 14 I[ OF11CUZP)O eq. /Town Ps>alfl Nolurl«». 6 °" Mil� wol-ea- ir,eak k PlF#nf Atm. of. zFLSz1L'►ele111rxn (aFP i (c--1-0-10 ,; Usoticiry as e u _112rAtievtln p b.41. upayisisn 8 CLAN OF 'MM7< P..LM yeAlMilkili .ML1pA11Ot .614+E o.nem 9 11.11A472c .Mr+r/i' iwurtz FM}NT W..rrw YIMMr1tA 10 .1DPPVPWAYPWT rnencMAlPelxd+lw.t ornrl PLAN YQ1 ^ Aruimma)vAmkr nws 60 6, / D. ] VAWATION WM=.6 . 1 1r W' „)' NOTICE A I:I PAkA11: P.LY.i?R1CAI. PERMIT 1S k1CL4AR1D AND MUTT RE 1SSUF31 SY THS srAYt- ui COLORADO. THIS PERMIT BECOMES NUIJ. AND VOn) TF WORK ()R CONSTRUCTION AUTHORS/AD IS NOT OMhG NC J) WM[TN 110 DAYS, OR 1F CONSTRUCTION OR WORK Is St 1APENT)FJ) DR ADANDONFn FOR A PIIKKN) OF 110 DAYS AT ANY TIME AF'TKR WORE IS COMMINCEI).S FJt 1 HFJIY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE REAP) AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO I11L TRUE AND CX RRRCT. AIX. PROVISIONS OP LAW!{ UUVERNINUTHU'IYYbOFWORK WIIi.l11tiCOMPfdF!)WITH WFIFT I RPFJ]FISD HIiKELN OK Nur. 114E CIRANTIN(! OE A mixer MA.NOT MAUr TO (NMS AUI HuRFYY'IU VIOLATE OK (ANC:EL IIW PROVISLONS OF ANY OTHER STATE OR LOCAL W k$ C ,,1 ATING CO STRUCTION ox '11W PI+.WOR AN . OP CONS r�jT,� . 1 � PLAN CMCK 11kJ::: -3 7 f. b� • nni PERMIT ME! s - $f . 0 0 lUI A • I 1 .: DATE PBRMJT ISSUED: 8_ G ( V OCC: GROUP; CY)NST:TYPE: f -. I ZONING: SETBACK fS: S , et of GIVfle . C a CC wtheriivd Weil drvio6 1 . rl z-4 6 i -- ` rr ,or I Av,' .... / , a AI* LWpt. ... is P, A- r .. :w. �`) OME: fSDS NO. A FEE ACSWEMF.NT PtVMISS1ON 14. 111.0ua1Y (*.ANTED TO TLW. APPLICANT AS OWNER- C7f)N7RACTOR ANTkt)R THE AGENT O1•'•1lIL CONTRACTOR OR OWNER.'I.0 CUNS•IRIIn- THE STRUC1'UR.I. As DETAILED ON PANS AND SPLCIl1C:ATIONs At mMIT ED TO AND REVIEWED DY1107. ntTILDTNGDEPART ENI . 1N C ONSfi1:RATION OP THE ISSUANCE OF TEES Pk,RMT1'. T111. SIGNER HEREBY MALES TO COMM .V WITH ALL BUILDING CODES AND LAND USE REc1U1.A CIONS ADOPTED Ur GARFIELD COUNTY PIPRS11ANT TO AUTHOPJ Y CJLVEN 1N 30.21.201 CRS AS AMENDED. '1'lik. STONER TITRTIIPR AGREES THAT 11,"1.11E ADOVT SAM ORDINAA'CLS ART_ NOT 11111 COMPL.LED Wil it IN T1Di 1.C)CATION, ERECTION. GONSTRUC'IION AND USP OP THE ABOVE DES(R1Ilh•'D STRI I - MIRE, IRE, TICE PERMIT MAY'111FN Rr. REVUk1::U )fY l+c)TIPr FRC)\I '11LIi COUNIY AND 111AT MEN AND THERE IT SHALL BEcOMI NUI!. AND VOID. THE LSSUANCL 01, A PERMIT DASEO UPON PLANS, SPECUICAT1ONs AND OTHER DATA SHALL NOT ?PJW :Nr 111E n11AniNG OFFICIAL FROM 'ntERF.AFrER REUUIIUNc: 11{T. CORRECTION OF EJucoxs IN EAT) PT ANS, SPkCLPIGATIONS AND OT1f!R DATA OR FRO PREVENTING DIM DNO OPERATION BEINO CAIUUIi1) (IN TI4EREUNI)lat WIDati rN vIOLATE3N TIES CODE OR. ANY OTT IPA ORDINANCE OREEOULA IONOFTIESJURISDICTION. THE REVIEW OF THE SUBMITTED PIANS. ANT) SPECIFICATIONS AND INSPECTIONS CONDUCTED TIDSRF_AFTpR DOES NOT CONsTrotTF. AN Ai; EFIANCT: OF AN? Rr.SPONsDU1:TTITISI OR LIABILTTLLrs BY CJAJFIEUJ COUNTY FOR ERROks, OMISSIONS OR DISCREPANCLEs. .n/ti R13PONsTBE TTY 209. 11[1SlS ITEMS AND IMPLiMENTATION 1)t1RCw; coNSTRU TION RESTS SPEGIF1CAtLY WDl i THE ARCHITECT. DE1UWIF:R, 1II1[1.OER AND OWNER. COMMENTS ARE INTENDED TO 111•; C` )NSEKVATIVE AND IN SI fppOR) (* THEOwN1iR.i INTEREST. Ctv(nm.Ati3 111MT:11Y ACr.'NCWLRDGE TEAT 11 LAVE READ AND 1 TNDER$TAN!) THE Ac1'CFRMRNT ABOVE. W.JTrIA1.) . .cS 3 ("1/ )4))03 .a( c o5a'l` e I •W:=0 FIRE • EMS • RESCUE t• May 5, 2000 Arno Ehlers Building Official, Garfield County 109 Eighth Street, Suite 303 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 Re: Ranch at Roaring Fork Wastewater Treatment Plant Dear Arno: MEOWED MY 11 B 2000 I have reviewed the plans for the Ranch at Roaring Fork Wastewater Treatment Plant for compliance with the 1997 Uniform Fire Code and would offer the following comments. 1. A material safety data sheet (MSDS) should be provided for the sodium hypochlorite solution indicating the concentration of the solution to be used and stored. The quantity of the sodium hypochlorite solution that will be used and stored should also be provided. Sodium hypochlorite is classified as a corrosive material. The exempt amount for liquid corrosives per UFC Table 8001.15-B is 500 gallons per control area. 2. Provide a hazard identification sign at the entrance door to the mechanical room in accordance with UFC 8001.7 and UFC Standard 79-3 (NFPA 704). 3. Provide key box (Knox Box) for fire department access. UFC 902.4. Please contact me if you have any questions or if I can be of any assistance. Sincerely, Bill Gavette Deputy Chief Carbondale & Rural Fire Protection District 300 Meadowood Drive • Carbondale, CO 81623 • 970/963-2491 Fax 963-0569 i+ CHEMICAL INFORMATION 1 a Special 1 CAS#: 7681.11-0 IUPAC: potassium iodide, 40% aqueous solution Trade/Synonym: CAS#: 7681-11-0 IUPAC: potassium iodide, 70% aqueous solution Trade/Synonym: CASS': 7681-11-0 IUPAC: potassium Iodide Trade/Synonym: CAIN: -7881-38.1 L L 40% 70% 100% V a a 0 2 1 1 2 2 IUPAC: sodium hydrogen sulfate Trade/Synonym: sodium bisulfate sodium acid sulfate; sodium pyrosulfats CAS#: 7681-49-4 IUPAC: sodium fluoride Trade/Synonym: CAS#: 768149.4 IUPAC: sodium fluoride, 0.02% aqueous solution Trade/Synonym: CAS#: 7881-82.9 IPAC: sodium hypochlorite. $4% aqueous solution Trade/Synonym: bleach; household bleach CAS#: 7681.62-9 idUPAC: sodium hypochlodts. 12-16% aqueous solution Trade/Synonym: hypochlorite solution; Super Shock; Sunnysol 150; Sunnysol SDS CASS: 7881-63-0 IUPAC; sodium hypophosphlts, 10% aqueous solution TradaISynanym: 8 S L L L L 94% 100% 0.02% 3-5% 12-15% 10% 3 COR 3 NON 'Oil 1 COR,I 2 1 Apr -1S-00 07:52A P_Ora r, As of January 1, 1999: Plans to be included for a Building Permit, must be on draft paper at least 18"x 24"" and drawn to scale. Plans must include a floor plan, a concrete footing and foundation plan, elevations all sides with decks, balcony steps, hand rails and guard rails, windows and doors, including the finish grade line. A section showing in detail, from the bottom of the footing to the top of the roof, including re -bar, anchor bolts, pressure treated plates, floor joists, wall studs and spacing, insulation, sheeting, house -rap, (which is required), siding or any approved building material. A window schedule. A door schedule. A floor framing plan, a roofing framing plan, roof must be designed to withstand a 40# per ft. up to 7,000 F.O.S. and an 80 M.P.H. wind. All sheets to be identified by number and indexed. All of the above requirements must be met or your plans will be returned. Applicants are required to indicate appropriately and to submit completed checklist at time of application for a permit: 1. is a site plan included that indicates the distance of the proposed building or addition to property lines, other buildings, set back easements and utility easements? Yes X No Not necessary for project._, Q_ 2. Are the plans submitted for application construction drawings and not drawings that are stamped or marked identifying them as "Not for construction, for permit issuance only", "Approval drawings only", "For permit issuance only" or similar language? Yes_ )<_," No Not necessary for this project__ . _ 3. Does the site plan include the location, including the distances to property lines, wells, (on subject property and adjacent properties), streams or water courses of the 1.S,D.S (individual Sewage Disposal System) and has the system been designed, stamped and signed,by a Colorado registered engineer? Yes 1'` No Not necessary for this project 4. Does the site plan indicate the location and direction of the State, County or private road accessing the property? Yes No_ Not necessary for this project 2 Apr -13 -OO O7:53A a 5. Do the plans include a foundation plan indicating the size, location and spacing of all reinforcing steel in accordance with the uniform building code or per stamped engineered design? Yes >6 No_ Not necessary for this project_„__ 6. if the building is a pre-engineered structure, is there a stamped, signed engineered foundation plan for this building? Yes, No Not necessary for this project__ _,_,_ 7, Do the plans indicate the location and size of ventilation openings for under floor crawl spaces and the clearances required between wood and earth? Yes No Not necessary for project 8. Do the plans indicate the size and location of the ventilation openings for the attic, roof joist spaces and soffits? Yes No Not necessary for this project ?<1 9. Do the plans include design loads as required under the Uniform Building Code for roof snowloads, (a minimum of 40 pounds per square foot in Garfield County)? Yes No Not necessary for this project 10. Do the plans include design loads as required for floor loads under the Uniform Building Code Section 2304 and Tables 23-A and 23-B? Yes_ No Not necessary for this project 11. Doe the plan include a building section drawing indicating foundation, wall, floor and roof construction? Yes ' No Not necessary for this project 12. Is the wind speed and exposure design included in the plan? Yes No Not necessary for this project 13. Does the building section drawing include size and spacing of floor joists, wall studs, ceiling joists, roof rafters or joists or trusses? Yes No Not necessary for this project)C, 14. Does the building section drawing or other detail include the method of positive connection of all columns and beams? Yes No Not necessary for this project ,><D 3 P.O6 fpr -13-00 07:63A AP. • 15. Does the plan indicate the height of the building or proposed addition from the highest point of the building or addition measured at mid span between the ridge and the cave down to existing grade contours? Yes No Not necessary for this project 16. Does the plan include any stove or zero clearance fireplace planned for installation including make and model and Colorado Phase IT certifications or Phase 11 EPA certification? Yes No Not necessary for this project 17. Does the plan include a masonry fireplace including a fireplace section indicating design to comply with the Uniform Building Code Chapter 37? Yes No Not necessary for this project 18. Does the plan include a window schedule or other verification that egress/rescue windows from sleeping rooms and/or basements comply with the requirements of the Uniform Building Code? Yes >4C No Not necessary for this project 19. Does the plan include a window schedule or other verification that windows provide natural 1i t and ventilation for all habitable rooms? Yes No Not necessary for this project 20. Do the plans indicate the location of glazing subject to human impact such as glass doors, glazing immediately adjacent to such doors; glazing adjacent to any surface normally used as a walling surface; sliding glass doors; fixed glass panels; shower doors and tub enclosures and specify safety glazing for these areas? Yes No Not necessary for this project 21_ Do the plans include a complete design for all mechanical systems planned for installation in this building? Yes No Not necessary for this project 22. Have all areas in the building been accurately identified for the intended use? (Occupancy as identified in the Uniform Building Code Table 5-A) Yes No Not necessary for this project x3 23. Does the plan indicate the quantity, form, use and storage of any hazardous materials that may i use in this building? Yes No Not necessary for this project 4 P.07 .Apr -13-00 07:53A P.o8 • 24. Is the location of all natural and liquid petroleum gas furnaces, boilers and water heaters indicated on the plan? Yes No Not necessary for this project 25. Do the plans indicate the location and dimension of restroom facilities and if more than four employees and both sexes are employed, facilities for both sexes? Yes No Not necessary for this project )4 26. Do the plans indicate that restrooms and access to the building are handicapped accessible? Yes No Not necessary for this project, 4C 27. Have two (2) complete sets of construction drawings been submitted with the application? Yes No Not necessary for this project z 28. Have you designed or had this plan designed while considering building and other construction code requirements? Yes No Not necessary for this project 29. Does the plan accurately indicate what you intend to construct and what will receive a final inspection by the Garfield County Building Department? Yes`. No 30. Do you understand that approval for design and/or construction changes are required nnor to the implementation of these changes? Yes )} No 31. Do you understand that the Building Department will collect a "Plan Review" fee from you at the time of application and that you will be required to pay the "Permit" fee as well as an "Septic System" fees required, at the time you pick up your building permit? Yes_ No 32. Are you aware that you are required to call for all inspections required under the Uniform Building Code including approval on a final inspection aria to receiving a Certificate of Occu anc and occupancy of the building? Yes No 33. Are you aware that the person signing the Permit Application whether the "Owner", "Agent of the Owner", "General Contractor", "Contractor" or otherwise, signing the application is the party responsible for the project complying with the Uniform Codes? Yes No 5 Apr -1$-00'07:53A P.09 34. Are you aware that twenty-four (24) hour notice is required for all inspections? Inspections will be made from Battlement Mesa to West Glenwood in the mornings and from Glenwood Springs to Carbondale, in the afternoon. Morning inspections must be called in by 12:00 p.m. the day before; afternoon inspections must be called in by 5:00 p.m. the day before. Failure to give twenty-four (24) hour notice for inspections will delay your inspection one (1) day. Inspections are to be called in to 384-5003. 35. Are you aware that prior to issuance of a building permit you are required to show proof of a driveway access permit or obtain a statement from the Garfield County Road & Bridge Department stating one is not necessary? You can contact the Road & Bridge Department at 6254601. Yes �� _ No 1 hereby acknowledge that 1 have read, understand and answered these questions accurately to the best of my ability. 6061i,c /v dl:s Signature e -r. jvli9 v4 - CroOLt• &J#%) r Phone: T I - 7Z1 / (days); 3" 3 Z` I (evenings) 69A/e.frt /417- afiRtAi67 kozergep+rme7u-r- Project Name: date Project Address: Ai/A 'If you answered "No" on any of these questions you may be required to provide this information at the request of the Building Official prior to beginning the plan review process. Delays in issuing the permit are to be expected. Work may not proceed without the issuance of the permit. *If you have answered "Not necessary for this project" on any of the questions and it is determined by the Building Official that the information is necessary to review the application and plans to determine minimum compliance with the adopted codes, please expect the following. A. The application may be placed behind more recent applications for building permits 6 DATE INVOICE NO. DESCRIPTION 8-03-00 080300 CHECK DATE ) 8-04-00 GOULD CONSTRUCTION, INC. GLE NWOOD SPRINGS, COLORADO 81602 INVOICE AMOUNT Building Permit Ran 375.44 DEDUCTION 033528 BALANCE 375.44 CHECK NUMBER 33528 TOTALS ) 375.44 PLEASE DETACH THIS PORTION AND RETAIN FOR YOUR RECORDS. 375.44 GOULD CONSTRUCTION, INC. GLENWOOD SPRINGS, COLORADO 81602 DATE INVOICE NO. DESCRIPTION INVOICE AMOUNT DEDUCTION BALANCE 4-20-00 042000 Plan check ,,, for Ranc , [ F , 583.21 1,ed .cttc_Q_ 3'15.. ((ci Tato Ates s ? 583.21 CHECK ) DATE A-vn_rtn CHECK \ NUMBER) TOTALS PSE MACH THIS PORTION AND RETAIN FOR YO q R C73 000.1..41 Garfield County Building Department 109 8th Street Suite 303 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 970--945--8212 Plan analysis based on the 1994 Uniform Building Code Project Number: WWT Project Name: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 Occupancy: H7 -B Construction: V-N:V-N Date: May 2, 2000 Contractor: Gould Con. Architect: Engineer: McLaughlin Report By: Arno Ehlers NOTE: The code items listed in this report are not intended to be a complete listing of all possible code requirements in the 1994 UBC. It is a guide to selected sections of the code. Report created using Plan Analyst software by b w & a. (719) 599-5622 Portions of the material contained in this program are reproduced from the Uniform Building Code with the permission of the International Conference of Building Officials. SECTION # 1 NFPA 13 sprinkler system throughout the building Sprinkler system used for allowable area increase -- Sec. 505.3 SEPARATION DIRECTION BOUNDARY AREA INCREASE FIRE PROTECTION NORTH Property line 25.0 Feet 25.0 Feet EAST Property line 25.0 Feet 25.0 Feet SOUTH Property line 25.0 Feet 25.0 Feet WEST Property line 25.0 Feet 25.0 Feet Allowable area increased 25.% for open area on 4 sides. -- Sec. 505.1 FL NAME OCC MAX FLR AREA ALLOWED RATIO STATUS 1 Mechanical Room H7 ok 1560 30000 0.05 ok TOTAL FOR FLOOR 1560 30000 0.05 ok BUILDING TOTAL 1560 30000 0.05 ok The actual height of this building is 25. feet. The maximum height of the building is 40. feet. -- Table 5-B Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 Page # 2 EXTERIOR WALL FIRE RATINGS AND OPENING PROTECTION Table 5-A NORTH For Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Occupancy Wall Wall Protection Material Required H7 0 hour 0 hour None Any No EAST For Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Occupancy Wall Wall Protection Material Required H7 0 hour 0 hour None Any No SOUTH For Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Occupancy Wall Wail Protection Material Required H7 0 hour 0 hour None Any No WEST For Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Occupancy Wall Wall Protection Material Required H7 0 hour 0 hour None Any No None -- No fire protection requirements for openings. 3/4 hour -- Openings are to be protected with 3/4 hr fire assemblies. 50% of the area of the wall maximum. -- Table 5-A, Footnote 5 & Sec. 503.2.2 Maximum single window size is 84 sq.ft. with no dimension greater than 12 feet. -- Sec. 713.8 Not Allowed -- Openings are not permitted in this wall. OTHER BUILDING ELEMENTS Table 6-A ELEMENT MATERIAL RATING Interior Bearing wall Any 0 hr Interior nonbrg wall Any 0 hr Structural Frame Any 0 hr Exterior Struct Frame Any 0 hr Floor/Ceiling Assembly Any 0 hr Roof/Ceiling Assembly Any 0 hr Stairs Any None NOTES See footnote #1 See Footnote #18 FOOTNOTES: 1) Elements in an exterior wall located where openings are not permitted or where protection of openings is required, shall be protected against external fire exposure as required for exterior bearing walls or the structural frame, whichever is greater. -- Table 6-A, footnote 1 18) In areas containing hazaradous materials, the floor shall be of noncombustible, liquid -tight construction. -- Sec. 307.2.2 Page # 3 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 DRAFT STOPS: If there is combustible construction in the roof/ceiling assembly, draft stops shall be installed so that the area of concealed space does not exceed 3,000 square feet and so that the horizontal dimension between stops does not exceed 60 feet. -- Sec. 708.3.1.2.2 When sprinklers are installed in the attic, the area may be 9,000 sq.ft. and the greatest horizontal dimension may be 100 feet. SECTION # 1 EXIT REQUIREMENTS: FL NAME NUMB MIN MIN PANIC RATED DOOR NOTES OCC EXITS WIDTH HDWR CORRIDOR SWING 1 Mechanical Room TOTAL 5 2 0.1 No N/A Out 8 5 2 0.1 No N/A Out In areas where 2 exits are required, the minimum separation is 1/2 of the maximum diagonal of the area or floor. -- Sec. 1003.3 When 2 exits are required, exits must be arranged so that it is possible to go in either direction from any point in a corridor to a separate exit, except for dead ends not exceeding 20 feet in length. -- Sec. 1005.5 Exit signs are required from all areas where 2 or exits are required. -- Sec. 1013.1 Main exterior exit doors which obviously and clearly are identifiable as exits need not be signed when approved. -- exc. 1 Door swing is based on Sec. 1004.2 except as noted. Occupant load factor is based on Table 10-A. Number of exits is based on Table 10-A except as noted. Exit width is in feet and based on Sec. 1003.2. Exit width is to be divided approximately equally among exits. Width shown for all areas is based on other exits. (0.2) Width shown for 1st floor is based on other exits. (0.2) Width shown for other floors & basements is based on stairways. (0.3) For the minimum width of doors, see Sec. 1004.6 For the minimum width of corridors, see Sec. 1005.2 For the minimum width of stairways, see Sec. 1006.2 FOOTNOTES: 8) The number of exits is based on Sec. 1018. Page # 4 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 FLUSH AND SURFACE BOLTS: Manually operated edge or surface -mounted flush bolts and surface bolts are prohibited. When automatic flush bolts are used, the door leaf having the automatic flush bolt shall not have a door knob or surface -mounted hardware. The unlatching of any leaf shall not require more than one operation. -- Sec. 1004.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES: All means of egress doors shall be readily openable from the side from which egress is to be made without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. -- Sec. 1004.3 STAIR NOTES: Public stairways: 1) The rise of steps shall not be less than 4 inches or greater than 7 inches. The minimum run is 11 inches. The maximum variation is 3/8 inch in a flight of stairs. -- Sec. 1006.3 2) The minimum width of a stairway is 36 inches, 44 inches if the occupant load is greater than 49. -- Sec. 1006.2 Also see exit table above to see if minimum width is greater than 44 inches. 3) Provide a handrail on both sides of stairway 34 to 36 inches above the nosing. May be on one side of stairways less than 44 inches wide. - - Sec. 1006.9 & exception 1 4) Provide a guard rail where drop off is greater than 30 inches. - - Sec. 509.1 5) The minimum height is 42 inches. -- Sec. 509.2 6) Open guardrails shall have intermediate rails or ornamental pattern such that a sphere 4 inches in diameter cannot pass through. -- Sec. 509.3 The triangular opening formed at the riser, tread and guardrail may be 6 inches. -- 509.3 exc. 2 7) The minimum headroom is 6 ft.- 8 inches. Such clearance shall be measured vertically from a plane parallel and tangent to the stairway tread nosing to the soffit above at all points. -- Sec. 1006.15 8) Enclosed usable space under the stairs is required to be protected as required for 1 hr. fire -resistive construction. -- Sec. 1006.12 LANDINGS AT DOORS: 1) A floor or landing shall be provided on each side of doors. When access for persons with disabilities is required. the floor or landing shall not be more than 1/2 inch lower than the threshold. When access is not required, the maximum is 1 inch. -- Sec. 1004.9 2) Landings shall have a width not less than the width of the stairway or width of the doorway, whichever is the greater. The minimum length in the direction of exit travel is 44 inches. -- Sec. 1004.10 Page # 5 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 TRAVEL DISTANCE: The maximum travel distance in this building is 200 feet. -- Sec. 1003.4 The maximum travel distance within an H7 occupancy is 100 feet. -- Sec. 1018 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY: 1) This building including each tenant shall be provided with at least one entrance which complies with the accessible route provisions of CABO/ANSI A117.1. At least 50 percent of all entrances shall be accessible. -- Sec. 1103.2.3 2) When more that one exit is required from any accessible space, each accessible portion of the space shall be served by not less than two accessible means of egress. -- Sec. 1104.1.1 3) When an exit stairway is part of an accessible means of egress, the stairway shall have a clear width of not less than 48 inches between the handrails. The stairway shall either incorporate an area of refuge within an enlarged story -level landing or shall be accessed from an area of refuge. -- Sec. 1104.1.2 The area of refuge shall have direct access to the it. -- Sec. 1104.2.1 4) Each area of refuge shall be sized to accommodate not less than 30 inches by 48 inches for each 200 portion thereof. -- Sec. 1104.2.3 5) If the area of refuge is not within the stairway, it from the rest of the story by a smoke barrier having hour fire -resistance rating. Smoke barriers shall extend floor deck above. Doors shall be smoke and draft control with a rating not less than 20 minutes. -- Sec. 1104.2.4 6) Two-way communications are required. -- Sec. 1104.2.5 7) Each area must be identified by a sign stating AREA OF REFUGE international symbol of accessibility. 8) NOTE: Exit stairways in buildings protected throughout by an approved automatic sprinkler system are NOT required to incorporate an area of refuge. -- Sec. 1104.1.2 exception #2 stairway that serves one wheelchair space occupants, or shall be at least separated a one - to the roof assemblies and the ROOFING REQUIREMENTS: 1) The roofing on this building is required to be Class B or better. -- Table 15-A 2) See section 1504 and ICBG research reports for requirements. or Page # 6 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 AREA SEPARATION WALL REQUIREMENTS: 1) The area separation wall is required to be a 2 hr fire assembly. Openings are limited to 25 percent of the length of the wall and protected with a 1 1/2 hour assembly. -- Sec. 504.6.2 2) If the building has a projection, 1 hr. protection is required on the exterior wall each side of the area separation wall equal to the depth of the projection.-- Sec. 504.6.3, exceptions If the projection has a concealed space at the area separation, wall, the area separation wall must extend through the projection. 3) If the area separation wall terminates at an inside corner, see the article in 'Building Standards' Sep/Oct 1982 for requirements. 4) A 30 inch high parapet wall is required above the roofing. -- Sec.504.6.4 See exceptions for alternate protection at roof. The faces shall be momcombustible for the uppermost 18 inches including counterflashing and coping materials. -- Sec. 504.6.5 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS: If there are 100 or more sprinklers, all valves controlling the water supply and water -flow switches shall be electrically monitored. Valve monitoring and water -flow alarm and trouble signals shall be distinctly different and shall be automatically transmitted to an approved central station, remote station or proprietary monitoring station. -- Sec. 904.3.1 STANDPIPE REQUIREMENTS: There is no requirement for a standpipe. -- Table 9-A FOOTNOTES: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: A manual fire alarm system shall be provided in Group H Occupancies used for the manufacturing of organic coatings. Smoke detection shall shall be provided in rooms used for the storage, dispensing, use, and handling of hazardous materials. -- Sec. 307.9 The alarm system is to be as set forth in the Fire Code. VENTILATION: All areas customarily occupied by humans shall be provided with natural ventilation by means of openable exterior openings with an area of not less than 1/20 of the total floor area or shall be provided with a mechanically operated ventilation system. Such system shall be capable of supplying a minimum of 15 cubic feet per minute of outside air per occupant. -- Sec. 1202.2.1 Page # 7 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 WALL AND CEILING FINISH: 1) Wall and ceiling finish materials are required to comply with Sec. 804.1 and Table 8-B. 2) Carpeting on the ceiling is required to have a Class I flame spread rating. -- Sec. 804.2 3) Textile wall coverings shall have Class I flame spread rating. and shall be protected by automatic sprinklers or meet the acceptance criteria of U.B.C. Standard No. 8-2 -- Sec. 805 INSULATION NOTES: 1) All insulation material including facings are required to have a flame -spread rating of 25 or less and a maximum smoke density of 450 unless it is in a concealed space and the facing is in contact with a wall or ceiling. -- Sec. 707.3 exc.2 2) Foam plastic insulations are required to be protected. -- Sec. 2602 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS: For H7 occupancy 1) If required by the Fire Code, floors shall be recessed a minimum of 4 inches or shall be provided with a liquid -tight raised sill with a minimum height of 4 inches. When liquid -tight sills are provided, they may be omitted at door openings by the installation of an open -grate trench which connects to an approved drainage system. -- Sec. 307.2.3 2) Smoke and heat venting shall be provided as set forth in the Fire Code. -- Sec. 307.2.6 3) Emergency power shall be provided. It shall supply power to all required electrical equipment. -- Sec. 307.2.8 Page # 8 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 ACCESSIBLE FACILITIES: NOTE: Except as noted, section numbers listed below are from CABO/ANSI A117.1 - 1992 WATER FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS: At least 50 percent of drinking fountains, but not less than one, provided on every floor shall be accessible. -- UBC Sec. 1105.4.1 Accessible units must comply with the following: 1) Spout is to be within 36 inches of the floor. -- Sec. 4.15.2.1 2) Spout arranged for parallel approach shall be located 3 inches maximum from the front edge. Spouts of cantilevered units with knee and toe clearances shall be located 15 inches minimum from the vertical support and 5 inches maximum from the front edge. -- Sec. 4.15.2.2 3) Spouts shall provide a flow of water 4 inches height minimum. -- Sec. 4.15.2.3 4) Operable parts shall be located at or near the front edge of the unit and shall comply with 4.25.4 -- Sec. 4.15.3 5) A cantilevered unit is required to extend 17 inches minimum from the vertical support. Clear knee space must provide a clear area of 8 inches in depth at 27 inches high and 11 inches at 9 inches minimum above the floor. -- Sec. 4.15.4.1 6) Forward approach units shall comply with 4.2. Units in alcoves shall comply with 4.2.4.4. Units not having the necessary knee and toe clearance or clear space under them shall comply with 4.2.4 and have a clear floor space that allows a person in a wheelchair to make a parallel approach. --- Sec. 4.15.4.2 TOILET FACILITIES: 1) A 60 inch diameter unobstructed turning space is required in the toilet room. -- Sec. 4.16.3, 4.2.3 & Fig. B4.2.3 2) Water closet shall be mounted adjacent to a side wall or partition. The distance from the side wall or partition to the centerline of the water closet shall be 18 in. Sec. 4.17.1 3) When the accessible water closet is not in a stall: The clear floor space shall be 48 in minimum in front of the water closet and 42 in from the center line of the water closet on the side not adjacent to the wall. -- Sec. 4.17.2 & Fig. B4.17.2 4) When the accessible water closet is in a stall: The stall shall be 60 in wide minimum and 56 in deep minimum for wall hung water closets and 59 in deep minimum for floor mounted water closets. -- Sec. 4.18.3.1 If the door swings into the stall, the required depth shall be increased by 36 inches minimum. -- Sec. 4.18.3.2 & Fig. B4.18.3.1 5) The bars are to be 33 to 36 inches above the floor and shall be provided on the rear wall and on the side wall closest to the water closet. -- Sec. 4.24.2.2 & Figs. B4.17.3, B4.17.4 and B4.18.3.1 a) Side grab bar is required to start within 12 inches of the backwall and extend to 54 inches from the back wall. (The minimum length of the bar is 42 in) -- Sec. 4.17.4.1 & Page # 9 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 Figs. 84.17.3 and 84.18.3.1 b) The rear bar shall be 24 in long minimum, centered on the water closet. Where space permits, the bar shall be 36 in long minimum, with the additional length provided on the transfer side. -- Sec. 4.17.4.2 & Figs. 84.17.3, 84.17.4 and B4.18.3.1 6) The top of the seat on the water closet is required to be 17 to 19 inches above the floor. -- Sec. 4.17.3 & Fig. 84.17.3 7) Accessible urinals shall be of the stall type or wall hung with the rim at 17 inches maximum above the floor. -- Sec. 4.19.2 8) A clear area of 30 X 48 inches minimum is required in front of the urinal. Privacy shields shall not extend beyond the front edge of the urinal rim, unless they are 30 inches apart minimum. -- Sec. 4.19.3 9) Accessible lavatories shall be mounted with the rim 34 inches maximum above the floor and a clearance of 29 inches minimum from the floor to the bottom of the front edge of the apron. -- Sec. 4.20.2.1 & Fig. 84.20.3.1 10) It shall extend 17 inches minimum from the wall. The clear knee space shall be 8 inches in depth minimum at 27 inches minimum above the floor and 11 inches in depth minimum at 9 in minimum above the floor. The dip of the overflow shall be ignored when checking the clearances. -- Sec. 4.20.3.1 & Fig. 84.20.3.1 11) A clear floor space of 30 X 48 inches minimum shall be provided in front of the lavatory and shall extend 19 inches maximum under the lavatory. -- Sec. 4.20.3.2 & Fig. 84.20.3.2 12) Water supply and drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated or otherwise treated to protect against contact. -- Sec. 4.20.4 13) The bottom of mirror is required to be within 38 inches of the floor. -- Sec. 4.16.6 & Fig. B4.20.3.1 t SECTION # 2 NFPA 13 sprinkler system throughout the building Sprinkler system used for allowable story increase -- Sec. 506 DIRECTION BOUNDARY NORTH Public way EAST Public way SOUTH Public way WEST Public way SEPARATION AREA INCREASE 5.0 Feet 5.0 Feet 5.0 Feet 5.0 Feet FIRE PROTECTION 5.0 Feet 5.0 Feet 5.0 Feet 5.0 Feet Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 FL NAME Page # 10 OCC MAX FLR AREA ALLOWED RATIO STATUS 1 Office B ok 1560 8000 0.19 ok TOTAL FOR FLOOR 1560 8000 0.19 ok BUILDING TOTAL 1560 8000 0.19 ok The actual height of this building is 25. feet. The maximum height of the building is 40. feet. -- Table 5-B Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 Page # 11 EXTERIOR WALL FIRE RATINGS AND OPENING PROTECTION Table 5-A NORTH For Occupancy EAST For Occupancy B SOUTH For Occupancy B WEST For Occupancy B Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Wall Wall Protection Material Required 1 hour 1 hour 3/4 hour Any Yes Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Wall Wall Protection Material Required 1 hour 1 hour 3/4 hour Any Yes Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Wall Wall Protection Material Required 1 hour 1 hour 3/4 hour Any Yes Bearing Non -Bearing Opening Construction Parapet Wall Wall Protection Material Required 1 hour 1 hour 3/4 hour Any Yes None No fire protection requirements for openings. 3/4 hour Openings are to be protected with 3/4 hr fire assemblies. 50% of the area of the wall maximum. -- Table 5-A, Footnote 5 & Sec. 503.2.2 Maximum single window size is 84 sq.ft. with no dimension greater than 12 feet. -- Sec. 713.8 Not Allowed Openings are not permitted in this wall. Parapet If exceptions do not apply, exterior walls indicated require a parapet wall not less than 30 inches above the roofing. The parapet wall is required to have the same fire rating as the wall. The uppermost 18 inches shall have noncombustible faces including counterflashing and coping materials. -- Sec. 709.4.2 EXCEPTIONS: 1) When roof is a two-hour assembly. 2) When the roof is entirely of noncombuxtible material. 3) One-hour walls with one-hour fire -resistive roof construction per exception #5 4) Wall is not required to be fire -resistive and openings are not restricted. -- Indicated by 'No' above. See section 709.4.1 for details and additional exceptions. OTHER BUILDING ELEMENTS MATERIAL Any Any Any Any Any Any Any ELEMENT Interior Bearing wall Interior nonbrg wall Structural Frame Exterior Struct Frame Floor/Ceiling Assembly Roof/Ceiling Assembly Stairs Table 6-A RATING 0 hr 0 hr 0 hr 0 hr 0 hr 0 hr None NOTES See footnote #1 Page # 12 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 FOOTNOTES: 1) Elements in an exterior wall located where openings are not permitted or where protection of openings is required, shall be protected against external fire exposure as required for exterior bearing walls or the structural frame, whichever is greater. -- Table 6-A, footnote 1 DRAFT STOPS: If there is combustible construction in the roof/ceiling assembly, draft stops shall be installed so that the area of concealed space does not exceed 3,000 square feet and so that the horizontal dimension between stops does not exceed 60 feet. -- Sec. 708.3.1.2.2 When sprinklers are installed in the attic, the area may be 9,000 sq.ft. and the greatest horizontal dimension may be 100 feet. SECTION # 2 EXIT REQUIREMENTS: FL NAME NUMB MIN MIN PANIC RATED DOOR NOTES OCC EXITS WIDTH HDWR CORRIDOR SWING 1 Office TOTAL 16 1 0.3 No N/A N/R 16 1 0.3 No N/A N/R Door swing is based on Sec. 1004.2 except as noted. Occupant load factor is based on Table 10-A. Number of exits is based on Table 10-A except as noted. Exit width is in feet and based on Sec. 1003.2. Exit width is to be divided approximately equally among exits. Width shown for all areas is based on other exits. (0.2) Width shown for 1st floor is based on other exits. (0.2) Width shown for other floors & basements is based on stairways. (0.3) For the minimum width of doors, see Sec. 1004.6 For the minimum width of corridors, see Sec. 1005.2 For the minimum width of stairways, see Sec. 1006.2 FOOTNOTES: FLUSH AND SURFACE BOLTS: Manually operated edge or surface -mounted flush bolts and surface bolts are prohibited. When automatic flush bolts are used, the door leaf having the automatic flush bolt shall not have a door knob or surface -mounted hardware. The unlatching of any leaf shall not require more than one operation. -- Sec. 1004.3 Page # 13 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 LOCKS AND LATCHES; All means of egress doors shall be readily openable from the side from which egress is to be made without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. -- Sec. 1004.3 Key -locking hardware may be used on the main exit when the main exit consists of a single door or pair of doors if there is a sign stating THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS. When unlocked, door(s) must swing without operation of any latching device. -- exc. STAIR NOTES: Public stairways: 1) The rise of steps shall not be less than 4 inches or greater than 7 inches. The minimum run is 11 inches. The maximum variation is 3/8 inch in a flight of stairs. -- Sec. 1006.3 2) The minimum width of a stairway is 36 inches, 44 inches if the occupant load is greater than 49. -- Sec. 1006.2 Also see exit table above to see if minimum width is greater than 44 inches. 3) Provide a handrail on both sides of stairway 34 to 38 inches above the nosing. May be on one side of stairways less than 44 inches wide. --- Sec. 1006.9 & exception 1 4) Provide a guard rail where drop off is greater than 30 inches. -- Sec. 509.1 5) The minimum height is 42 inches. Sec. 509.2 6) Open guardrails shall have intermediate rails or ornamental pattern such that a sphere 4 inches in diameter cannot pass through. -- Sec. 509.3 The triangular opening formed at the riser, tread and guardrail may be 6 inches. -- 509.3 exc. 2 7) The minimum headroom is 6 ft.- 8 inches. Such clearance shall be measured vertically from a plane parallel and tangent to the stairway tread nosing to the soffit above at all points. -- Sec. 1006.15 8) Enclosed usable space under the stairs is required to be protected as required for 1 hr. fire -resistive construction. -- Sec. 1006.12 LANDINGS AT DOORS: 1) A floor or landing shall be provided on each side of doors. When access for persons with disabilities is required. the floor or landing shall not be more than 1/2 inch lower than the threshold. When access is not required, the maximum is 1 inch. -- Sec. 1004.9 2) Landings shall have a width not less than the width of the stairway or width of the doorway, whichever is the greater. The minimum length in the direction of exit travel is 44 inches. -- Sec. 1004.10 TRAVEL DISTANCE: The maximum travel distance in this building is 200 feet. -- Sec. 1003.4 Page # 14 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY: 1) This building including each tenant shall be provided with at least one entrance which complies with the accessible route provisions of CABO/ANSI A117.1. At least 50 percent of all entrances shall be accessible. -- Sec. 1103.2.3 2) When more that one exit is required from any accessible space, each accessible portion of the space shall be served by not less than two accessible means of egress. -- Sec. 1104.1.1 3) When an exit stairway is part of an accessible means of egress, the stairway shall have a clear width of not less than 46 inches between the handrails. The stairway shall either incorporate an area of refuge within an enlarged story -level landing or shall be accessed from an area of refuge. -- Sec. 1104.1.2 The area of refuge shall have direct access to the stairway that serves it. -- Sec. 1104.2.1 4) Each area of refuge shall be sized to accommodate one wheelchair space not less than 30 inches by 48 inches for each 200 occupants, or portion thereof. -- Sec. 1104.2.3 5) If the area of refuge is not within the stairway, it shall be separated from the rest of the story by a smoke barrier having at least a one- hour fire -resistance rating. Smoke barriers shall extend to the roof or floor deck above. Doors shall be smoke and draft control assemblies with a rating not less than 20 minutes. -- Sec. 1104.2.4 6) Two-way communications are required. -- Sec. 1104.2.5 7) Each area must be identified by a sign stating AREA OF REFUGE and the international symbol of accessibility. 8) NOTE: Exit stairways in buildings protected throughout by an approved automatic sprinkler system are NOT required to incorporate an area of refuge. -- Sec. 1104.1.2 exception #2 ROOFING REQUIREMENTS: 1) The roofing on this building is required to be Class C. -- Table 15-A 2) See section 1504 and ICBO research reports for requirements. Page # 15 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 AREA SEPARATION WALL REQUIREMENTS: 1) The area separation wall is required to be a 2 hr fire assembly. Openings are limited to 25 percent of the length of the wall and protected with a 1 1/2 hour assembly. -- Sec. 504.6.2 2) If the building has a projection, 1 hr. protection is required on the exterior wall each side of the area separation wall equal to the depth of the projection.--- Sec. 504.6.3, exceptions If the projection has a concealed space at the area separation, wall, the area separation wall must extend through the projection. 3) If the area separation wall terminates at an inside corner, see the article in 'Building Standards' Sep/Oct 1982 for requirements. 4) A 30 inch high parapet wall is required above the roofing. -- Sec.504.6.4 See exceptions for alternate protection at roof. The faces shall be momcombustible for the uppermost 18 inches including counterflashing and coping materials. -- Sec. 504.6.5 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS: If there are 100 or more sprinklers, all valves controlling the water supply and water -flow switches shall be electrically monitored. Valve monitoring and water -flow alarm and trouble signals shall be distinctly different and shall be automatically transmitted to an approved central station, remote station or proprietary monitoring station. -- Sec. 904.3.1 STANDPIPE REQUIREMENTS: There is no requirement for a standpipe. -- Table 9-A FOOTNOTES: VENTILATION: All areas customarily occupied by humans shall be provided with natural ventilation by means of openable exterior openings with an area of not less than 1/20 of the total floor area or shall be provided with a mechanically operated ventilation system. Such system shall be capable of supplying a minimum of 15 cubic feet per minute of outside air per occupant. -- Sec. 1202.2.1 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 Page # 16 WALL AND CEILING FINISH: 1) Wall and ceiling finish materials are required to comply with Sec. 804.1 and Table 8-B. 2) Carpeting on the ceiling is required to have a Class I flame spread rating. -- Sec. 804.2 3) Textile wall coverings shall have Class I flame spread rating. and shall be protected by automatic sprinklers or meet the acceptance criteria of U.B.C. Standard No. 8-2 -- Sec. 805 INSULATION NOTES: 1) All insulation material including facings are required to have a flame -spread rating of 25 or less and a maximum smoke density of 450 unless it is in a concealed space and the facing is in contact with a wall or ceiling. -- Sec. 707.3 exc.2 2) Foam plastic insulations are required to be protected. Sec. 2602 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS: For B occupancy Page # 17 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 ACCESSIBLE FACILITIES: NOTE: Except as noted, section numbers listed below are from CABO/ANSI A117.1 - 1992 WATER FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS: At least 50 percent of drinking fountains, but not less than one, provided on every floor shall be accessible. -- UBC Sec. 1105.4.1 Accessible units must comply with the following: 1) Spout is to be within 36 inches of the floor. -- Sec. 4.15.2.1 2) Spout arranged for parallel approach shall be located 3 inches maximum from the front edge. Spouts of cantilevered units with knee and toe clearances shall be located 15 inches minimum from the vertical support and 5 inches maximum from the front edge. -- Sec. 4.15.2.2 3) Spouts shall provide a flow of water 4 inches height minimum. -- Sec. 4.15.2.3 4) Operable parts shall be located at or near the front edge of the unit and shall comply with 4.25.4 -- Sec. 4.15.3 5) A cantilevered unit is required to extend 17 inches minimum from the vertical support. Clear knee space must provide a clear area of 8 inches in depth at 27 inches high and 11 inches at 9 inches minimum above the floor. -- Sec. 4.15.4.1 6) Forward approach units shall comply with 4.2. Units in alcoves shall comply with 4.2.4.4. Units not having the necessary knee and toe clearance or clear space under them shall comply with 4.2.4 and have a clear floor space that allows a person in a wheelchair to make a parallel approach. -- Sec. 4.15.4.2 TOILET FACILITIES: 1) A 60 inch diameter unobstructed turning space is required in the toilet room. -- Sec. 4.16.3, 4.2.3 & Fig. B4.2.3 2) Water closet shall be mounted adjacent to a side wall or partition. The distance from the side wall or partition to the centerline of the water closet shall be 18 in. Sec. 4.17.1 3) When the accessible water closet is not in a stall: The clear floor space shall be 48 in minimum in front of the water closet and 42 in from the center line of the water closet on the side not adjacent to the wall. -- Sec. 4.17.2 & Fig. B4.17.2 4) When the accessible water closet is in a stall: The stall shall be 60 in wide minimum and 56 in deep minimum for wall hung water closets and 59 in deep minimum for floor mounted water closets. -- Sec. 4.18.3.1 If the door swings into the stall, the required depth shall be increased by 36 inches minimum. -- Sec. 4.18.3.2 & Fig. B4.1B.3.1 5) The bars are to be 33 to 36 inches above the floor and shall be provided on the rear wall and on the side wall closest to the water closet. -- Sec. 4.24.2.2 & Figs. B4.17.3, B4.17.4 and B4.18.3.1 a) Side grab bar is required to start within 12 inches of the backwall and extend to 54 inches from the back wall. (The minimum length of the bar is 42 in) -- Sec. 4.17.4.1 & Page # 18 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 Figs. B4.17.3 and B4.18.3.1 b) The rear bar shall be 24 in long minimum, centered on the water closet. Where space permits, the bar shall be 36 in long minimum, with the additional length provided on the transfer side. -- Sec. 4.17.4.2 & Figs. B4.17.3, B4.17.4 and B4.18.3.1 6) The top of the seat on the water closet is required to be 17 to 19 inches above the floor. -- Sec. 4.17.3 & Fig. B4.17.3 7) Accessible urinals shall be of the stall type or wall hung with the rim at 17 inches maximum above the floor. -- Sec. 4.19.2 8) A clear area of 30 X 48 inches minimum is required in front of the urinal. Privacy shields shall not extend beyond the front edge of the urinal rim, unless they are 30 inches apart minimum. -- Sec. 4.19.3 9) Accessible lavatories shall be mounted with the rim 34 inches maximum above the floor and a clearance of 29 inches minimum from the floor to the bottom of the front edge of the apron. -- Sec. 4.20.2.1 & Fig. B4.20.3.1 10) It shall extend 17 inches minimum from the wall. The clear knee space shall be 8 inches in depth minimum at 27 inches minimum above the floor and 11 inches in depth minimum at 9 in minimum above the floor. The dip of the overflow shall be ignored when checking the clearances. -- Sec. 4.20.3.1 & Fig. 34.20.3.1 11) A clear floor space of 30 X 48 inches minimum shall be provided in front of the lavatory and shall extend 19 inches maximum under the lavatory. -- Sec. 4.20.3.2 & Fig. B4.20.3.2 12) Water supply and drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated or otherwise treated to protect against contact. -- Sec. 4.20.4 13) The bottom of mirror is required to be within 38 inches of the floor. -- Sec. 4.16.6 & Fig. B4.20.3.1 Page # 19 Code review for: Project Id.: Roaring Fork Address: HWY 82 GLAZING REQUIREMENTS All glazing in hazardous locations is required to be of safety glazing material. -- Sec. 2406.3 & 2406.4 Locations: 1) Glazing in ingress and egress doors except jalousies. 2) Glazing in fixed and sliding panels of sliding door assemblies and panels in swinging doors other than wardrobe doors. 3) Glazing in storm doors. 4) Glazing in all unframed swinging doors. 5) Glazing in doors and enclosures for hot tubs, whirlpools, saunas, steam rooms, bathtubs and showers. Glazing in any portion of a building wall enclosing these compartments where the bottom exposed edge of the glazing is less than 60 inches above a standing surface and drain inlet. 6) Glazing in fixed or operable panels adjacent to a door where the nearest exposed edge of the glazing is within a 24 -inch arc of either vertical edge of the door in a closed position and where the bottom exposed edge of the glazing is less than 60 inches above the walking surface. 7) Glazing in an individual fixed or operable panel, other than those locations described in items 5 and 6 above, than meets all of the following conditions: A. Exposed area of an individual pane greater than 9 square feet. B. Exposed bottom edge less than 18 inches above the floor. C. Exposed top edge greater than 36 inches above the floor. D. One or more walking surfaces within 36 inches horizontally of the plane of the glazing. 8) Glazing in railings regardless of height above a walking surface. Included are structural baluster panels and nonstructural in -fill panels. 9) Glazing in walls and fences used as the barrier for indoor and outdoor swimming pools and spas when the bottom edges is less than 60 inches above the pool side and the glazing is within 5 feet of the pool or spa deck area. 10) Glazing in walls enclosing stairway landings or within 5 feet of then bottom and top of stairways where the bottom edge is less than 60 inches above the walking surface. THIS CARD 13 PUSTED UN THE JUTS 24 HOURS NOTICE REQUIRED FOR INSPECTIONS BUILDING PERMIT GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO Date Issued. .'!/ . Zoned Area • Permit No. ...7 2.. AGREEMENT In consideration of the issuanci of this permit, the applicant hereby agrees to comply with all laws and regulations related to the zoning, location; construction and erection of the proposed structure for which this permit is granted, and further agrees that if the above said reggulations, are not fully complied with in the zoning, location, erection and construction of the above described structure, the permit may then be revoked by notice from the County Building Inspej for and IMMEDIATELY BECOME NULL AND VOID. Use This Card Must Be Posted So It is Plainly Visible From The Street Until Final Inspection. INSPECTION RECORD Footing - a Foundation i—iff '1'T" �' round Plumbing '•� Insulation %tooth Plumbing Y ;,1 Drywall Chimney & Vent 7"- Electric Final (by State Inspector) r'► ' f s Piping i111# "- /7-0/ . 4. ectric Rough (By State Inspector) -"t--,, - ptilifinal• Framing (To include Roof in place and Windows and Doors installed). Notes: ,4a.„, ;:' ALL LISTED ITEMS MUST BE INSPECTED WHETHER INTERIOR OR EXTEBfO AND APPROVED BEFORE COVERING - UNDERGROUND OR ABOVE GROUND. Sgq 3 THIS PERMJT IS OT: TRANSFERABLE Ph o 109 8th Street County Courthouse Glenwood Springs, Colorado. DO NOT DESTROY THIS CARD AQP VED -= ...�._ (-fr) EVEIFT =mpviummupupx'. ,1101:11'�lull fl111l11III&LVlili11 II rimf LANT TION 9i•d 0111 1 ilii y �� y',I I� i I Il�ug � �Nual�✓d��:ul.�: TOC -1 RANCH AT ROARING FORK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO TABLE OF CONTENTS ITEM PAGE ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID AB -1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS IB -1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Scope GC -1 2. Definitions GC -1 3. Intent of Drawings and Specifications GC -1 4. Availability of Drawings and Specifications GC -2 5. Supplemental Drawings GC -2 6. Materials, Workmanship, and Employees GC -2 7. Royalties and Patents GC -3 8. Other Contracts GC -3 9. Licenses, Permits and Regulations GC -3 10. Protection of Work and Property, Accident Prevention, Damages GC -3 11. Surveys, Lines and Grades GC -5 12. Changes in the Work GC -5 13. Insurance GC -7 14. Performance Bond and Payment Bond GC -9 15. Authority and Duties of the Engineer GC -10 16. Rights and Responsibilities of the Contractor GC -12 17. Progress and Control of the Work GC -14 18. Payments to the Contractor GC -14 19. Rights of the Owner GC -16 20. Completeness of Work GC -17 21. Liquidated Damages GC -17 22. Sanitary Regulations GC -18 23. Samples and Tests GC -18 24. Cleaning Up GC -18 25. Sales and Use Taxes GC -18 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PROVISIONS 1. General Description of Work SCP -1 2. Water SCP -1 3. Construction Power and Lighting SCP -1 4. Preconstruction Conference SCP -1 5. Field Offices SCP -2 6. Contract Award SCP -2 7. Bid Price Details SCP -2 94-021.002:102699 TOC -2 ITEM PAGE 8. Geotechnical Reports SCP -2 9. Winter Shut -Down SCP -2 10. Completion of the Work SCP -2 11. Bid Items SCP -2 12. Dewatering SCP -3 13. Excavation SCP -3 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT SPECIFICATIONS Aa. Site Earthwork SAa-1 Ab. Roads and Sitework SAb-1 Ba. Concrete SBa-1 Bb. Tank/Basin Watertightness Testing SBb-1 Bc. Precast Concrete SBc-1 Bd. Concrete Masonry SBd-1 Ca. Buried Pipelines SCa-1 Cb. Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines SCb-1 Da. General Equipment Provisions SDa-1 Db. Pumps SDb-1 Dc. Agitators SDc-1 Dd. Blowers SDd-1 De. Clarifier Equipment SDe-1 Df. Flow Measurement Equipment SDf-1 E. Interior Piping and Plumbing SE -1 F. Valve and Accessories SF -1 Ga. Electrical SGa-1 Gb. Instrumentation and Controls SGb-1 Gc. Variable Frequency Drive SGc-1 H. Heating and Ventilating SH -1 I. Miscellaneous Metals SI -1 J. Roofing and Sheet Metal SJ -1 K. Metal Doors, Frames and Hardware SK -1 L. Glazing, Windows, and Skylights SL -1 M. Sealants and Caulking SM -1 N. Carpentry, Millwork, and Miscellaneous Metals SN -1 O. Gypsum Wallboard SO -1 P. Exterior Finish SP -1 Q. Painting and Protective Coatings SQ -1 R. Laboratory Furnishings SR -1 S. Vinyl Floor Coverings SS -1 94-021.0021E02699 ti 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TOC -3 T. Wood Cribbing Retaining Walls ST- 1 U. Dewatering Wells SU -1 V. Liner System SV -1 ITEM PAGE PROPOSAL P-1 NOTICE OF AWARD NA -1 AGREEMENT A-1 PERFORMANCE BOND PB -1 PAYMENT BOND PB -3 NOTICE TO PROCEED NP -1 94-021.002:102699 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RANCH AT ROARING FORK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY CONTRACT 2 INVITATION FOR BIDS 1. Sealed Proposals for construction of the Wastewater Treatment Facility will be received by the Ranch at Roaring Fork Homeowners Association at the office of the Engineer, 2420 Alcott Street, Denver, CO 80211, on a date to be specified later by the Engineer, at which time the proposals will be publicly opened and read. Any proposal received after the specified time will be immediately returned to the Bidder unopened. The site of the work is located at the Ranch at Roaring Fork Development in Garfield County, Colorado, approximately 2 miles east of Carbondale, Colorado. The major items of work shown on the drawings and described in the specifications are summarized as follows: • Construction of a 22' x 40' aeration basin with office/equipment facility building above; • Construction of 22' covered octagonal clarifier; • Four wet wells at the corners of the clarifier; • Modifications to headworks and floodproofing; • Dewatering wells; • Road work and utility supply; • Connections to existing treatment plant; • Supply and installation of all appurtenances; • All related electrical and control work necessary to result in a complete functional wastewater treatment facility; • All related site grading, fill, site improvements, and yard piping, including outfall pipe. 2. The final set of Contract Documents, containing the detailed Drawings and Specifications for the construction of the work, together with the proposed Construction Contract, will be provided to all parties interested in bidding this project once the State has granted approval for the design. 3. Bid security in the amount of 5 percent, unqualified, of the total Proposal price, will be required with each Proposal. Character and disposition of such bid security are stated in "Instructions to Bidders" of the Contract Documents. Included with the Contract Documents is a Bid Bond form to be used by Bidders not submitting a cashier's check or a certified check. 4. Further information will be found in "Instructions to Bidders" of the Contract Documents. Each Bidder will be assumed to be familiar with all Contract Documents, including all Drawings and Specifications. Published: Ranch at Roaring Fork Homeowners Association By/s/ 94.021.002:3150 1 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IB -1 Bidders will observe the following instructions. These instructions are supplementary to the instructions contained in the "Advertisement for Bids" to which each Bidder shall also give particular attention in preparing his Proposal. 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The following together comprise the Contract Documents and are hereby made a part and parcel thereof. 1. Advertisement for Bids 2. Instruction to Bidders 3. General Conditions 4. Special Construction Provisions 5. Specifications 6. Proposal 7. Notice of Award 8. Agreement 9. Performance Bond 10. Payment Bond 11. Notice to Proceed 12. Drawings, including supplemental drawings and schedules, if any 13. Addenda, if any Wherever the word "Contract" appears, it shall be held to include all the foregoing. No less than all of the parts of the Contract Documents shall constitute the formal Contract. 2. PROPOSAL: In filling out the Proposal, Bidders shall be governed by the following: (a) Bids shall be made upon the form provided in the Contract Documents. All prices must be written in words and expressed in figures. If a discrepancy exists between the amount stated in words and the amount stated in figures, the amount stated in words shall govern. In case of an error in the extension of the price, the unit bid price shall govern. Prices shall be typewritten or written in ink. Changes in the Proposal must be initialed. The Proposal must be signed by one duly authorized to do so, and, in case it is signed by a deputy or subordinate, the principal's proper written authority to such deputy or subordinate must accompany the Proposal. (b) If the Proposal is submitted by: An Individual: The person signing the Proposal shall state below his signature that he is the sole owner of his business. SSI:INST-BI D.SrD:0E 25001427 18-2 A Partnership: The Proposal shall be signed with the Partnership name by one of the members of the Partnership, or by an authorized representative, followed by the signature and designation of the person signing. A Corporation: The person signing the Proposal must be the President or Vice President of the corporation. He must state his title and make certain that the corporation seal is affixed and attested by the Secretary of the Corporation. (c) A Proposal may be disregarded by the Owner if any modification of the Contract Documents as prepared by the Owner shall be made by the Bidder, or if the Bidder shall fait to fully complete and fill in all blanks necessary to a completion of the Proposal and related documents. 3. PROPOSAL GUARANTY: Each Proposal must be accompanied by a cashier's check or a certified check on a bank that is a member of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or a Bidder's Bond properly executed by an approved surety company authorized to do business in the State of Colorado, payable without condition to the Owner. The Bid Bond must be on the form provided with the Contract Documents. The amount of such Proposal Guaranty shall be not less than 5 percent of the amount of the Base Bid. Each Bidder agrees that by filing his Proposal together with his Proposal Guaranty in consideration of the Owner's receiving and considering such Proposal, such Proposal shall be firm and binding upon each such Bidder. The Proposal Guaranty shall be held by the Owner until a Proposal is accepted, the Agreement is executed, a satisfactory Performance Bond, Payment Bond and requisite Certificates of Insurance are furnished by the Successful Bidder, or for a period not to exceed 30 days from the date of the opening of the Proposals, whichever period shall be shorter. The term "Successful Bidder" shall be deemed to include any Bidder whose Proposal is accepted, whether initially or subsequent to the failure or refusal of another Bidder to enter into contract. Should the Successful Bidder fail or refuse to enter into contract within ten days from the date of the Notice of Award, the Owner shall be entitled to collect the amount of such Bidder's Proposal Guaranty as liquidated damages, to consider all rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of such Bidder's Proposal as abandoned, and to award the Contract to any other Bidder, to readvertise, or otherwise dispose of the work as the Owner may determine best serves its interests. 4. SUBSTITUTIONS: If on the Drawings or in the Specifications any material or process is indicated or specified by patent or proprietary name and/or by name of manufacturer, such shall be interpreted as a description of the material and/or process desired, and shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or equivalent," and the Contractor may offer any material or process equal to that indicated or specified. Provided, however, that if the material, process, or article offered by the Contractor, in the opinion of the Engineer is not equal, then the Contractor must furnish the material, process or article specified or one that in the opinion of the Engineer is equal. The burden of proof of equality shall always be the Contractor's responsibility. SSI:TNST-BI D.STD:OI2S001427 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IB -3 5. OUAL[F[CATIONS: A statement of competency may be required from such Bidders as may be considered in making the award which will include: (a) Work performed by the Contractor in the last five years. (b) Plant and equipment, in detail, available and which he now proposes to use on this work. (c) Recent financial statement relative to resources, including cash and bank credits available. (d) Name of surety company that has indicated its willingness to bond the Bidder. A Bidder otherwise qualified may be required, either before or after the bid opening, to demonstrate availability of equipment and organization, not otherwise committed, to perform the work within the time limits specified in the Contract Documents. Bidders will be required to fully inform the Engineer of their commitments to other work so that he may form an opinion as to their availability for prompt performance of this Contract. No Proposal will be accepted from, and no Contract will be awarded to any person, firm, or corporation that is in arrears to the Owner upon any debt or contract, or that is a defaulter as surety or otherwise, upon any obligation to the Owner. 6. FAMII4ARIZATION: Prior to the submission of the Proposal, each Bidder shall make and shall be deemed to have made a careful examination of the site of the work and of all the Contract Documents. Each Bidder shall make and be deemed to have made a thorough investigation concerning all applicable Federal, State and Municipal laws, regulations and ordinances in reference to labor, materials, specifications, and Contract matters, which may, in any manner, affect the proposed work. Each Bidder shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to all conditions under which he will be obliged to operate should he become the successful Bidder and enter into a Contract for the proposed work. It is understood and agreed that all such factors have been properly investigated and considered in the preparation of every Proposal submitted, as there will be no financial adjustment to any Contract award thereunder which is based on the lack of such prior information or its effect on the cost of the work. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Contract Documents, including Drawings and Specifications, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Engineer for an interpretation or clarification thereof, but in any event no later than four (4) full normal working days prior to the time for the opening of Proposals. Such interpretations or clarifications, subject to the discretion of the Engineer, will be made by a written addendum or bulletin of instructions mailed or delivered by the Engineer to each person or persons who have obtained a set of Contract Documents. Each person requesting an interpretation or clarification will be responsible for delivery of his written request to the Engineer. The Owner will not be bound by, nor be responsible for, any explanations or interpretations of these Contract Documents other than those given in writing, as set forth in this paragraph. 7. CHANGES: The right is reserved by the Owner to revise or to amend any one of the stated parts of the Contract Documents prior to the date set for opening Proposals. Such revisions and SSI:INST•SID.SfD:O123001421 IB -4 amendments, if any, will be announced by addendum, copies of which will be furnished to each Bidder obtaining a set of Contract Documents as provided for in the invitation for Proposals. If the revisions and amendments are of a nature which may require substantial changes in quantities or prices or both, the date set for opening bids may be postponed by such length of time as in the opinion of the Engineer will enable Bidders to revise their Proposals. In such cases, the addendum will include an announcement of the new time for opening bids. 8. TIME FOR COMPLETION: Time required for completion of the work is a basic consideration of the Contract, and the construction period named elsewhere in the Contract Documents will be taken into consideration in the award of the Contract. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Bidder may be required to satisfy the Owner of his ability to complete the work within the time stated. 9. SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL: Proposals must be sealed, addressed to and deposited with the Owner at the location stated in the Advertisement for Bids before the hour set for opening of Proposals in the Advertisement for Bids. The envelope enclosing the Proposal must show the title of the work and the name of the Bidder and the word "Proposal." 10. WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL: A Bidder may withdraw his Proposal at any time prior to the expiration of the period during which Proposals may be submitted, by written request, signed in the same manner and by the same person or persons who signed the Proposal. The Owner agrees to carefully canvass each bid submitted, in consideration whereof the submission of a Proposal shall constitute an agreement that the same may not be withdrawn after opening for a period of thirty (30) days. 11. ACCEPTANCE OF PRQPQSAL: Promptly after the opening of the Proposals, a compilation of them will be prepared and the certified checks submitted as Proposal Guaranties by all Bidders, except the three lowest Bidders for each Schedule, will be returned. The certified checks of the three lowest Bidders for each Schedule will be returned as soon as the Bidder to whom the Contract has been awarded executes the Contract and furnishes the Performance Bond and Payment Bond with satisfactory Surety, but not later than thirty (30) days after the date of the opening of Proposals. The Contract will be awarded within thirty (30) days after the opening of Proposals unless all Proposals are rejected, or unless the Bidder to whom the Contract was originally awarded fails to execute the Contract and furnish the required Performance Bond and Payment Bond. The Owner reserves the right to confine his consideration of the Proposals to the base bid or any requested alternate bids. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, to waive inconsistencies and informalities, and to award the Contract on the basis of its own determination of which is the lowest and/or best bid, which best serves the interest of the Owner. 12. REOUIREMENTS OF SUCCESSFUL BIDDER: (a) Agreement: The Successful Bidder will be required to execute the Agreement on forms as included herewith, and to be supplied by the Owner, within ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice of Award. SSI: INST-BI D. STD:0I25001427 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IB -5 (b) Performance Bond and Payment Bond: The Successful Bidder will be required to furnish, at his own expense, fully executed copies of a Contractor's Performance Bond and a Contractor's Payment Bond, each in full amount of the Contract Price in number equal to required copies of the Agreement and in the form attached hereto, within ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice of Award. (c) Certificates of Insurance: The Successful Bidder will be required to furnish at his own expense, fully executed copies of requisite Certificates of Insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice of Award. See General Conditions for Insurance requirements. SSI :INST•BID. ST D:OI 23001427 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1. Scope GC -1 2. Definitions GC -1 3. Intent of Drawings and Specifications GC -1 4. Availability of Drawings and Specifications GC -2 5. Supplemental Drawings GC -2 6. Materials, Workmanship, and Employees GC -2 7. Royalties and Patents GC -3 8. Other Contracts GC -3 9. Licenses, Permits, Regulations GC -3 10. Protection of Work and Property, Accident Prevention, Damages GC -3 11. Surveys, Lines, and Grades GC -5 12. Changes in the Work GC -5 13. Insurance GC -7 14. Performance Bond and Payment Bond GC -9 15. Authority and Duties of the Engineer GC -10 16. Rights and Responsibilities of the Contractor GC -12 17. Progress and Control of the Work GC -14 18. Payments to the Contractor GC -14 19. Rights of the Owner GC -16 20. Completeness of Work GC -17 21. Liquidated Damages GC -17 22. Sanitary Regulations GC -17 23. Samples and Tests GC -18 24. Cleaning Up GC -18 25. Sales and Use Taxes GC -18 SS[: GC•TOC. Sf D:O11 S93 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. SCOPE: The Contract conditions following are general in scope and may refer to conditions not pertinent to this Contract. Any provisions in these General Conditions which are in conflict with the Special Construction Provisions or which are not applicable to the work performed under this Contract will have no meaning and may be disregarded. 2. DEFINITIONS: a. The Contract Documents consist of the Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Agreement, Performance and other Bonds, the General Conditions, Special Construction Provisions, the Drawings and Specifications, including all addenda and change orders thereof incorporated in the documents before their execution. These form the Contract. b. When the words Owner or Contractor are used, these shall mean the corporations, persons, partnerships, or public entities indicated in the Agreement. c. Wherever in this Contract the word Engineer is used it shall be understood as referring to McLaughlin Water Engineers, Ltd. acting personally or through an assistant duly authorized in writing for such act by the Engineer. d. When the word Bidder is used, it shall mean the person, partnership, or corporation submitting a proposal for the performance of the work in accordance with these Contract Documents. e. When the word Surety is used, it shall mean the entity capable under the laws of the state where the project is located, and acceptable to the Owner, which is bound with and for the Contractor for the payment of money if the Contractor fails to meet its obligations with respect either to the performance of the work, or the payment to all those furnishing labor, materials, or equipment in connection with the performance of the work. f. The term "work" of the Contractor or Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the Contract. g. When in the Specifications the words "as directed," "as required," "as permitted," or words of like meaning are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, or permission of the Engineer is intended. Similarly, the words "approved," "acceptable," "satisfactory," shall refer to approval by the Engineer. 3. INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary, and work called for on any Drawing and not mentioned in the Specifications, or work described in the Specifications and not shown on any Drawing, is to be regarded as included under this Contract, the same as if set forth in the Specifications and exhibited on the Drawings. SSI:GC-STD:011593 GC -2 The prices shown in the Contract Documents shall include the costs of all labor and materials, equipment and services, and all other expenses necessary for the complete execution of the work Contracted for, so that it will function as a working unit of the facility of which it will be a part. In interpreting the Contract Documents, words describing materials, or work having a well-known technical or trade meaning, unless otherwise specifically defined, shall be construed in accordance with such well-known meaning recognized by engineers, architects, and the trades. 4. AVAILABILITY OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Engineer will furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep at the job site one copy of all Drawings and Specifications on the work, in good order, available to the Engineer and to his representatives. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Engineer are his property. They are not to be used on other work and, with the exception of the signed Contract set, are to be returned to him on request, at the completion of the work. 5. SUPPLVMENTALDRAWINGS: When required by the Specifications or Drawings, and for all undetailed material to be fabricated, the Contractor shall make detailed shop drawings to amplify the Drawings referred to in the Contract before proceeding with the work. Sets of prints of such drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer as follows: three prints to be retained by the Engineer, plus one or more prints, as required by the Contractor (as established at the inception of the Contract) to be returned to the Contractor. If no exceptions are taken, such sets of prints will be marked "No Exceptions Taken." If changes or corrections are necessary, such changes or corrections will be noted, and the Contractor shall resubmit complete sets of prints of corrected drawings. The review by the Engineer of the Contractor's drawings relates only to their general conformity with the Drawings and Specifications and does not guarantee detail dimensions and quantities, nor does it relieve the Contractor from the basic requirements and intent of the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions and those shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site. 6. MATERIALS. WORKMANSHIP. AND EMPLOYEES: Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. Prior to procurement, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, for his review, the name of the manufacturer of machinery and other equipment and materials which he contemplates incorporating in the work. The Contractor shall also furnish information on capacities,, efficiencies, sizes, etc., and other information as may be required by the Engineer. Samples shall be submitted for review when requested. SSI:GC•STD:011593 GC -3 None but foremen and workmen skilled in the work assigned to them shall be employed on work requiring special qualifications, and the Contractor shall discharge from his service, any disorderly, dangerous, insubordinate, or incompetent person employed on the work. 7. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS: If the Contractor uses any design, device, material, or process covered by letters of patent or copyright in the construction of the work under this Contract, the use of which has not been specified or required by the Drawings and Specifications, then the right for such use shall be provided for by a suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner. A copy of this agreement shall be filed with the Owner. The Contractor and the Surety shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement on any such patented design, device, material, process or any trademark or copyright during the prosecution or after the completion of the work. If any design, device, material, process, or product of a particular manufacturer covered by letters of patent or copyright is specified for use by the Drawings and Specifications, the Owner shall be responsible for any claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such design, device, material, process or product of a particular manufacturer, but the Contractor shall pay any royalties or license fees thereof. 8. OTHER CONTRACTS: The Owner reserves the right to let other Contracts in connection with the work. The Contractor shall afford other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall coordinate his work with theirs. 9. LICENSES. PERMITS. REGULATIONS: Building permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Zoning, land use permits, licenses, and• easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise specified. The Owner shall furnish all legal descriptions of land boundary surveys unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that the Drawings and Specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations and without such notice to the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. 10. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. ACCIDENT PREVENTION. DAMAGES: a. Protection of Work and Property: The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He shall make good any such damage, injury or loss except such as may be directly due to errors in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner. He shall adequately protect adjacent SSI:GC-STD:011593 1 GC -4 1 property as herein provided. He shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and other. facilities for protection as required by public authority or local conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of all public and private property on and adjacent to the site of the work. He shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, and other underground structures and to overhead wires. He shall protect carefully from disturbance or damage all land monuments and property marks until an authorized agent has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location, and shall not remove them until directed. When any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of the non -execution thereof of his part, such damaged property shall be restored by the Contractor at his own expense to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury. b. Safety: In accordance with generally accepted construction practices and the requirements of Local, State, and Federal safety regulations, the Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Engineer to conduct construction observation of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's and Subcontractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site. The Contractor shall at all times, whether or not specifically directed by the Engineer, take necessary precautions to insure the protection of the public. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain, at his own expense, all necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient red lights, construction signs, provide a sufficient number of watchmen and take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work and safety of the public through or around his construction operations. c. Damages: The Contractor hereby expressly binds himself or itself to indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and his officers and employees, the Engineer and his employees, against all suits or actions of every kind and nature brought, or which may be brought, against them or any of them for, or on account of, any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person, firm or corporation, or persons, firms or corporations, in connection with or on account of the Contractor's work under this Contract or by, or in consequence of, any negligence in connection with same or on account of the use of any improper or defective materials or on account of any poor workmanship or on account of any act of commission or omission of the Contractor or his, its or their agent, servants or employees or for any cause arising out of the performance of this Contract. The Contractor also agrees to indemnify and save and protect the Owner and the Engineer and his employees from the expense of investigating and negotiating settlements of any such claims, and from any other expenses incurred by the Owner in or about such claims, or arising out of or in any way connected with such claims. SSl:GC•STD:011593 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GC -5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SURVEYS. LINES AND GRADES: Building base lines, pipeline location points of intersection, and permanent or temporary bench marks shall be established by the Engineer. For this work, the Contractor shall furnish, without charge, competent men from his force and such tools, stakes, and other materials as the Engineer may require for the proper staking out of the work, for making measurements and surveys, and for establishing temporary or permanent reference marks. All other survey, layout or measurement work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. This shall include but not be limited to batter boards, grade stakes, offset stakes, structure layout, elevation transfer stakes and any other surveys required to accomplish the work. All work done under this Contract shall be done to the lines, grades, and elevations shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed, a reasonable time in advance, of the times and places at which he wishes to do work, in order that lines and grades may be furnished and necessary measurements for record and payment may be made with the minimum of inconvenience to the Engineer and of delay to the Contractor. Any work done without being properly located and established by base lines, offset stakes, bench marks, or other basic reference points located, established, or checked by the Engineer, may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's cost and expense. All stakes, bench marks, and other survey points shall be preserved by the Contractor. In case of their destruction by him or his employees, they will be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 12. CHANGES JN TUE WORK: Through the Engineer the Owner may, at any time during the progress of the work, make alterations of, additions or deletions to, or deviations from the work provided for in the Agreement. The work, as changed, shall be performed as if originally specified, and shall in no way invalidate the Contract or the bond or bonds. Any difference in cost shall be added to or deducted from the amount of the Contract, as the case may be. Adjustments in the amounts to be paid to the Contractor on account of changed work shall be determined by one of the following methods in the order listed, the earlier listed being used unless impractical: a. Unit prices submitted in the Contractor's Proposal b. Unit prices agreed upon c. Acceptable lump sum d. Actual cost as defined below: SSI:GC-STD:011593 When in the judgment of the Engineer, it is impracticable because of the nature of the changed work or when the Contractor and Engineer cannot agree to fix the amount to be paid for it by any of the above methods (a), (b), or (c), the amount payable shall be adjusted based on the following methodology. This methodology shall apply to all effort whether it be by the prime Contractor or by the Subcontractors. Apportionment of overhead and profit shall be determined and agreed upon by those parties. The GC -6 methodology involves determination of (l) direct charges, (2) overhead, (3) equipment, (4) actual cost, and (5) profit. (1) Direct Charges. Direct charges shall include all materials and equipment incorporated into the project, all expenditures for materials furnished and used by the Contractor, labor costs (salary paid to workers plus direct benefits) including the working foreman in direct charge of the specific operations. (2) Overhead. The overhead allowance shall be equal to twenty (20) percent of subtotal defined as direct charges. Overhead allowance shall include the cost of general superintendence, rental of small tools, miscellaneous energy and supplies. Where Subcontractors perform work itemized in "Direct Charges," the maximum combined overhead allowance for Subcontractors and the Contractor shall be 20 percent. (3) Jquipment. Costs for use or rental of equipment (other than small tools) which may be required shall be based on rental rates for equipment as shown in the "Rental Rate Blue Book" published by Dataquest or similar published document acceptable to the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. (4) Actual Cost. Actual cost shall be the computed total of the direct charges, overhead, and equipment costs, as defined above. (5) profit. The allowable profit shall be equal to ten (10) percent of the actual cost, as defined above. When the changed work results in a net decrease of the work, the amount payable shall be adjusted according to the same methodology described above, except that the allowable profit shall not be included. The Contractor must notify the Engineer in writing before doing any work which. he considers additional and which would require additional compensation. Payroll records, receipts, and other pertinent records which, in the judgment of the Engineer, are required for the establishment of "actual cost," shall be provided to the Engineer by the Contractor. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which, in his opinion, he should receive extra compensation, he shall immediately make a written request to the Engineer for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or concerning the payment thereof, and the Engineer insists on its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making a written request for a written change order and shall keep an accurate account of the direct charges as provided for in Method "d" in the foregoing paragraph. The Contractor will thereby not waive any right he might have to compensation for the claimed "extra work." The matter will be submitted to the Owner for final determination as to whether or not the extra work constitutes a change order. SSI.GC•STD:OI 1593 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GC -7 The Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving extra cost. No claim for additional payment shall be valid unless authorized in writing as above provided. 13. INSURANCE: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him, the Owner, and the Engineer from claims set forth below which may arise out of, or result from the Contractor's execution of the Work, whether such execution be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: a. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts; b. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of his employees; c. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees; d. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; and e. Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and f. Contractual liability insurance covering any liability that the Contractor has assumed by virtue of his obligations outstanding under this Contract. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his own expense, during the Contract time, insurance as hereinafter specified: (1) General Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and maintain Contractor's General Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance issued to the Contractor and protecting him from all claims for personal injury, including death, and all claims of destruction of or damage to property arising out of or in connection with any operations under the Contract Documents, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor under him, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor under him. Insurance shall be written with a limit of liability of not less than $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury, including death, at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by any one person in any one accident; and a limit of liability of not less than $2,000,000 aggregate for any such damages sustained by two or more persons in any one accident. Insurance shall be written with a limit of liability of not less than $500,000 for all property damage sustained by any one person in any one accident; and a limit of liability of not less than $1,000,000 aggregate for any such damage sustained by two or more persons in any one accident. SSI:GC•STD:DI 1593 1 GC -8 ' (2) Fire and Extended Coverage insurance: The Contractor shall procure and maintain, if applicable, Fire and Extended Coverage insurance covering the project to the full insurable value thereof for the benefit of the Owner, the Contractor, and Subcontractors as their interest may appear. This provision shall in no way release the Contractor or Contractor's Surety from obligations under the Contract Documents to fully complete the Project. (3) Workers' Compensation Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and maintain, in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the State in which the work is performed, Workers' Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provisions, for all of his employees at the site of the work and in case any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require such Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provisions for all of the latter's employees, unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under this Contract at the work site is not protected under Workers' Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide, and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide, adequate and suitable insurance for the protection of his employees not otherwise protected. (4) Builder's Risk Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and maintain "All Risk" type Builder's Risk Insurance for Work to be performed other than underground pipelines. Unless specifically authorized by the Owner, the amount of such insurance shall not be less than the Contract Price for work other than buried pipelines totaled in the Bid. The policy shall cover not less than the losses due to fire, explosion, hail, lightning, vandalism, malicious mischief, wind, collapse, riot, aircraft, and smoke during the Contract time, and until the Work is accepted by the Owner. (5) Automotive Liability and Property Damage Insurance: Whenever the work covered by the Contract shall involve the use of automotive equipment the Contractor shall procure and maintain Automotive Public Liability and Property Damage insurance in the following minimum limits: Public Liability Property Damage $500,000 per claim $1,000,000 per accident $100,000 to protect the Contractor from any and all claims arising from the use of the following in the execution of all the work; (a) Contractor's own automobiles and trucks (b) Rented automobiles and trucks (c) Subcontractor's automobiles and trucks All the vehicles shall be covered both on and off the site or sites of the work. SsrGC•STD:011593 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GC -9 All insurance policies required hereunder shall name as insured the Contractor, the Engineer, and the Owner. Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to the commencement of the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled unless at least fifteen (15) days prior written notice has been given the Owner. Self insurance by the Contractor is not acceptable. The Contractor and his insurers will hold harmless, indemnify, and defend the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Subcontractor Consultants, and each of their officers, employees, and agents from any and all liability claims, losses, or damages arising, or alleged to arise, from the performance of the work described herein. The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Subcontractor Consultants, and their officers, employees, and agents arising out of the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, specifications or by giving or failure to give directions or instructions by the Owner, Engineer, the Engineer's Subcontracting Consultants and their officers, employees, or agents providing that said preparation or approval or said giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury, damage, or loss. 14. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMEr1T BOND: The Contractor shall be required by the Owner to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond on the forms furnished by the Owner in an amount not less than the full amount of the Contract price, as security for the faithful performance of the Contract, for the payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing material, and for all other obligations incurred in connection with the work. If, during the continuance of the Contract, the Surety on the Contractor's Performance Bond or Payment Bond becomes irresponsible in the Owner's judgment, the Owner shall have the right to require additional and sufficient sureties at the Contractor's expense which the Contractor shall furnish within ten (10) consecutive calendar days after written notice to do so. The Contractor and his Surety shall be jointly responsible for the maintenance and satisfactory operation for a period of one (1) year, or such other period as may be provided by law, following the Final Acceptance, of all work performed under this Contract, and for the satisfactory repair or replacement of any work, material or equipment which becomes defective during this period; providing any failure results directly or indirectly from faulty workmanship or negligence by the Contractor, from faulty manufacturing or from faulty erection or improper handling of materials or equipment furnished or installed by the Contractor. Neither the Contractor nor Surety shall be liable under this paragraph for any failure resulting from the Owner's neglect or want of proper operation of facilities or acts of a third party. When any faulty condition is found, the Owner shall serve notice to the Contractor and/or his Surety of this condition. Upon receipt of said notice the Contractor or his Surety shall proceed within 10 days and with due diligence to perform all repairs and/or replacements in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the Owner. The expiration date for the repaired or replaced work shall be the same as that for the original work. If, in repairing his own work, the Contractor damages the work or property of others, the repair and payment for such shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Should the Contractor fail or refuse SSI:GC-STD:O11S93 GC -10 to proceed as stated above, the Owner may at his option, and without further notice to the Contractor, arrange for such work to be done at the expense of the Contractor. 15. AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF THE ENGINEER: The Engineer is designated by the Owner to exercise authority on his behalf under this Contract and to see that the work product meets the requirements and intent of the Drawings and Specifications. If substantial cause exists where requirements of the Drawings and the Specifications are not being met, work under this Contract may, without cost or claim against the Owner, be suspended by the Engineer. When the Contractor is not present on the work, he shall have a superintendent or other representative present who shall, during the absence of the Contractor, be his representative and have immediate charge of the work and who shall have all of the authority and duties of the Contractor hereunder. The superintendent or representative shall have the Contractor's authority to act in lieu of the Contractor in his absence. a. Decisions: The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time after their presentation to him, make decisions in writing on all claims of the Owner or the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except in cases where time and/or financial considerations are involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to later determination. b. Determinations for Payment: The Engineer shall make all determinations of amounts and quantities of work performed hereunder. To assist him in his work the Contractor shall make available for inspection any records kept by him. c. Access to Work: The Engineer and his authorized representatives shall have free access to the work at all times, and the Contractor shall furnish them with facilities for ascertaining whether the work being performed, or the work which has been completed, is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. d. Cons ruction Checking: The Engineer will make periodic observations of construction (sometimes commonly referred to as "inspection" or "supervision"). The purpose of these observations and construction checking is to determine the progress of the work and to see if the work is being performed in accordance with plans and specifications. He will in no way be responsible for how the work is performed, safety in, on, or about the job site, methods of performance, or timeliness in the performance of the work. e. Inspection of Work: Inspectors may be appointed to inspect materials used and work done. Inspections may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation or manufacture of the materials to be used. The inspectors will not be authorized to alter the provisions of these Specifications, or to delay the fulfillment of the Contract by failure to inspect materials and work with reasonable promptness. An Inspector cannot issue SSI:GC-STD:OI 1543 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GC -11 instructions contrary to the Drawings and Specifications or act as foreman for the Contractor. The Inspector will have authority to reject defective material and to suspend any work that is being done improperly subject to the final decision of the Engineer. If substandard material not conforming to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications has been delivered to the project, or has been incorporated in the work, or if work shall have been performed of inferior quality, then such material or work shall be considered as defective and shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor. All materials shall be subject to examination and testing by the Engineer at any time during manufacture. The right is reserved to reject defective materials during manufacture or before they have been incorporated into the work. If the Contractor fails to replace rejected materials, the Owner may replace them or correct defective work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor or may terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed. Any earlier failure to detect defective material or workmanship shall not impair Owner's right to a finally completed project as contemplated by paragraph twenty of these General Conditions. If the Specifications, the Engineer's instructions, laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be specifically tested or checked, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by an authority other than the Engineer, of the date fixed for such inspection. Inspections by the Engineer shall be promptly made and where practicable at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without consent of the Engineer, k must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of the questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost, unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor; in that event, the Owner shall pay such cost. f. Suspension of Work - Climatic Conditions: The Engineer may order the Contractor to suspend work that may be damaged or endangered by climatic conditions. When adverse climatic conditions are unusual and extensive, an extension of time may be granted the Contractor by the Engineer. g. SS1:GC-STD:Ot 1393 Final Inspection and Acceptance: When the work specified in the Contract is completed and the final cleanup has been performed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that all work under the Contract has been completed and that a final inspection by the Engineer is requested. Within ten (10) days after receipt of the final inspection request, the Engineer shall make the inspection. Within a reasonable time after completion GC -12 of the final inspection, the Engineer will issue a list of items which are not in conformance with the Contract and which are required to be corrected by the Contractor. Following the satisfactory completion of the corrective items, the Engineer will recommend acceptance of the work to the owner. Neither the final inspection, nor recommended acceptance, nor final estimate, nor any possession of the work by the Owner shall operate as a waiver of the provisions of these Contract Documents or power reserved herein to the Owner, or of any right to damages herein provided. 16. RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OFj'HE CONTRACTOR: a. General: It is hereby agreed by the Contractor that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, including subsurface conditions, the equipment and facilities needed to prosecute the work, the local conditions, and all other matters which can affect the work under this Contract. If the Contractor in the course of his work finds a discrepancy between the Drawings and the physical conditions or any errors or omissions on the Drawings, it shall be his duty to inform the Engineer in writing immediately, and the Engineer shall promptly investigate and make any determination required by the circumstances. Any work done after such discovery, until authorized, will be done at the Contractor's risk. In all cases the Engineer shall decide the intent of the Drawings and Specifications and his decision shall be final and binding, except as hereinafter provided. b. Address: The address given in the Contractor's Proposal is hereby designated as the place to which all communications to the Contractor shall be delivered or mailed. The delivery or attempted delivery by the U. S. Postal Service or anyone of such a communication at such address, as certified by such person or by an employee of the U. S. Postal Service, will constitute the giving of notice in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date of said service shall be the date of such delivery. The Contractor's address may be changed at any time if a written notice signed by the Contractor is delivered to the Engineer three (3) days prior to such change. c. Payment for Labor and Materials: The Contractor agrees to pay promptly for work, services and labor of every kind, including payments due Subcontractors, for rental equipment used on the work, for materials that are used in the work, and for labor and material incidental to the completion of the work. If the Contractor has at any time failed to pay for work or services of any kind, before final settlement, including amounts due to labor for Subcontractors, or for rental equipment employed on this work, or has failed to pay for the materials chargeable to the work, or if the Owner suspects that such payments have not been made, the Owner may withhold a sufficient amount to cover any unpaid item until lien waivers or other satisfactory evidence of payment shall have been exhibited to the Engineer. SS1:GC-STD:011593 GC -13 d. Protests: If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him to be outside the Contract requirements, or if he considers any ruling of the Engineer to be unfair, he shall immediately ask for a written instruction or decision and shall proceed to perform the work to conform with the Engineer's ruling. If the Contractor considers such instructions unsatisfactory, he shall, within ten (10) days after their receipt, file a written protest with the Engineer stating his objections and the reason therefore. Unless protests or objections are made in the manner specified and within the time limit stated herein, the Contractor hereby waives all grounds for protests. e. Claims for Extra Cost: If the Contractor claims that any instructions by drawings or otherwise issued after the award of the Contract involve extra cost under this Contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute the work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, and the procedure shall then be as is provided for under changes in the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. f. Superintendence: The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work, using his best skill and attention. g. Contractor's Right to Terminate Contract: If the work should be stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority, for a period of three (3) months, through no act or fault of the Contractor, or of anyone employed by him; or should the Owner fail to make payments at the times provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall, seven (7) days after having given notice to the Owner, have the right to suspend work, or at his option, after thirty (30) days have elapsed from date of said notice in writing, should the Owner continue to be in default, he may terminate the Contract and recover the price of all work done and materials provided and all damages sustained. Such failure by the Owner to make payments at the times provided shall be a bar to any claim by the Owner against the Contractor for delay in completion of the work provided the delay resulted solely from a suspension of work by the Contractor because of the Owner's default. h. Independence of Contractor: The rights of inspection and control of the progress of the work reserved by the Owner are for the protection of the Owner in assuring that the work will be done satisfactorily and do not relieve the Contractor in any way from responsibility for selecting appropriate means of fulfilling his obligations hereunder; nor shall the Contractor at any time be constituted the agent of the Owner for completion of the work or any part of it. SSUGC-STD 011593 GC -14 17. PROGRESS AND CONTROL OF THE WORK: a. Prosecution of the Work: Before work is started and materials ordered, the Contractor shall meet and consult with the Engineer relative to materials, equipment, and all arrangements for prosecuting the work. The work shall be prosecuted at such time and in or on such part or parts of the project and with such forces of workmen, materials, and equipment as may be required to complete the work provided for in the Contract in a first-class and acceptable condition within the time limits specified or agreed upon. The Contractor, if so directed, shall furnish a schedule of expected progress of the work under the Contract, showing approximately the dates on which each part or division of the work is expected to be begun and finished. The Contractor shall also, if so directed, forward to the Engineer as soon as practicable after the first day of each month, a summary report of the progress of the various parts of the work under Contract in the mills, shops, and in the field giving the existing status, rate of progress, estimated time of completion, revisions to the work schedule, and cause of delay, if any. b. 5ubc4lt cj.: The Contractor shall not sublet or Subcontract any portion of the work to be done under this Contract until approval of such action has been obtained from the Owner through the Engineer. The Contractor agrees that he shall remain fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any Contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and the Owner. c. Assignments: Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him hereunder without the previous written consent of the Engineer. 18. PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR: a. Ouantities: The quantities shown in the Proposal (if the Proposal is of unit price form) and the Advertisement For Bids are approximations only and are for the purpose of comparing bids. Claims shall not be made against the Owner for excesses or deficiencies, actual or relative, in the final quantities. The Owner reserves the right to eliminate a part of any item in the Proposal that actual construction work discloses as being unnecessary and under no circumstances will the Contractor be paid a unit price different from the unit price in the proposal because the quantities are different from the quantities in the proposal. b. Partial Payments: Unless otherwise stipulated in the Special Construction Provisions, partial payments will be made to the Contractor at monthly intervals. Monthly payment SSI:GC-STD:O11593 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GC -15 estimates will be made by the Engineer based upon his estimates of the approximate amount and value of work completed during the preceding monthly period. From the total value of work completed the Owner will withhold ten (10) percent from the monthly payments. When the value of work completed has progressed to fifty (50) percent of the Contract amount, and in the Owner's opinion satisfactory progress and quality of work is being maintained, the Owner may elect, at his sole discretion, not to withhold additional retainage for the remainder of the work. The ten (10) percent retainage of the value of work completed may be reinstated if in the Owner's opinion the lack of progress or other substantial reasons exist. The withheld ten (10) percent of the initial fifty (50) percent of the value of work shall be retained until the final payment or until the Owner determines the work is substantially complete and the retainage may be reduced to the amount necessary to assure completion with written approval of the Surety furnishing bonds. Partial payments made by the Owner shall not be construed as an acceptance on the part of the Owner or its Engineer of any part of the work done or of material furnished, but simply as payments on account. c. Final Payment: Within a reasonable time after the acceptance of the work, the Engineer shall certify a final estimate showing the total work done and the amount due the Contractor therefore. After deducting therefrom all previous payments and any other amounts to be kept and retained under the provisions of this Contract or as required by law payment in full shall be made to the Contractor; provided, however, that payment of the final estimate under this Contract, including the amount of the retained percentage under the partial estimates, shall not be due or payable until the Contractor has furnished adequate proof that all claims, liens, or other obligations incurred in connection with the performance of the work have been properly paid and settled by him and all of his Subcontractors. Further, unless stated to the contrary in the Special Construction Provisions, before the Contractor shall receive or be paid the amount of the Engineer's final estimate, the Owner will publish in accordance with State statutory provisions, in a public newspaper of general circulation published in the Counties wherein the work was contracted for and wherein such work was performed and post at the site of the work, a notice stating that it has accepted such work as completed according to the Drawings and Specifications set forth in the Contract, and that final settlement, therefore, is about to be made and that upon thirty (30) days after the first publication, specifying the exact date, the Owner will pay the full balance due under the Contract, and that persons having claims for labor, services, equipment rental, or material furnished the Contractor shall present their claims to the Owner prior to said date specified for such payment. This provision is solely for the protection of the Owner. The Contractor shall have no right or claim by reason of the failure of the Owner to exercise the privilege set forth in this paragraph. d. Payments Withheld: The Owner has the right to withhold payment or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: SSI:GC-STD:011593 GC -16 (1) Defective work not remedied. (2) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. (3) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for material or labor. (4) A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid. (5) Damage to another Contractor. When the above grounds are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 19. RIGHTS OF THE OWNER: a. Bight to Annul Contract: The Owner, at any time, shall have the right to annul the Contract upon giving written notice to the Contractor. In this event the Contractor shall be entitled to the full amount of the approved estimate for the work done by him under the Contract up to the time of such annulment, including the retained percentage. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for such expenditures as, in the judgment of the Engineer, are not otherwise compensated for, together with the cost of moving to and from the work, and a reasonable profit on the work deleted by reason of the annulment of the Contract, in order that an equitable settlement shall be made with the Contractor. The Contractor's rights to payment upon annulment are subject to all of the remaining provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor has no greater right to payment upon annulment than it would otherwise have under the Contract Documents. b. Right to Terminate Contract: This Contract may be terminated by the Owner at any time the Contractor is at substantial default hereunder. For the purposes of this paragraph the term "substantial default" shall mean that the performance of the work set forth under the Contract is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed by the Contractor, or the provisions of this Contract are being or have been violated by the Contractor or his Subcontractor, and such delay or violation has continued for more than five (5) days following written notice to the Contractor of such delay or violation. Any such termination shall be accomplished by written notice thereof to the Contractor and the Surety. The termination shall be effective upon the date set forth in the notice, which date can be, but is not required to be, the same date the notice is given. The notice of termination shall inform the Surety that the Surety then has the opportunity to take over and perform the work called for in the Contract Documents, provided, however, that if the Surety does not commence performance thereof within ten (10) days from the date of said notice, the Owner may take over the work and, without prejudice, prosecute the work to completion and the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the Owner for any excess cost in completing the work and for damages caused by or arising out of the Contractor's default. SS1:GC-STD:OI 1593 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GC -17 c. Right to Do Work: If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the Owner, after seven (7) days' written notice to the Contractor, may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. However, one (1) day's notice will be deemed sufficient if the subject deficiency involves potential loss of life or property. d. Right to Accept Portion of the Work: The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired. However, such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time or both, as the Engineer may determine. 20. COMPLETENESS OF WORK: The facility(ies) to be installed hereunder is to comprise an integral part of the system and/or plant controlled by the Owner and, unless the contrary clearly appears in the Contract Documents, it is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall be obliged to complete the facility(ies) and to place it in good working order as an integral part of said system and plant, and his work shall not be complete until he shall have done so. Before final acceptance, all parts of the work shall be examined and tested if necessary, and each part shall be in good condition and working order, or shall be placed in such condition and order at the expense of the Contractor. All tests of completed work and equipment required under this Contract shall be made under the direction of the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor, who shall repair at his own expense any damage resulting therefrom. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, the amount to be paid for work hereunder shall include all labor, materials, forms, tools, scaffolding, plant, equipment, services, utilities, royalties, fees, and everything, whether temporary or permanent, necessary to completion of the work specified herein. 21. LIOUIDATED DAMAGES: It is mutually agreed by the parties of this Contract that time is of the essence of this Contract, and that if the Contractor does not complete the work in the specified or agreed upon time period (after allowance for any extensions granted by the Owner as described following), the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as liquidated damages, and not as penalty, the sum stipulated in the Special Construction Provisions for each calendar day the Contractor is in default. The Owner shall have the right to deduct the liquidated damages from any monies due the Contractor or to sue the Contractor to obtain the compensation for damages stipulated hereunder. Extensions of time will be granted the Contractor by the Owner when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such time delays are beyond the control of the Contractor being due to circumstances which could not reasonably be foreseen or avoided and not due to negligence on the part of the Contractor. Examples of delays for which time extensions will be given are: fire, strikes, and delays or changes ordered by the Owner. Extensions may not be granted on account of unfavorable weather or job conditions, unless specifically approved by the Engineer. SSI GC-STD:011593 GC -18 22. SANITARY REGULATIONS: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper health and sanitation facilities for his employees. Rules and regulations of the State Board of Health, or other bodies having jurisdiction, shall be fully complied with. The Contractor shall at all times provide an abundant supply of safe drinking water for his employees and shall give orders against the use of water in the vicinity of the work, known to be unsafe. At convenient places the Contractor shall provide fly -proof outside toilets which are to be maintained in a sanitary condition. Toilets will not be permitted in any water reservoir area and will not be permitted where they could pollute a water supply. 23. SAMPLES AND TESTS: In the absence of direct references, the sampling and testing of materials shall be done in accordance with the current accepted methods approved by the American Society for Testing and Materials or the American Water Works Association. Tests that are specified or required for approval of source of materials shall be made at the expense of the Contractor by an independent laboratory whose work and facilities are approved by the Engineer. Certified copies of reports of such tests shall be furnished in the required number to the Engineer for his review. Any change in materials or their origin, method of preparation or manufacture will require new tests and review. Except as provided in the specifications, tests of completed work required under this Contract shall be made under the direction of the Engineer by and at the expense of the Contractor who shall repair at his own expense all damage resulting therefrom. Before final acceptance, all parts of the work shall be tested and shall be in good condition and working order, or shall be placed in such condition and order at the Contractor's expense. 24. CLEANING UP: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the site and any occupied adjoining property, all plants, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, form lumber, and other like material belonging to him or his Subcontractors. All privy holes shall be satisfactorily backfilled. Failure of the Contractor to clean up satisfactorily will result in the Owner doing the same, and the cost, therefore, will be charged to the account of the Contractor or his Surety. 25. SALES AND USE TAXES: If the project is to be built for a tax-exempt public entity, prior to the purchase of any tangible personal property to be built into the work, the Contractor and any Subcontractor shall apply to the Colorado Department of Revenue for an exemption to be used for all work done under this Contract (Form DR -172). Said exemption number is to be used by the Contractor or Subcontractor for the purchase of all tangible personal property to be built into the work. All bids for the work under this Contract shall exclude all sales, use, and RTD taxes otherwise collected by the Colorado Department of Revenue. If the project is to be built for a private owner, then the Contractor's bid shall include all applicable sales and use taxes. SS1:GC-STD:011593 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCP -1 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PROVISIONS 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work to be performed under these Contract Documents is generally described as follows: Construction complete of a 100,000 gallon per day conventional activated sludge wastewater treatment plant (WWTP) for the Ranch at Roaring Fork Homeowners Association. Major components of the WWTP system include: ► Miscellaneous site work including yard piping, soil and rock excavation and backfill, gravel road surface, finish grading and drainage, landscaping, etc. ► Equipment and office building, including two PD blowers and associated air piping. ► Rectangular 90,000 gallon aeration basin with two submerged vertical turbine mixers. ► Enclosed twenty-two foot octagonal secondary clarifier with flocculating feedwell. ► Three wet wells with submersible pumps and one clear well with chlorine feed and mixer. ► 14/8 -inch PVC outfall pipe to Sopris Creek. ► Connections to existing treatment plant and existing pretreatment. ► Associated systems including plumbing; HVAC; electrical power; control; etc. 2. WATER: All water required by the Contractor shall be furnished by the Owner as long as the water is not used in a wasteful manner. The Contractor shall make all provisions to obtain and convey the water for use. 3. CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LIGHTING: The Contractor shall provide temporary power, lighting, and wiring required during the construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing electrical usage meters and for paying for all power he uses. 4. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: Before the start of construction, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer will meet to discuss project supervision, on-site inspection, project scheduling, progress reports, payrolls, payments to the Contractor, change orders, insurance, safety, as well as other items pertinent to the project. 94-021.002:010700 1 SCP -2 1 5. FIELD OFFICES: The Contractor shall maintain a field office at the site of the work as a headquarters for his official representative at the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for cost of electric power, heating and local telephone service connection. The Contractor shall provide at least 100 square feet of office space for the exclusive use of the Engineer. The office space facilities shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer. The field office shall be in place prior to the Contractor receiving payment for 5 % of the work and shall remain in place until the final inspection. 6. CONTRACT AWARD: The Contract will be awarded to the lowest acceptable bidder in the opinion of the Owner, unless the Owner decides to reject all Proposals. The deletion of any Proposal Items listed on the Proposal shall not affect the total or detailed prices of the other Proposal Items. 7. BID PRICE DETAILS: The successful bidder, if awarded the work, shall submit to the Engineer, prior to starting work, a detailed breakdown of the bid proposal. The price breakdown shall include costs for all major items of work, major equipment, subcontracts, and costs for move -in, insurance and miscellaneous project work. The information shall be in sufficient detail to permit the computation of accurate partial payment requests. Payment for materials and equipment may be included in partial payments if delivered to the site and accompanied by invoices and supported with evidence of payment. 8. GEOTICHNICAL REPORTS: The Owner has available a geotechnical investigation performed at the site of the proposed work. A copy of the geotechnical report is attached following these Special Conditions. 9. WEATHE$_SHUT-DOWN: Shut down of construction operations during inclement winter weather will be permitted. However, shut -down time will not affect the total calendar day completion period reflected in the Agreement. Contractor must secure the construction and materials stored on site. 10. COMPLETION OF THE WORD: The Contractor will be required to begin work within 10 consecutive days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. The Owner will require that all work in this contract be completed within 210 calendar days from "Notice to Proceed." If the work is not completed on or before the date fixed for completion, or as may have been extended by the Engineer, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner liquidated damages in accordance with Paragraph GC -21 of the General Conditions. The amount of the liquidated damages shall be $500.00 per day for each and every consecutive calendar day that the work is incomplete after the date set for completion. 11. BID ITEMS: The Work has been divided into portions, as described and provided for by the three Bid Items listed in the Proposal. Bidders for the Work shall provide separate prices for each Bid Item. The Owner will evaluate the bids and reserves the right to award some, all or part of the Bid Items, or to reject all bids, as the Owner may determine to be in his best interest. 94-021.002:010300 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCP -3 12. DEWATERING: The Contractor shall provide the pumps necessary for dewatering. After dewatering operations are no longer required, the pumps shall be removed and the wells capped. The Contractor shall retain possession of the pumps. Groundwater from dewatering operations may be pumped to a tributary of the Roaring Fork River, however the Contractor must first obtain a dewatering permit for this work. 13. EXCAVATION: The Engineer shall designate a suitable on-site location where the Contractor may stockpile topsoil and excavation material. The excavated material is suitable for use as structural backfill. No subsurface information is provided beyond what is shown in the enclosed soils report. 94-021.002:010300 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HEPWORTH - PAWLAK-GEOTECIIICAL, INC. December 9, 1997 Ranch at Roaring Fork Homeowner's Association c/o McLaughlin Water Engineers Attn: Chris G$lden 2420 Alcott Street Denver, Colorado 80211 Job No. 197 686 Subject: Report Transmittal, Subsoil Study for Foundation Design, Proposed Expansion of Existing Waste Water Treatment Facility, Ranch at Roaring Fork, Garfield County, Colorado Gentlemen: As requested, we have conducted a subsoil study for the proposed expansion of the existing waste water treatment facility at the subject site. Subsurface conditions encountered in the exploratory borings drilled in the proposed building area consist of 1/ to 2 feet of topsoil overlying relatively dense sandy gravel with cobbles and boulders. Groundwater was encountered in the borings between 21/ and 31/2 feet below the ground surface. The proposed facility can be founded on spread footings or slab/mat foundation placed on the natural gravel subsoils and designed for an allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 psf. The report which follows describes our exploration, summarizes our findings, and presents our recommendations. It is important that we provide consultation during design, and field services during construction to review and monitor the implementation of the geotechnical recommendations. If you have any questions regarding this report, please contact us. Sincerely, HEPWORTH - PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. 1 c 1 1 1 Daniel E. Hardin, P.E. Rev. By: SLP DEHlksm HEPWORTH-PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. 5020 Road 154 GIenwood Springs, CO 81601 Fax 970 945-8454 Phone 970 945-7988 SUBSOIL STUDY FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN PROPOSED EXPANSION OF EXISTING WASTE WATER TREATMENT FACILITY RANCH AT ROARING FORK GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO JOB NO. 197 686 DECEMBER 9, 1997 PREPARED FOR: RANCH AT ROARING FORK HOMEOWNER'S ASSOCIATION C/O MCLAUGHLIN WATER ENGINEERS ATTN: CHRIS GOLDEN 2420 ALCOTT STREET DENVER, COLORADO 80211 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY 1 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION 1 SITE CONDITIONS 2 FIELD EXPLORATION 2 SUBSIDENCE POTENTIAL 3 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3 FOUNDATION BEARING CONDITIONS 4 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 4 FOUNDATIONS 4 FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS 5 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE 6 SITE GRADING 6 SURFACE DRAINAGE 7 LIMITATIONS 7 FIGURE 1 - LOCATION OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS FIGURE 2 - LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS FIGURE 3 - LEGEND AND NOTES FIGURE 4 - GRADATION TEST RESULTS H -P GEOTECH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY This report presents the results of a subsoil study for the proposed expansion to the existing waste water treatment facility at the Ranch at Roaring Fork, Garfield County, Colorado. The project site is shown on Fig. 1. The purpose of the study was to develop recommendations for the foundation design. The study was conducted in accordance with our agreement for geotechnical engineering services to Ranch at Roaring Fork Homeowner's Association dated November 21, 1997. A field exploration program consisting of exploratory borings was conducted to obtain information on subsurface conditions. Samples of the subsoils obtained during the field exploration were tested in the laboratory to determine their classification and other engineering characteristics. The results of the field exploration and laboratory testing were analyzed to develop recommendations for foundation types, depths and allowable pressures for the proposed foundation. This report summarizes the data obtained during this study and presents our conclusions, design recommendations and other geotechnical engineering considerations based on the proposed construction and the subsoil conditions encountered. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION The proposed treatment facility expansion will consist of a sedimentation basin and clarifier enclosed in a one story building. Grading for the structure will involve cut depths of about 12 feet. The foundation will consist of spread footings and/or thickened slab. We assume relatively light foundation loadings, typical of the proposed type of construction. If building loadings, Location or grading plans change significantly from those described above, we should be notified to reevaluate the recommendations contained in this report. l -i -P GEOTECH 2 SITE CONDITIONS The site is occupied by the existing waste water treatment facilities as shown on Fig. 1. The sewage treatment tank is an above ground steel tank. The drying beds have low concrete walls. The lift pump house is a wood frame shed type structure. The site is relatively flat. The settling pond and holding area are about 4 to 5 feet deep below surrounding grade. These depressions are dry and are overgrown with weeds. The expansion facilities will be in the area of Borings 1 to 3 with possible alternative sites in the area of Borings 4 and 5. There was patchy snow cover up to sh foot deep at the time of our field work. Vegetation at the site consists of grass and weeds with scattered aspen trees, brush and cattails. FIELD EXPLORATION The field exploration for the project was conducted on November 24, 1997. Five exploratory borings were drilled at the locations shown on Fig. 1 to evaluate the subsurface conditions. The borings were advanced with 4 inch diameter continuous flight augers powered by a truck -mounted Longyear BK-51HD drill rig. The borings were logged by a representative of Hepworth-Pawlak Geotechnical, Inc. Samples of the subsoils were taken with a 1% inch I.D. spoon sampler. The sampler was driven into the subsoils at various depths with blows from a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches. This test is similar to the standard penetration test described by ASTM Method D-1586. The penetration resistance values are an indication of the relative density of the subsoils. Depths at which the samples were taken and the penetration resistance values are shown on the Logs of Exploratory Borings, Fig. 2. The samples were returned to our laboratory for review by the project engineer and testing. H -P GEOTECH 3 SUBSIDENCE POTENTIAL Bedrock of the Pennsylvanian age Eagle Valley Evaporite apparently underlies the Ranch at Roaring Fork. These rocks are a sequence of gypsiferous shale, fine- grained sandstone and siltstone with some massive beds of gypsum and limestone. There is a possibility that massive gypsum deposits associated with the Eagle Valley Evaporite underlie portions of the site. Dissolution of the gypsum under certain conditions can cause sinkholes to develop and can produce areas of localized subsidence. During previous work in the Carbondale area, scattered sinkholes have been observed. These sinkholes appear similar to others associated with the Eagle Valley Evaporite in areas of the Eagle Valley. Sinkholes were not observed in the immediate area of the subject site. No evidence of cavities was encountered in the subsurface materials; however, the exploratory borings were relatively shallow, for foundation design only. Based on our present knowledge of the subsurface conditions at the site, it cannot be said for certain that sinkholes will not develop. The risk of future ground subsidence at this site throughout the service life of the proposed facility, in our opinion, is low; however, the owner should be made aware of the potential for sinkhole development. If further investigation of possible cavities in the bedrock below the site is desired, we should be contacted. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Graphic logs of the subsurface conditions encountered at the site are shown on Fig. 2. The subsoils consist of about 11/2 to 2 feet of topsoil overlying relatively dense, sandy gravel containing cobbles and boulders. Drilling in the dense gravel with auger equipment was difficult due to the cobbles and boulders and drilling refusal was encountered in the deposit. Free water was encountered in the borings between 21 and 31 feet deep at the time of drilling and when checked the next day. The soils above the groundwater level were moist to very moist. H -P GEOTECH 4 Laboratory testing performed on samples obtained from the borings consisted of a gradation analysis. Results of a gradation analysis performed on small diameter drive samples (minus 11 inch fraction) of the natural coarse granular soils are shown on Fig. 4. FOUNDATION BEARING CONDITIONS The natural gravel subsoils encountered at the site should be suitable for support of footings or slab/mat foundations. Excavations made into the high groundwater at the site will require dewatering which will tend to reduce the stability of excavation slopes. DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOUNDATIONS Considering the subsoil conditions encountered in the exploratory borings and the nature of the proposed construction, we recommend the facilities be founded with spread footings or slab/mat foundation bearing on the natural granular soils. The design and construction criteria presented below should be observed for the foundation system. 1) Footings or slab/mat foundations placed on the undisturbed natural granular soils should be designed for an allowable soil bearing pressure of 3,000 psf. The weight of water in the tanks can be neglected in the soil bearing capacity. Based on experience, we expect settlement of footings designed and constructed as discussed in this section will be less than 1 inch. 2) The footings should have a minimum width of 18 inches for continuous walls and 2 feet for isolated pads. 3) Exterior footings and footings beneath unheated areas should be provided with adequate soil cover above their bearing elevation for frost H -P GEOTECH 5 protection. Placement of foundations at least 36 inches below exterior grade is typically used in this area. 4) Continuous foundation walls should be reinforced top and bottom to span local anomalies such as by assuming an unsupported length of at least 10 feet. Foundation walls acting as retaining structures should also be designed to resist lateral earth pressures as discussed in the "Foundation and Retaining Walls" section of this report. 5) AlI existing fill, topsoil and any loose or disturbed soils should be removed and the footing bearing level extended down to relatively dense natural granular soils. Groundwater will need to be controlled to allow construction in the dry. A 12 -inch thick layer of screened rock can be placed below the bearing level as a working surface and to facilitate dewatering. 6) A representative of the geotechnical engineer should observe all footing excavations prior to concrete placement to evaluate bearing conditions. FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS Foundation walls and retaining structures which are laterally supported and can be expected to undergo only a slight amount of deflection should be designed for a lateral earth pressure computed on the basis of an equivalent fluid unit weight of 45 pcf for backfill consisting of the on-site granular soils above the groundwater level and 90 pcf for granular backfill and hydrostatic loading below the groundwater level. The foundation should be designed for changes in hydrostatic conditions and surcharge pressures such as adjacent footings, traffic, construction materials and equipment. Backfill should be placed in uniform lifts and compacted to at least 90% of the maximum standard Proctor density at a moisture content near optimum. Backfill in pavement and walkway areas should be compacted to at least 95 % of the maximum standard Proctor density. Care should be taken not to overcompact the backfill or use large equipment near the wall, since this could cause excessive lateral pressure on the H -P GEOTECH 6 wall. Some settlement of deep foundation wall backfill should be expected, even if the material is placed correctly, and could result in distress to facilities constructed on the backfill. We recommend the on-site granular soils for backfilling foundation walls to achieve lower lateral earth pressures and relatively good drainage conditions. Imported granular wall backfill should contain less than 15% passing the No. 200 sieve and have a maximum size of 6 inches. SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE Free water was encountered at 2/ to 31/2 feet below the ground surface and there could be fluctuations in the groundwater level during times of heavy precipitation or seasonal runoff. We expect that the structure will be designed for buoyant conditions and an underdrain system will not be provided. We recommend that the foundation wall backfill below the groundwater level consist of granular soil with less than 15 % passing the No. 200 sieve so that the water level can fluctuate in the backfill and prevent buildup of excess hydrostatic pressure. SITE GRADING Ce- ANr A`76 c.P"ssr10 t --1C4-1-740 The excavation for the plant expansion will extend to at least 8 feet below the groundwater level. Pre -excavation dewatering such as well points or deep sumps will probably be required to lower the groundwater level to below the excavation depth and allow construction in the dry. Dewatering the excavation by shallow sumps and pumps within the excavation may not be feasible. Excavation slopes should be laid back to a safe slope taking into consideration inundation of the excavation if the pumps fail during construction. The contractor should provide a written plan of the dewatering and excavation including methods, sequence and timing to perform the work. We can review the plan when available. H -P GEOTECH 7 SURFACE DRAINAGE The following recommendations are made for surface grading and drainage. 1) Exterior backfill should be adjusted to near optimum moisture and compacted to at least 95 % of the maximum standard Proctor density in pavement and slab areas and to at least 90% of the maximum standard Proctor density in the earth berm and landscape areas. 2) The ground surface surrounding the exterior of the building should be sloped to drain away from the foundation in all directions. We recommend a minimum slope of 6 inches in the first 10 feet in unpaved areas and a minimum slope of 3 inches in the first 10 feet in paved areas. LIMITATIONS This study has been conducted in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices in this area at this time. We make no warranty either expressed or implied. The conclusions and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the exploratory borings drilled at the locations indicated on Fig. 1, the proposed type of construction and our experience in the area. Our findings include interpolation and extrapolation of the subsurface conditions identified at the exploratory borings and variations in the subsurface conditions may not become evident until excavation is performed. If conditions encountered during construction appear different from those described in this report, we should be notified so that re-evaluation of the recommendations may be made. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use by our client for design purposes. We are not responsible for technical interpretations by others of our information. As the project evolves, we should provide continued consultation and field services during construction to review and monitor the implementation of our recommendations, and to verify that the recommendations have been appropriately interpreted. Significant design changes may require additional analysis or modifications to the recommendations presented herein. We recommend on-site H -P GEOTECH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 observation of excavations and foundation bearing strata and testing of structural fill by a representative of the geotechnical engineer. Sincerely, HEPWORTH - PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. (titDaniel E. Hardin, P. E 24443 Reviewed By: oma•.• .•'•1/4. 0 4444(.071;r1.-Ct7 teiet...13),n.11 Steven L. Pawlak, P.E. ._. DEH/ksm cc: McLaughlin Water Engineers - Attn: Dean Derosier H -P GEOTECH APPROXOMATE SCALE 1' = 20' • BORING 5 EXISTING FACILITIES • BORING 4 BENCH MARK: ESTIMATED TANK BASE ELEVATION IS APPROX. 6201' BORING 1 • DRYING BEDS JL SETTLING TRENCH ELECTRIC POLE 0 • BORING 3 1 BORING 2 • ACCESS ROAD ------------- 197 686 HEPWORTH - PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. LOCATION OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS Fig. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 O N 'n to 0 II z. 0 -$ m w 0 0 II Z7 0 mw 0 nu' 0 II z• o� mw 0 NtO 0 II z. 0 mw 0 0 _ (D 0 z . mw (n 0 0 0 N N Elevation — Feet In rn rD 0 an N m (0 r)Eale.2.:.eton 0 co (O _1,l o Il u7 0 (() 0 N N Of O1 m m (0 (0 (0 (D (D (p IIII1LH1IIII1111JI1II1I Elevation — Feet Note: Explanation of symbols is shown on Fig. 3. 197 686 HEPWORTH -- PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS Fig. 2 1 LEGEND: I 2 TOPSOIL; silty sand with grovel. scattered cobbles, clayey, organic. soft to medium dense. moist, dark brown. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.3 GRAVEL AND COBBLES (GP); with boulders, sandy, medium dense to dense, moist to wet. brown. Drive sample; standard penetration test ( SPT ). 1 3/8—inch I.D. split spoon sample. ASTM 0 — 1586. Drive sample blow count: indicates that 6 blows of a 140—pound hammer falling 30 inches were 6/12 required to drive the SPT sampler 12 inches. I Indicates that slotted PVC pipe was installed in boring to depth shown. 0_1 Depth to free water level in boring and number of days after drilling measurement was mode. —► Depth at which boring caved following drilling. NOTES: 1. Exploratory borings were drilled on November 24, 1997 with a 4—inch diameter continuous flight power auger. 2. Locations of exploratory borings were measured approximately by pocing from features shown on the site plan provided. 3. Elevations of exploratory borings were measured by instrument level and refer to the Bench Mark shown on Fig. 1. 4. The exploratory boring locations and elevations should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used. 5. The lines between materials shown on the exploratory boring logs represent the approximate boundaries between material types and transitions may be gradual. 6. Water level readings shown on the Togs were made at the time and under the conditions indicated. Fluctuation in water level may occur with time. 7. Laboratory Testing Results: +4 = Percent retained on No. 4 sieve. —200 .. Percent passing No. 200 sieve. 197 666 HEPWORTH — PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL, INC. LEGEND AND NOTES Fig. 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • RCENT PASSI. HYDROMETER ANALYSIS 11UE REAC4035 SIEVE ANALYSIS 24 I24 HR. 7 HR 43 MN. 13 MK. 30 I3N.12 MK. 4 1111. 1 MN. poo 100 so 10 70 i0 50 40 30 20 10 0 MOM — MMMMIM M •MONO MMM- MMwM rlllrMMMMM MINN MOM= MIM MMMMr MI M M1 MMMN� MMMT MMI MOM MMMMM MMMM� w� MONMMANNINO — MMMM MMMIMr wow lMom IMMMMM- MM• — MMMMM�• MMr_ MMwMMr r. MMMMMM MMm MMMM� SIMM wm MMMMr wM••••mmuoo�r MMMM� MMu r•� MMMMMM MIMM M�MMS MINN= M - MMTIMM�MMM- rrrrr MMMMmool MOM mooN SIMM -Mr r_ MMMMMM MINIMS/ MINIUM 11•11IM MMS M� MMS ■pArM1 — MMM r� MMi M— -rrr` mmi MM.= MMM =MMMMMM�MMIM MiMINM MMPIONIONIM \rMMI MMMM MMS Mr1IM1 MM MO wwMMMM MMMMMMM MM♦ NMMM� MNMMINm MEMO MINIM rMMr MMMMINN MMOMMMMMMMr Mdm M O•II M MMMMMMM' — OIOM MMSM MMMM MINNOW MMMIM MMMMMM OMMM .•=111 MINOI MMMMMM MMMMMMM MMMS I MMNM MMMMMrr MM m MMM -MI i— MOM M1 OIMMI U.3. STNcARO SERIES 000 o f30 'Ib Is CLEAR SQUARE OPENINGS }4 3/6'1/2'3/4' 1 1/2" 3' s'3' i' iNm ME NNW! imimoo• mom =MOM= IMMMM MM -r I raw_ —MEIN -_ r• MOM Mims r mor MMM -M MMPI a 1•11. MIOIN _MMM-_ = IN MArM-MIINom=MN M- MMMMnom M -rte r—MMMI. ammo m MIM. MB aim nnm !NO almmm MOD M MMM♦ r AMM- MOM MMMMM -rA w. Monson Mom mol aoo MMMMMa — Edo MINI IMO NM MMMT — I OMND MM MM -MM --MSS —M i MM MOO MMMrMr s-- 4 MMM MM Mim MMrMm MINIM— M NM — M MMM I MOM �M OMS M rrrr MINI MINIMI MMMT M MMMM MMMMM- _per MMONII MMaO w r� 01 MMS ■ Mom. MMMM r MMM♦ — MEM M EM SMI -- M mo MMMT MOND MMMM M Mrd I MrMrm sr EOM= �r arrr!•omom Mom II - N• -Om MM NEM — - -O— MM MOMIOM- Mololom —Maw lMMMMM rMMM� �M =MMA AMM$ AMINOm MrMMM M -r MMMIMr MMMMM MMMM M MIME= MMUS=MOM! AMM - MMoM♦ mnMMSM- 1 MM M MM1 MIMNM� M. M MMr-MM M mom maM_MMMMM —•IIMM N MO M MM Mol$ MMM IN MON M MMMMM Mme` mom M MMM• oNN t M MM-�� MMS mom M MMS ■MMrMmMl MN11MMwMMEMW Ml MMS O-11 MIN MIM—MMMN•SOMME M=MIN aMIOS MM MMMMMMMM l MMmIN.• MIMMM �rrrrM� _� OM OM =MN — lid ��M` IN IMM N mown= MMMT MSM MMMM -IMS M�MIrI— MMS^MO! MMMMr M-MNMo Imm NN M NIMMOit•10 1MSMMIrM• mliwmm MMMMMMW^Mom - MINtINMEhMir MMMN M NMM MMMM— M M� tIAO� NMrM� MMerM MMS IN Irl wMM•.I — MM -ANN OMANI= IMMENO _ Or wMrr MMMMMM MMSA-IMMMMM•MMNOM N MMMMMSMM ENO =MMOI- -. - wry MINNIMO 11NOP"...—rte MM•1M••••.$1M NI MM MMr MMMT rMM_ iMINN Mr MMM M—=NMI= No COMM am =MI MON• Millm MM. MiMMINION MMINrNIr wwMM—Mrd MMMM� MMMmr =moo M NNNO MI I — MIME -MINN @NO— MMM MM-MMM — om= MMmomM-M M-- —MOM w... Mr MMrM M =MM MMMrrr MMMMM M pM MIIMM MMMrMMMMM� MMMM MM_ Mrrrrr IMAM• MMMMr MMMT MM MMM MM MOM= MOMISM MrMMM NaM�MMMMMMMMMMMMONISMM O MM. 1MIMrrmoms=MM�MM. SM MOM M-. � MM_ � Mr•r � w•IM MMM -Ir MMS MMS NI NM= �A�M�M�MiM� INS .11 i MM MINN �M r♦ rMM♦ M MINN IMINOMPOINOM. MMS MSN MW —INN.." AMM -Mm =OMMA►— Mol MMMMMMM — MINNOW MM M• — r�,.wl •MIMN INNO MMM— MMMMM NNNNrN—..-yNN MNNNNr NMNNNNNr — MMMill MMrMMMNr —pl�M MMMM� IIIiIMI1IrrIM1 MOMS .001 .002 .005 .003 .012 .037 .074 .150 .300 ./00 1.16 NOM NI MM MMM MMIMMM `MIMr• --MMMr MMMMMMMM MON MM MMM� MM I•••1.11•1==MNNM rMM IMM • IMAM MN NOM 1••MMMM --M MMMM MMMT M MOM >•� ONO —�MMrM_ Si MMM -M MMMMM IMrMMr rIMMMI — 2.33 4.75 3.512.5 IL O DIAMETER OF PARTICLES IN MILLIMETERS 37.5 70.2 12753 203 1 197 686 1 CLAY To S .T GRAVEL 75 % LIQUID LIMIT 7: SAMPLE OF: Sandy Gravel FINE IMJ14 'COARSE SAND 21 R SILT AND CLAY 4 Z PLASTICITY INDEX = Non—Plastic 10 20 30 40 30 20 70 10 10 100 • 'CENT RETAI r FROM: Boring 5 at 2 Feet dnd 5 Feet Combined HEPWORTH — PAWLAK GEOTECHNICAL. INC. GRADATION TEST RESULTS Fig. 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SAa- I SPECIFICATION Aa SITE EARTHWORK 1. SCOPE OF WORK: Provide labor, equipment, tools, materials, and services needed to accomplish all site preparation, earthwork and incidental appurtenant work as described herein or shown on the Drawings. a. Work Included in This Section. Principal items are: (1) Clearing and Grubbing. (2) Excavation and embankment construction. (3) Structural excavation and backfills. (4) Compaction of backfills. (5) Disposal of surplus and/or unsuitable materials. (6) Dust control and drainage control. (7) Cleanup. b. Related Work Specified in Other Specifications. (1) "Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines" covers pipe excavation, bedding, and backfilling. (2) "Roads and Sitework". (3) "Concrete". c. Contractor's Responsibility. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility both to maintain adequate safety measures and working conditions, and to take all measures necessary during the performance of the work to protect the entire project area and adjacent properties which would be affected by this work from storm damage, flood hazard, caving of trenches and embankments, and sloughing of material, until final acceptance by the Owner. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain completed areas until the entire project area is in compliance with the job specifications. d. Existing Utilities. Utility lines and structures indicated on the Drawings which are to remain in service shall be protected by the Contractor from any damage as a result of his operations. Where utility lines or structures not shown on the Drawings are encountered, the Contractor shall report them to the Engineer before proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall bear the cost of repair or replacement of any utility lines or structures which are broke or damaged by his operations. 2. SITE INVESTIGATION: a. Soil Investigation Report. A soils investigation report has been prepared and is included in the Special Construction Provisions. b. Contractors Responsibility. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and make all inspections necessary in order to determine the full extent of the effort required to make the 94-023,002:03130 SAa-2 completed Work conform to the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall satisfy himselfas to the nature and location of the Work, conditions, the conformation and condition of the existing ground surface, and the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during prosecution of the Work. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered. Any inaccuracies or discrepancies between the actual field conditions and the Drawings or Specifications must be brought to the Engineer's attention in order to clarify the exact nature of the work to be performed. 3. OUALITY ASSURANCE: a. Testing Laboratory. The Owner may engage an independent testing laboratory for earthwork testing. Costs for all such testing will be paid by the Owner, except Contractor shall bear the cost of retesting and reinspection of faulty work that does not pass requirements of the Specifications. b. Engineer. Testing of prepared subgrade and compacted fill will be at the discretion of the Engineer. Because observation and testing will be made by the Engineer during the filling and compaction operations so that he can state his opinion that the fill was constructed in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor shall give the Engineer twenty-four hours notice before beginning backfilling or subgrade preparation. Failure to do so may result in the Contractor reworking fill to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer will make field density tests in the compacted materials below the surface where the surface is disturbed, When these tests indicate that the density of any layer of fill or portion thereof is below the specified density, the particular layer or portion shall be reworked until the specified density has been obtained. c. Referenced Specifications. The maximum density at optimum moisture content for each soil type used in the compacted fill shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Density. When the ASTM D698 test is not applicable, the percentage compaction requirements shall conform to ASTM 2049, Test for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils. Field density tests shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, Sand -cone method. Field density by nuclear methods, ASTM D2922, will be allowed after correlation with the sand -cone method. Controlled fills and road embankments may also be tested for California Bearing Ratio (CBR), ASTM D1883. 4. CLEARING AND GRUBBING: Clearing and site preparation shall include the removal from the site of all vegetation and debris, including, but not limited to, weed growth, brush, shrubs, stumps, logs, roots, and boulders within the area of new construction as well as the slabs, pavements, temporary buildings, buried drain lines, utilities, pipes designated for removal on the project drawings or required. Holes resulting from the removal of underground structures and roots that extend below the finished grade shall be cleaned, backfilled, and compacted with suitable materials. Contractor shall be responsible for all lighting, temporary barricades, fencing, etc., required for work on the Owner's property. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SAa-3 Removal of trees shall occur only with prior Engineer approval. A change order may be required. Violation of this provision may require the Contractor to replace trees at his expense. The roots of trees to remain shall not be damaged. Herbicides for the control of woody plants shall not be used. Trunks, stumps, limbs, branches and roots within any trench permanent easement may be removed without Engineer approval. All debris and waste material resulting from clearing and grubbing shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of by the Contractor. Slash, brush, and vegetation may be chipped and spread on areas designated by the Engineer. Grubbing consists of the complete removal of stumps, including tap roots or lateral roots 1 V2 -inches or more in diameter, and the removal of brush, grass or weeds to depths below the natural ground as specified herein. Stumps shall be grubbed to a depth of 3 feet and grass or weeds shall be grubbed to a depth of 1 2 -inches below the natural ground surface, or to the depth as determined in the field by the Engineer at the time of construction. 5. SITE CONTROL: a. Erosion Control and Coordination. Facilities required to protest surface waters from run-off transporting eroded materials shall be constructed as soon as sufficient clearing and grubbing has been done to permit such work. Means to transport shall be provided for all eroded material to sediment basins as the land is cleared. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate erosion control facilities during the construction. The erosion control facilities shall be maintained in optimum condition until the final site grading and drainage system is complete. The facilities shall be inspected following significant snowmelt or rainfall, repairs made and excess sediment removed. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prevent the discharge of sediment off-site or to adjacent water courses. b. Geometric Control. Establish at least three points on all baselines. Stake out all control lines or permanent construction from this baseline. Establish datum points from Bench Mark given on plans. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and tools required to establish and maintain lines, grades, reference points, elevation control, and the like which are necessary to control the Work. c. Topsoil. After clearing, the entire area designated for excavation or compacted fill will be stripped of the 6 to 12 inches of topsoil and organic material unsuitable for use in embankments or compacted fill areas. The stripped soil shall be separately stockpiled on the site and reused to cover disturbed areas of the site. 6. DUST CONTROL: The Contractor shall take all steps possible to prevent and reduce dust arising from the construction activity. He shall have adequate water trucks on the site at all times and shall water, as necessary, the areas where dust may arise. He shall cooperate fully with the Owner and water immediately, when told to do so. 7. EXCAVATION: a. General. The Contractor shall perform all excavation necessary or required as shown on the Drawings for structures, roadways, pond and sitework. The excavation shall include the removal, handling and disposal, when required of all earth materials of whatever nature 94.021.002:03150 SAa-4 encountered, which shall include both rock excavation and common excavation when both are present, and shall include the furnishing, placing, and maintaining of shoring and bracing necessary to safely support the sides of the excavations. No classification will be made of materials excavated neither as to depth, nature, composition, hardness, nor degree of water content. During the excavation materials that will be suitable for replacing foundation overexcavation, embankments, or backfill will be identified and shall be stockpiled separate from other materials in the spoil banks for later use. b. Dewatering. The Contractor shalt install wells to accomplish dewatered excavation, as described in the Drawings and Specification "Dewatering Wells". The excavated work shall include all pumping, ditching, and other required measures for the removal or exclusion of water. Unless the water table is kept well below the base of the excavation, the soils may become "quick" and unsuitable for foundation material. The water table shall be lowered sufficiently below the elevation of the foundation subgrade during construction to protect the foundation. Any sumps, drain trenches, or other overexcavation for drainage facilities shall be backfilled as required for other overexcavations. The dewatering wells should remain in good working condition for future use by the Owner, minus the pumps. c. Structures. Except as otherwise dictated by construction conditions, the excavation shall be of such dimensions as to allow for the proper installation of concrete forms and to permit the various trades to install their work. In no case shall the finished lines for excavation be Tess than 18 inches from the outside of the concrete foundation. The bottom limit of excavation shall be the bottom of the slab, or the bottom of the gravel as shown on the drawings. If the excavation subgrade is disturbed either through use of construction equipment, accident, lack of proper dewatering, or otherwise, below established grade lines, the Contractor shall fill in the resulting excess excavation with thoroughly compacted, approved material at no cost to the Owner, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Side slopes of any excavation for structures shall be as determined by the Contractor to maintain a safe working condition. Where space is not available due to adjacent conditions to provide adequate side slopes the Contractor shall provide shoring and bracing to maintain a safe condition. d. Foundation Preparation. After the excavation for any structure is completed to the elevations designated on the Drawings, the entire area will be inspected by the Engineer. Any visible areas of unstable or unsuitable material shall be excavated and removed from the foundation area, and replaced with material approved by the Engineer. The backfill material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 8 inches in loose depth and then compacted in place. Compaction shall be accomplished by mechanical equipment selected by the Contractor capable of thoroughly penetrating and compacting the loose depth layers. Compaction requirements shall be measured by ASTM Standard D698, (Standard Proctor). The minimum relative dry density of compacted soil shall be 95 percent within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Payment for authorized over -excavated and replacement materials shall be at a price agreed upon prior to commencement of the work. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SAa-5 8. STRUCTURAL BACKFILL: a. Placement of Structural Backfill. Before beginning backfilling, all foreign material, including water, shall be removed from the space to be backfilled and the area to be backfilled shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. Sloping sides of the excavated space shall be stepped to prevent wedging action of the backfill against the structure. No backfill shall be placed around or upon any structure until it is proven that the concrete has attained satisfactory strength and that the structure as a whole is adequate to receive backfill. Water leakage tests on tanks shall be acceptable before backfill. b. Compaction of Structural Backfill. Structural backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, in depths suitable to the type of compaction equipment being used, but in no case shall the lifts exceed six inches. Each layer shall be evenly spread, the moisture content brought to near optimum conditions and then compacted to a density that is not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density at optimum moisture, as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). Backfill shall be mechanically compacted by equipment of a size and type approved by the Engineer. Permission to use specified compaction equipment shall not be construed as guaranteeing or implying that the use of such equipment will not damage adjacent ground, existing improvements, or improvements installed under the Contract. Flooding, jetting, or ponding will not be permitted for the compaction of any structure backfill. 9. EMBANKMENTS: a. General. Embankments are defined as roadway berms and earthwork around structures located above the original ground surface after stripping. Unless otherwise specified, fill material shall be compacted by the Contractor while at a moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Compaction shall be to a density that is not Tess than 90 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture, as determined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). b. Preparing Areas to be Filled. All vegetable matter and objectionable material shall be removed by the Contractor from the surface upon which the fill is to be placed and any loose and porous soils shall be removed or compacted to a depth specified by the Engineer. The surface shall then be plowed or scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches until the surface is free from uneven features that would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. c. Placing. Spreading. and Compacting Fill Material. The fill material shall be placed by the Contractor in thin layers that when compacted shall not exceed 12 inches. Embankment material shall contain no boulders over 12 inches within 10 feet of structures, the top 12 inches of roadways, or over pipelines. Each layer shall be spread evenly and shall be thoroughly mixed during the spreading to obtain uniformity of material in each layer. 94.021.002:09150 When acceptable material is being excavated on the site it may be spread directly on berms and road embankments lithe moisture content is within 2 percent of optimum. Material that is otherwise suitable for embankments but has a moisture content that is unacceptably high shall be placed in spoil piles or dried as the Contractor determines at no extra compensation. SAa-6 Supplemental water, if required shall be added by uniform sprinkling on the embankment and will be mixed uniformly throughout the layers. The distribution and gradation of materials throughout the embankments shall be such that the embankment material will be free from lenses, pockets, streaks, and layers of material differing substantially, in texture or gradation from the surrounding material. The combined excavation and placing operations shall be such that the materials, when compacted in the embankment, will be blended sufficiently to secure the best practical degree of compaction and stability. Successive loads of materials shall be dumped on the embankment so as to produce the best practicable distribution of the material subject to the approval of the Engineer. Certain portions of the excavated material may be determined to be less satisfactory for dense embankment of pond and roadways. These materials shall be used in the site embankments outside of 10 feet from structures. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, vibratory rollers, multiple -wheel pneumatic -tired rollers or other types of acceptable compacting equipment. Compaction shall be continuous over the entire area and the equipment shall make sufficient passes over the material to insure that the desired density has been obtained. Surface of fill slopes shall be compacted so that the slopes are stable and there shall be no excessive loose soil on the slopes. Contractor shall maintain embankments and slopes until project is complete. 10. GRADES: Rough graded surface ready to receive top soil, sod, or seed, crushed rock, or aggregate base shall be graded to f 0.2 feet of the plan elevation, except where meeting curbs, walks, or building entrances, grade to * 0.1 feet of plan. However, the acceptance of such irregularities shall not be constructed to reduce the thickness of topsoil, sod, or pavement specified. Permanent surface water courses shall be constructed to average plan grades and shall drain completely throughout their length. Finish surfaces shall be ± 0.1 feet of the plan elevation, and all areas shall be finished so as to drain readily. 11. CLEAN-UP: Stockpiled topsoil shall be spread uniformly across all disturbed areas except roads, and the estimated quantity of topsoil available shall be considered by the Contractor to set elevations for rough grading of the disturbed areas prior to placing the topsoil. Remove and dispose of all debris, obliterate all temporary earthwork, roads, trenches, and the like, distribute all unsatisfactory material from earthwork operations in the borrow area and grade down spoil piles to provide even grades and satisfactory surface drainage. Eradicate all tracks, ruts, temporary foundations and stockpiles. Remove all stakes, grade boards, barricades and other adjunct of construction, and collect and dispose all litter. Clean-up to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer is a prerequisite to final acceptance. 94-021.002703150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SAb-1 SPECIFICATION Ab ROADS AND SITEWORK SCOPE OF WQRK: Provide site finish grading including new berms, embankments, roads, and drainage swales as indicated on the site plan drawing. Such grading shall provide a neat and pleasing appearance and provide positive drainage. 2. ROADS AND PARKING AREA$: Roads and parking areas shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be constructed of a Class 5, Colorado Highway Department aggregate over a compacted subgrade. The road subgrade level shall be established by excavation or embankment construction, and the Contractor shall compact the top 6 inches of the native material or embankment to 95 percent Standard Proctor Density over the entire area on which the aggregate course is to be placed. In the areas indicated on the Drawings, a 6 -inch course of Class 5 road base shall be placed on the subgrade and shall be compacted. The Contractor shall at all times maintain roads until final acceptance. The Contractor shall guard against an excess of loose material on the roadbed but shall add additional aggregate material to maintain proper shape and compaction. The Contractor shall fill ruts formed by traffic by blading to prevent traffic from cutting through the surface material to the subgrade. Holes, waves, and undulations which develop shall be corrected by blading and by adding more material and recompacting. The shaping of the surface material shall be continued until it is well compacted, free from ruts, waves and undulations and conforms to the cross-section shown on the Plans and until final acceptance. 3. LANDSCAPING: a. Seed. Seed all disturbed areas embankments and spoil areas with native grasses at rates of 80 pounds pure live seed minimum of 90 percent purity, 80 percent germination per acre. Seed Type % of Mix "Menchar" Smooth Brome 25 Western Wheatgrass 25 Crested Wheatgrass 21 "Oahe" intermediate Wheatgrass 25 Blue Grama 4 b. Mulch. Straw mulch shall be oat, wheat, or rice straw, Prairiegrass, or Bermudagrass. The mulch shall be free of Johnsongrass or other noxious weeds and foreign material. It shall be kept in a dry condition and shall not be molded or rotted. Alternately, hydromulching shall be acceptable. c. Seeding Installation. 94.021.002:03150 (1) Bed Preparation. After all disturbed areas have been graded to the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the plans, fertilize and seed as required below. Cultivate sufficiently to reduce the soil to a state of good tilth which means the soil particles SAb-2 on the surface are small enough and lie closely enough together to prevent the seed from being covered too deeply for optimum germination. Cultivation of seed -bed will not be required in loose sand where depth of sand is four inches or more. Add fertilizer, 18-46-0, at 350 lbs. per acre and mix in to 6 -inch depth immediately prior to seeding. The cross-section previously established shall be maintained throughout the process of cultivation and any necessary reshaping shall be done prior to any planting of seed. Any area disturbed after seeding shall be recultivated and reseeded. (2) Seeding. Seeding periods shall be August 15 to September 15 or October 15 to May 1. Seeding shall be accomplished by broadcast seeder method and shall be incorporated into the surface soil, not to exceed a depth of %-inch, by raking, harrowing, or other proven methods. The seed shall be sown evenly over the area, sowing in two directions at ninety degrees to each other. Upon completion of the seeding operations, the seeded area shall be lightly rolled with a hand roller. (3) Mulch. Immediately after seeding the area shall be top dressed with mulch. Apply lightly with full coverage to assure seed and erosion protection, using two 50 -pound bales of straw mulch per 1,000 s.f. Cover with netting on slopes steeper than 4:1. (4) Watering. Immediately following the application of seed and mulching, the Contractor shall lightly water the seeded area, until the planted area is soaked, to a depth of two inches, taking care that no erosion occurs. Care shall be taken so that no gullies are formed. The Contractor shall water and maintain all plantings until final inspection and acceptance by the District. Water as weather requires, at least twice daily until final inspection. Water will be provided by the.Qwner from the sewage treatment plant house -water system to the Contractor or from his own supply. Watering shall be required until the grass is two inches tall or until final acceptance, if prior. 94-021.002:03 U0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-1 SPECIFICATION Ba CONCRETE 1. SCOPE OF WORD: The work required under this Specification consists of furnishing all plant, labor and materials and performing all construction operations in connection with installation and erection of all conventionally reinforced and post -tensioned concrete construction work, complete in every respect, including all related items and appurtenances as required by the Drawings, as specified herein and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Concrete structures include potable water reservoirs, treatment facility basins and other water containment structures that are herein referred to as tanks. The Contractor shall cooperate with all building trades and subcontractors so as to insure proper incorporation within the concrete part of the structure of all piping, conduit, curb angles, frames, inserts and other miscellaneous iron, metal and wooden inserts. 2. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS: Any material or operation specified by reference to published specifications shall mean the latest edition, unless otherwise noted, and shall be complied with unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. These include the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American Concrete Institute (ACI), the Portland Cement Association (PCA), the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) or other published standards herein referred to. In case ofa conflict between the referenced specifications or standards and this Specification, the one having the more stringent requirements, as determined by the Engineer, shall govern. 3. SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings and catalog information shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to fabrication or incorporation into the work for concrete -related equipment and components, in order to show that equipment selected and to be installed by the Contractor generally conforms with the Contract Documents. Submittal information includes, but is not limited to the following: a. Concrete Mix Design. (1) Identify source, proportion and location of concrete in accordance with Article 5.i (1)- (2) Include preliminary test records in accordance with Article 5.i(2). (3) And/or include strength test records in accordance with Article 5.i(3). b. Concrete Curing Procedure and Products. c. Reinforcing Bar Shop Drawings Including Bar Lists. d. Catalog information, shop drawings, and statement that material is non-toxic and suitable in potable water (if it will be exposed to potable water) for: water stops, admixtures, bonding agents, membrane curing compound, joint sealer, embedded items, non -shrink grout, epoxy sealant, wedge -type expansion anchors, and other concrete appurtenances. 94.021.002:03150 SBa-2 e. Placing schedule which locates construction joints. f. Shop Drawings showing tendon properties, sizes, spacing, quantities, dimensions, accessories, locations and anchorages. Indicate tendon coding, stressing sequence, initial and final forces and anticipated elongations. Provide support drawings showing all bars, chairs, blocks or other supports. Detailed computations clearly presented indicating minimum forces required, assumed prestressing losses, final working stresses and stressing sequence, to be submitted with shop drawings. Computations shall be performed by a registered professional engineer specializing in prestressed concrete design. g. h. Certified mill reports on the prestressing steel used. Show ultimate strength, modulus of elasticity and percent elongation at rupture. i. Reports on three individual prior static tests and three individual prior dynamic tests made in accordance with Chapter 3, PTI Post -Tensioning Manual. 4. MATERIALS: a. Cement. Cement shall conform to the "Standard Specification for Portland Cement", ASTM C 150, Type 11. Fly Ash shall be Class F, ASTM C 618. b. Admixture. Each of the following types of admixtures, when required or permitted by the Engineer, shall conform to the appropriate Specifications, as indicated: Air -Entraining Admixtures - "Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete", ASTM C260. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Water -reducing, retarding and accelerating admixtures - "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete", ASTM C494. For prestressed concrete and for all concrete in which aluminum or galvanized metal is to be embedded, it shall be demonstrated by tests in accordance with AASHTO T-260 that the hardened concrete, including the aggregates, cementitious materials and any admixtures used, will not contain more than .06 percent water soluble chloride ions by weight of cement. Two or more admixtures may be used in the same concrete, provided such admixtures are added separately during the batching sequence and provided that the admixtures used in that combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other. c. Water. Mixing water for concrete shall be fresh, clean and potable. d. Aggregates. Aggregates for concrete of normal weight shall be granite obtained from the Rocky Mountains and shall conform to Specifications for Concrete Aggregates, ASTM C33. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-3 Fine and coarse aggregates shall be regarded as separate ingredients. Each size of coarse aggregate, as well as the combination of sizes when two or more are used, shall conform to the grading requirements of the appropriate ASTM Specifications. e. Storage ofMaterials. Cement shall be stored in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos, which will exclude moisture and contaminants. Aggregate stockpiles shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. To insure that this condition is met, any test for determining conformance to requirements for cleanliness and grading shall be performed on samples secured from the aggregates at the point of batching. Frozen or partially frozen aggregates shall not be used. Sand shall be allowed to drain until it has reached a uniform moisture content before it is used. Admixtures shall be stored in such a manner that will avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. For those used in the form of suspensions of non -stable solutions, suitable agitating equipment shall be provided to assure uniform distribution of the ingredients. Liquid admixtures shall be protected from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. f. Non -Shrink Grout. Non -shrink grout shall be Masterflow 713, SikaGrout 212 or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer. Grouts with iron filings are not acceptable. The grout shall be compatible with the surfaces to be bonded. g. Epoxy Sealant. Epoxy sealant shall be two -component, moisture insensitive, low viscosity solvent free, epoxy resin, Sikadur 35, Hi -Mod LV or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer. h. Wedge -Type Expansion Anchors. The wedge -type expansion anchors shall be stainless steel, KW[K-bolts manufactured by Hilti, One Cummings Point Rd., Stanford, CT 06904, or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer. J• Membrane Curing Compound. Membrane curing compound shall be in accordance with ASTM C309 and shall be non-toxic and suitable for potable water tanks, when applicable. Membrane curing compound shall be sprayable, 20 percent solids, Master Builders MasterKure or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer. Water Stops. The material, design and location of water stops in construction joints and expansion joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings. If not otherwise called for on Drawings, the water stops shall be an expansive adhesive, Adeka Ultra Seal MC -2010M, Spearfish S.D. or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer. k. Joint Sealer. Joints indicated on Drawings, shall be sealed with a polyurethane joint sealer material of uniform, non -sag consistency. The sealant shall, when installed, tenaciously adhere to primed concrete surfaces, shall remain permanently elastomeric and shall not contaminate potable water. 94-021.002:03150 SBa-4 The material shall be of a type that will, when properly installed, effectively and permanently seal joints subject to minor movements. Install with primer and cure prior to filling the tank with water in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Joint sealer shall be Sikaflex- la Elastic Sealant/Adhesive, or Sikaflex 2C -NS as manufac- tured by Sika Chemical Corporation or other material acceptable to the Engineer. 1. Epoxy Bonding Agent. Bonding agent shall be a two component, moisture insensitive epoxy adhesive, Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer. 5. PROPORTIQNING OF CONCRETE: a. General. The concrete shall be proportioned and qualified according to this Article 5 of these specifications. b. Strength. Strength requirements shall be based on 28 -day compressive strengths, unless high early strength is specified, in which case, required strengths shall be obtained at the days specified. Minimum concrete strength for all concrete shall be 4,500 psi at 28 days. Where topping slab concrete is used for clarifiers, minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. c. Durability. All concrete with 1" coarse aggregate shall contain 4.5 to 7.5 percent entrained air. Clarifier topping concrete, with 3/8" coarse aggregate, shall contain 6 to 9 percent entrained air. d. Slump. Slump of concrete as determined by "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete", ASTM C143, shall be 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. e. Cement Factor. Concrete shall have not less than 360 lbs. of cement and 135 lbs. of fly ash per cubic yard (400 and 150 lbs. respectively for clarifier topping concrete). Note: for cold weather slabs -on -grade, the fly ash shall be omitted and the minimum cement content shall be 650 lbs. per cubic yard of concrete. f. Aggregates. Coarse aggregate shall be ASTM C-33 Size No. 57 (1 inch nominal size aggregate) for regular concrete and Size No. 8 for clarifier topping concrete (3/8 inch nominal size aggregate). g. Water -Cement Ratio. The water -cement plus pozzolan ratio shall not exceed 0.38. h. Admixtures. Any admixtures to be used shall be included in the required chloride ion tests, the concrete trial mixtures, if used, or the proposed mixture qualified by strength test records. High range water reducing admixtures (super plasticizers) shall be added at the plant. Master Builders Rheobuild 3000 FC or equivalent high range water reducing admixture acceptable to the Engineer. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-5 Prokrete AES or an equivalent air -entraining admixture shall be added as required to achieve the specified air content at the site. Non -Chloride accelerators may be used for cold weather concreting, in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Calcium chloride is not permitted. If required, and reviewed by the Engineer, a water -reducing retarder may be used when the temperature of the concrete as placed exceeds 75°F. i. Proportioning of Ingredientg. 94.021.002:03130 (1) General. The proportions of ingredients shall be selected to produce the proper placeability, durability, strength and other required properties. The proportion of ingredients shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work, but without permitting the materials to segregate or excessive free water to collect on the surface. Concrete trial mixtures and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. The costs of the mix designs and testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Before any concrete is placed on the job, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, the concrete mix design he proposes to use which shall be in accordance with one of the procedures in Subsection (2) or (3). (2) Proportioning by Preliminary Tests. The determination of the cement content necessary to attain the required strength and other properties, without exceeding the maximum water -cement ratio, shall be by preliminary tests in accordance with the following procedures: Concrete trial mixtures having proportions and consistency suitable for the work shall be made using at least three different cement contents which will produce a range in strengths encompassing those required for the work. Trial mixes shall be designed to produce the maximum allowable slump (within % inch) and the rriaximum allowable air content (within %2 inch). Proportions of ingredients shall be determined and tests conducted in accordance with the basic relationships and procedures outlined in "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete (Part I):" ACI 211.1. For each cement content, at least three specimens for each age to be tested shall be made and cured in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory", ASTM C192 and tested for strength at 7, 14 and 28 -days. Tests shall be conducted in accordance SBa-6 with "Method of Test of Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders", ASTM C39. From the results of these tests, a curve shall be plotted by the testing laboratory showing the relationship between cement content and 28 -day compressive strength. The minimum cement content to be used shall be that value shown by the curve to produce a strength at least 1200 psi greater than the strength specified. (3) Proportioning by Strength Test Records. In lieu of trial batches to establish required average strength level, as described above, appropriate field test data for a proposed concrete mixture may be used. Use ofthe proposed mixture proportions shall be reviewed by the Engineer based on its demonstrated ability to produce concrete meeting all requirements of the Specifications. Ability to produce the required average strength calculated in accordance with the following paragraph shall be determined on the basis of the strength test record of 30 or more consecutive tests made during the past year. Where the production facility has a control record, and standard deviation "s", based on at least 30 consecutive strength tests of a mix obtained within the past year representing similar materials and conditions to those expected, the required average strength "f„" shall be the larger of the following: fc,>fc+1.34s fcr > f'c + 2.33s-500 Materials and proportions within the population of background tests shall not have been more closely -restricted than will be the case for the proposed work. 6. READY -MIX CONCRETE: a. Getteral. Ready -mix concrete shall be furnished to the concrete contractor at the construction site and he shall furnish and provide all equipment necessary to receive and install the ready -mix concrete as soon as it is received at the site. A mix certificate shall be furnished to Contractor by the ready -mix driver for each load of ready -mix concrete delivered to the job. All materials and the proportioning of same shall conform in every respect to those specified heretofore. Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with "Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete", ASTM C94. b. Time Constraints. Time constraints for discharge of concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C94. Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 11/2 hours, or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. These limitations may be waived if the concrete is of such slump after the 11/2 hours time or 300 -revolution limit has been reached that it can be placed, without the addition of water to the batch, and comply with all specification requirements. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening ofthe concrete, a time less than 1'/2 hours may be required. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-7 c. ReLempering. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump shall be prohibited. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities required for immediate use. Concrete which has partially set shall not be retempered, but shall be discarded. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, first the concrete shall be remixed for at least one minute at mixing speed, if the slump is still too low, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum slump is exceeded. Corrections must be made for any water contained in the aggregates. The water must be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Such addition must be reviewed by the Engineer. d. Cold -Weather Concrete Delivery. Concrete delivery, curing, and protection shall be in accordance with ACI 306, "Standard Specification for Cold -Weather Concreting". The minimum concrete temperature, as placed and maintained, shall be 55°F. [f temperature is 30°F to 40°F, the as -mixed concrete temperature shall not be less than 60°F. If air temperature is 0 to 30°F, the as -mixed concrete temperature shall not be less than 65°F. If air temperature is below 0°F, the as -mixed concrete temperature shall not be Tess than 70°F. If water or aggregate has been heated, the water and aggregate shall be combined in the mixer before cement is added. Cement shall not be added to mixture of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 100°F. e. Lean Concrete. Lean concrete, used only where specifically called for, shall have a minimum 2,000 psi strength, with a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.5. 7. FORMWORK: a. General. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces, unless approved by the Engineer. 1 b. Design of Formwork. Formwork shall be designed and constructed in accordance with "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", ACI 347. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 94-021.002:03130 The design, engineering and construction of the formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. For circular tank walls, use 2 -foot maximum wide form material. The forms may be steel or plywood. The finished formed surface shall be equal to those specified for plywood forms. The maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members. Suitable moldings or chamfer strips shall be placed in the corners of column, beam, slab and wall forms, except tank walls and where specifically directed otherwise by the Engineer. SBa-8 When necessary to maintain the specified tolerances, the formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the formwork due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and construction loads. Positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts shall be provided and all settlement shall be taken up during the concrete placing operation. They shall be securely braced against lateral deflections. At vertical wall joints where forms overlay existing concrete, a mortar tight joint shall be required. Use a bead of silicone caulking or foam joint filler against concrete before placing forms. Alternate methods shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection immediately before concrete is deposited. Forming accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in the concrete, such as ties and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. Wire is not acceptable. The portion remaining within the concrete shall leave no metal within one inch of the surface. Spreader cones on ties shall not exceed one -inch diameter. Embedded ties shall have water seal washers acceptable to the Engineer. Stay -in-place insulating forms shall be compatible with the specified exterior finish. The form shall be similar or equal to "Greenblock". Form coating shall be non -staining chemical release agents that will not damage concrete surfaces and appropriate for use in potable water structures when applicable. c. Tolerances. Formwork shall be constructed so as to produce the intended finishes, as required ant also to conform to the tolerances of Section 203.1, ACI 347. d. Removal of Forms and Re -shoring. Formwork for walls, columns, sides of beams and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, except as noted elsewhere in these specifications. Formwork for beam soffits, slabs and other parts that support the weight of concrete shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28 -day strength, unless otherwise specified or permitted. Forms shall not be removed in any case until the concrete has had time to set sufficiently to carry the dead loads and any construction loads it has to sustain and in no case will the forms be removed until reviewed by the Engineer or his representative. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that the form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports, the facing material may be removed at an earlier age as specified or permitted. The shores and supports shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28 -day strength, unless otherwise specified or permitted. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-9 Backfilling over the roof slab. when present, shall not begin until the roof slab concrete has reached its specified 28 -day strength. Removal strengths for shored concrete, when present, shall be based on field cured cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31 or pullout tests in accordance with ASTM C900, Lok -Test, by CTL/Thompson Inc. or equivalent. The Contractor shall adequately brace wall sections against overturning as required before and after the removal of the forms until the structure is complete. 8. REINFORCEMENT: a. General. Details of concrete reinforcement not covered herein shall be in accordance with "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete", AC[ 318. b. Reinforcing Bars. Reinforcing bars No. 3 and smaller and those specifically designated on the Drawings as "Grade 40" shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for billet steel reinforcement bars of high strength grade, ASTM A615, Grade 40, having a yield point of 40,000 psi. Grade 60 reinforcing shall not be substituted for bars marked "Grade 40" on the drawings which are intended to be field bent after being partially embedded in concrete. Except as noted above, all reinforcement bars shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60, with a minimum yield point of 60,000 psi. Grade 60 bars shall not be bent in the field. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate grades of reinforcing steel. c. Welded Wire Fabric. Welded wire fabric shall be electrically welded wire fabric of cold -drawn wire (70,000 psi yield point) of gage and mesh size shown on the Drawings and shall conform to "Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A185. d. Fabrication and Placing Tolerances. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet the following requirements for fabricating tolerances: 94-021.002.03150 Sheared length: Depth of Truss Bars: Stirrups, ties and spirals: All other bends: ± 1 inch + 0, —1/2 inch ± %2 inch t 1 -inch Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances except as noted on the drawings: Concrete cover to formed surfaces: Minimum spacing between bars: Vertical location of top bars in slabs: Slabs 9 -inches deep or less: ± 118 -inch -- l/4 -inch f 1/8 -inch Slabs more than 9 -inches but not over 18 -inches deep: Slabs more than 18 -inches deep: + 1/8 -inch - 1/4 -inch + 1/8 -inch - 1/2 -inch SBa-l0 Crosswise of Members: Spaced evenly within 2 -inches Lengthwise of Members: ± 2 -inches Bars shall be placed with the following minimum concrete cover unless noted otherwise on the Drawings: 6 -inch or less slabs -on -grade cast against earth 2 -inches All other concrete cast against earth 3 -inches Concrete exposed to earth or water 2 -inches Beams, girders and columns 1 -1/2 -inches (Ties and Stirrups) e. Placing. All reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with CRSI Manual of Placement and Manual of Standard Practice, except as specified herein. Reinforcement shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement by construction loads or the placing of concrete. All reinforcement shall be tied to chairs to secure them from displacement during concrete placement. Reinforcement shall be secured at a maximum distance of four feet on center. On ground and where necessary, supporting concrete blocks or heavy plastic chairs (Medco or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer) shall be used. Over formwork, bar chairs and spacers shall be furnished. The portions of all accessories within ''A -inch of the concrete surface shall be coated with plastic at least 3/32 -inch thick at points of contact with the formwork. Other requirements shall be in accordance with Class 1, maximum protection, plastic protected bar supports, in Chapter 3 of the Manual of Standard Practice by the CRS'. Staples and tie wire only shall be used to secure chairs to forms, except as reviewed by the Engineer. Mesh shall lap at least 2 meshes, plus end extension of wires, but not less than 12 -inches in structural slabs and shall extend across supporting beams and walls. Adequate support for mesh shall be provided during placing of concrete so that it is completely surrounded by concrete and not less than 2 -inches above the bottom of slabs on grade or 1/2 -inch above formwork. Vertical bars in columns or drilled piers shall be offset at least one bar diameter at splices. To insure proper placement, templates shall be furnished for all column dowels. Three equally spaced plastic disks (Plas-T-Clips distributed by Spillman Company, Columbus, Ohio or equivalent acceptable to Engineer) at 4 feet on center shall be used to space the column reinforcing away from the forms and drilled pier reinforcement away from the earth. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-11 All splices not shown on the Drawings must have been reviewed by the Engineer. Reinforcement shall not be bent after being partially embedded in hardened concrete, except as noted or reviewed by the Engineer. Lap all tension splices according to ACI 318, Class C, and all compression splices 30 -bar diameters, except as noted. No tack welding of reinforcing bars is permitted. Splices in horizontal wall reinforcement in circular tanks shall be staggered such that no more than one bar in two is spliced in any four foot wide vertical section. Reinforcement shall be continuous around corners or corner bars provided. Tendons shall be delivered clearly identified for location. Each shipment shall be accompanied by a cutting list indicating number of tendons, length, code of tendons, anchorages, wedges, grommets and support chairs. Fabricate tendons in a sequence and quantity as to avoid project slow down or lengthy storage at the site. Tendons shall be protected at the site against weather and damage. Rusting will not be allowed. Damage to sheathing covering of tendons will not be allowed. Burning or welding shall not be done in vicinity of tendons. 9. JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS: a. Construction Joints. Joints shall be located generally as indicated on the Drawings. Alternate locations may be acceptable if located so as to least impair the strength and serviceability of the structure and reviewed by the Engineer. In general, they shall be located near the middle of the spans of non -post -tensioned slabs, beams and girders and near the quarter point of post -tensioned slabs, beams and girders and shall be keyed. Horizontal joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Beams, girders, brackets and haunches shall be placed at the same time as the slabs. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Maximum length of placement in walls without offsets or concrete cast against previously -placed concrete shall be sixty (60) feet. Prior to the preparation of re -bar shop Drawings or the placing of concrete, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a placement schedule showing the amount and the limit of each concrete placement in walls and columns, as well as all slabs if proposed to be different from the drawings. This schedule is for the purpose of establishing the location ofall construction joints and hence, the information necessary to prepare the re -bar shop drawings, as well as a method of correlating the test cylinders to the area in which that particular batch of concrete was placed. 44-021.002:03150 Floor slabs of water -containing structures shall be placed without construction joints unless specifically permitted by the Engineer. Horizontal construction joints will not be permitted in tank walls. All vertical tank wall joints shall be Flat, with preformed adhesive water stop, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. SBa-12 All reinforcing steel and mesh shall be continued across joints. Keys and inclined dowels shall be provided where directed by the Engineer. Joints shall have water stop and/or joint sealer as directed by the Engineer. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance removed. All construction joints shall require adequate bond. After cleaning, before new concrete is placed, vertical joints shall be thoroughly wetted. Prior to placement of concrete in walls, the bottom construction joint must be slushed with one to two inches of neat cement grout. The neat cement grout shall have a water -cement ratio less than or equal to that of the concrete and a consistency similar to thick paint. The fresh concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained its initial set. b. )expansion or Slip Joints. Expansion joints shall be provided at locations detailed on the drawings. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete shall not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion or slip joint. Sponge filler shall be closed cell neoprene or rubber conforming to ASTM D1056, Grade 2A3. c. Other Embedded Items. All sleeves, inserts, anchors and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to concreting. Columns and beams shall be sleeved and chased only where reviewed by the Structural Engineer. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings for sizes and location of holes, sleeves, notches, bolts, inserts, etc. Concentrations of sleeves near the edges of structural slabs shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to concrete placement. All Subcontractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it shall be given ample notice and opportunity to furnish and install embedded items before the concrete is placed. d. Placing Embedded Items. Expansion joint material, water stops and embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable materials to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids. e. Temporary Floor Slab Penetrations. Penetrations into the floor slab of tanks shall not be greater, than Y2 the thickness. 10. PLACING CONCRETE: a. Preparation. Before placing of concrete is begun, hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment. Prior to depositing concrete, formwork shall have been completed; ice and excess water shall have been removed; reinforcement shall have been secured in place and free of mud, debris, 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. SBa-13 rust and splatter; expansion joint material, anchors and other embedded items shall have been positioned; and the entire preparation shall have been reviewed by the Engineer. Conveyinst. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is obtained. Conveying equipment shall be of size and design to insure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Conveying equipment and operations shall conform to the following requirements: Truck mixers, agitators and non -agitating units and their manner of operation shall conform to the applicable requirements of "Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete", ASTM C94. Chutes shall be metal or metal -lined and shall have a slope not exceeding one vertical to two horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements may be used, provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution. Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall be of suitable kind with adequate pumping capacity. The equipment shall be cleaned at the end of each operation. c. Placing. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, construction joints shall be located at points as provided for in the Drawings, or as reviewed by the Engineer. Placing shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited. Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. They may remain embedded in the concrete only if made of metal or concrete and if acceptable to the Engineer. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Concrete shall not be permitted to fall free more than 4 feet and shall not be dropped through reinforcing steel or into a deep form, nor subjected to any other procedure which will cause segregation. 94-021.002:03150 Where a surface mortar is to be the basis of the finish, the coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the forms with a suitable tool so as to bring a full surface of mortar against the form without the formation of excessive surface voids. All concrete shall be consolidated by mechanical vibrators, so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items and into corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Mechanical vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8,000 rpm and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over -vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at many points, from 18 to 30 -inches apart, for periods of 5 to 15 seconds duration. S Ba- 14 When placing concrete, the Contractor shall have a minimum of three functioning mechanical vibrators on site: at least two in operation, and at least one for standby. d. Bonding. Joints receiving an adhesive shall have been prepared and adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to the placing of fresh concrete. Surfaces of joints which have been obtained by the use of a chemical retarder shall have been prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to placing of fresh concrete. Surfaces marked "intentionally roughened" on the drawings shall be raked while wet or bush hammered after setting to '/.-inch amplitude roughness. 11. REPAIRING. PATCHING AND WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING: a. Watertightness Testing. Watertightness testing shall be in accordance with Specification: Tank Disinfecting and Leakage Testing. b. Removal. After forms have been removed, any concrete which is not formed as shown on the Drawings, is out of alignment or level beyond the required tolerance, or which shows a defective surface which cannot be properly repaired or patched shall be removed at the Contractor's expense. c. patching. All tie holes and all repairable defective areas shall be cleaned, coated with epoxy bonding agent and patched as soon as practicable after form removal. Use non -shrink grout as specified in the materials section of this specification. d. Repairing Defective Areas. (1) Tank walls cannot have any honeycombing, cold joints, cracks greater than 0.1 mm wide or leakage. If in the opinion of the Engineer, any honeycombing, cold joints, cracks or leakage are excessive, the Contractor shall remove the complete wall pour and replace it. Where minor honeycombing occurs, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer within 24 hours of removal of the forms. (2) Replace, to the satisfaction of Engineer, within 48 hours after the forms have been removed, all other defective concrete. (3) Cut out and remove to sound concrete, with edges square cut to avoid feathering, all honeycombed or otherwise defective concrete. (4) Use non -shrink grout and epoxy bonding agent as specified in the Materials section of this specification. (5) Perform in a manner that will not interfere with thorough curing of surrounding concrete. (6) Adequately cure all repair work and filled blockouts. 91-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-I5 12. FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES: a. Formed Finishes. Formed surfaces shall be finished in accordance with the following table: (1) Surface Finish Outside Surfaces Against Backfill: Rough Form Finish All Other Surfaces: Smooth Form Finish Rough Form Finish: No selected form facing materials are required for a rough form finish. Tie holes and defects shall be filled with non -shrink grout. Fins exceeding 1/4 -inch in height shall be chipped off. Otherwise surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by the forms. (2) Smooth Form Finisi. Concrete shall be cast against forms constructed of plywood, tempered hardboard or metal support by studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive deflections, see Table 4.3.1 of ACI 301. The arrangement of plywood or liner sheets shall be orderly and symmetrical and sheets shall be in as large sizes as are practicable. Sheets showing torn grain, worn edges, patches of holes from previous use, or other defects which will impair the texture ofconcrete surfaces shall not be used. Tie holes and defects shall be filled with non -shrink grout. All fins shall be completely removed. b. Rubbed Finishes. The following finishes, where specified on the Drawings, shall be produced on concrete which has been cast against plywood -faced forms, or metal forms. (1) Smooth -rubbed Finish. Smooth -rubbed finish shall be produced on green concrete. All necessary patching shall have been done immediately after forms have been removed and rubbing shall be completed not later than the following day. Surfaces shall be wetted and rubbed with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture are produced. No cement grout or slush shall be used other than the cement paste drawn from the green concrete itself by the rubbing process. (2) Sand -floated Finish. The forms shall be removed before the surface has fully hardened. The surface shall be wetted and rubbed with a wood float by a uniform circular motion, with fine sand being rubbed into the surface until the resulting finish is even and uniform in color and texture. c. Sandblast Finish. Where shown on the drawings, the smooth form finish shall be blasted to remove approximately 1/8" from the surface. 13. FLATWORK: a. General. The flatwork finisher foreman shall be an ACI Certified Flatwork Finisher or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer and shall be on site during all flatwork operations from start of placement until curing is in place. 94-021.00x:07150 SBa- I6 b. Edge Forms and Screeds. Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the designed elevations and contours in the finished surface and shall be sufficiently strong to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if the nature of the finish specified requires the use of such equipment. Floor slabs of structures intended to be liquid -tight shall not have stakes that penetrate the slab thickness. Use wet screeds or supports for screeds that remain partially embedded in the concrete or other means acceptable to the engineer to control the thickness of the floor slab during placing. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or approved compacting type screeds. When the formwork is cambered, screeds shall be set to a like camber to maintain the proper concrete thicknesses. c. Jointing. Construction Joints will not be permitted except as located and detailed on the Drawings and Specifications or as acceptable to the Engineer. d. Consolidation. Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Consolidation of slabs and floors shall be obtained with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other approved means. Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dryas practicable and the surfaces thereof shall not be manipulated prior to finishing operations. e. Finishes. Unless selection of finishes is made on the Drawings, the following finishes shall be used, as applicable. (1) 94.021.002:03150 Power Float Finish -- for slabs -on -grade and roof slabs. Tank roof, when present, shall slope 1/4 -inch per foot from center to exterior perimeter. Troweled Finish -- for floors in finished areas and where called for on Drawings. Broomed or Belt Finish -- for platforms, steps, landings and walkways, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Floated Finish. After the concrete has been placed, struck -off, consolidated and leveled by bull floating, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and/or when the mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit the proper operation of a power -driven float. The surface shall then be consolidated with power -driven floats of the impact type, except in thin sections, such as pan slabs which shall be floated by hand. Hand floating with wood or cork -faced floats shall be used in locations inaccessible to the power -driven machine. Trueness of surface shall be rechecked at this stage with a l0 -foot straight -edge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce planes checking true under the straight -edge in any direction, with tolerances not 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-17 exceeding 1/8 -inch in ten feet. The slab shall then be refloated immediately to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. (2) Troweled Finish. Where a troweled finish is specified, the surface shall be finished first with impact power floats, as specified above where applicable, then with power trowels and finally with hand trowels. The first troweling after power floating shall be done by a power trowel and shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects, but which may still contain some trowel marks. Additional trow- elings shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface shall be free of any trowel marks and shall be uniform in texture and appearance. On surfaces which support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by troweling or grinding. (3) Broom or Belt Finish. Sidewalks slabs and slabs in other locations so specified shall be given a coarse transverse -scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. This operation shall follow immediately after floating. Floatings shall be performed as outlined in Paragraph (1). Walks shall be sloped to drain away from buildings. (4) _Related Work. Before placing concrete slabs -on -grade, fill all trenches level with the surface of the ground and compact backfill after all under -floor piping has been installed. 14. CURING AND PROTECTION: a. General. Freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures and shall be maintained without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. A list of all intended curing methods including a description of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. 94-021.002:03150 (1) The concrete tank floor slab and topping slab (if applicable) shall be cured by keeping the slab continuously wet. Use polyethylene sheeting securely held in position, continuously sprinkle or dam edges of slab and pond water two inches deep over entire surface. Maintain water on slab for 10 days, then apply membrane curing compound. Sprinkling shall begin as quickly as concrete finishing and hardening operations will allow; concrete placed early in the day shall not be allowed to dry out. (2) The forms for concrete cast -in-place walls shall be left in place for 7 days. Wood forms shall be kept continuously wet until the formwork is removed. Alternatively the walls shall be kept wet for 7 days after removal of the forms by application of the membrane curing compound, by means of draped plastic or Burlene securely held in position along all edges (against the wind), or other means acceptable to the Engineer. SBa-18 If forms are removed prior to 7 days after concrete is placed, then immediately after forms are removed, a membrane curing compound shall be applied before the concrete becomes surface dry. (3) Roof slab, when present, non -water containing flatwork and other miscellaneous concrete areas shall be cured by keeping the concrete continuously moist for at least 7 days after placement by use of: a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling. 1. Begin as quickly as possible after initial set. 2. Provide complete coverage with minimum of runoff by regulating rate of water application. 3. Interrupt application of water to walls for finishing only over areas being finished. Do not permit wall areas to become dry which are not being finished. b. Wet burlap, wet absorptive mats, wet sand, polyethylene sheeting, or membrane curing compound. b. Application of Membrane Curing Compound. Apply membrane curing compound uniformly, leaving no pinholes or gaps. The curing compound shall be applied in two coats perpendicular to each other at the rate of 300 square feet per gallon per coat or more as recommended by the manufacturer. Upon completion, concrete surfaces shall be clean without discoloration, or traces of excess curing compound left on the surface:,. Cover unformed surfaces with curing compound within 30 minutes after final finishing and before concrete becomes "surface dry". Protect compound against abrasion during curing period. c. Cold -Weather Curing Protection. When the mean daily temperature of the atmosphere is less than 40°F, the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained at 70°F for a curing protection period of 3 days; or 50°F for a curing protection period of 7 days. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating or housing shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat. Detailed recommendations are given in "Standard Specification for Cold -Weather Concreting", ACI 306.1. Note: Fly ash concrete does not gain strength as fast as cement only concrete in cold weather, hence the Contractor should plan to provide supplemental heat or wait longer before removal of forms or shores. If air temperatures are forecast to drop below 32°F, the Contractor shall install a high -low temperature gauge into the most exposed portion of concrete during the curing protection period. The gauge shall be equipped to register the lowest overnight temperature. If the concrete temperature drops below the specified temperature, the curing period shall be 44-021.002:031 SO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBa-19 extended until the degree-days (above) are satisfied. Alternate methods involving "maturity meters" or in accordance with ASTM C918 may be submitted to the Engineer for review and calibration prior to use. d. Hot -Weather Temperature. When necessary, arrangements for installation of wind breaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering of a light color shall be made in advance of placement and such protective measure shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. Detailed recommendations are given in "Recommended Practice of Hot -Weather Concreting", ACI 305. e. Excessive Temperature Changes. Changes in temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5°F in any one hour or 50°F in any 24-hour period. f. Protection from Mechanical Injury. During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock and excessive vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage caused by construction equipment, materials, or methods and by rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to over -stress the concrete. 15. CONCRETE TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: a. Testing Agency. Ali concrete testing during construction shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Engineer or Owner. b. Concrete Cylinder Tests. The costs of cylinder testing during construction shall be borne by the Owner except for retests of concrete which does not conform to contract requirements or tests required by the Contractor for scheduling. Retests shall be paid for by the Contractor. Test specimens shall be taken by an ACI Certified Concrete Field Testing Technician - Grade 1 in accordance with the "Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field", ASTM C31. The Contractor shall coordinate concrete placements with the Engineer to insure proper testing in compliance with these Specifications. 94-021.002:03150 The Contractor shall furnish all concrete for tests without additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish a specially prepared box with high -low thermometer and thermostatically controlled heating or cooling devices in accordance with Section 9.2 of ASTM C31 for storage of the cylinders for the first 24 hours after molding. The use of testing services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. No less than six specimens for testing shall be taken for each 100 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, in each day's pour. Slump and air content tests shall be taken on the first three loads delivered to the job for each placement, and whenever consistency or air entraining admixture demand of concrete appears to vary. Specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions. Samples indicating low air content by the pressure method air content tests, in accordance with ASTM C231, shall be verified by the gravimetric method, ASTM C138, and the SBa-20 volumetric method, ASTM C 173, before adding additional air entraining admixture in the field. When in the opinion of the Engineer, there is a possibility of the surrounding air temperature falling below 40°F, he may require maturity meters to be imbedded in the concrete, pull-out tests in accordance with ASTM C900 or additional specimens to be cured under job conditions. Costs of field cured cylinders, pull-out tests and maturity meters shall be borne by the Contractor. Cylinders shall be tested in accordance with the "Standard Method of Testing for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders", ASTM C39. Compression tests will be made as follows: 2 at 7 days; 1 at 14 days; 2 at 28 days; 1 held in reserve. Test reports shall be transmitted to the Engineer for review for all 7, 14 and 28 -day breaks. All test cylinders shall be identified by location of concrete placement on project. If the average 28 -day strength of the laboratory control cylinders for any portion of the structure falls below the compressive strengths called for on the Drawings or Specifications, the Engineer shall have the right to order a change in the proportions or the water content for the remaining portion of the structure. If the average 7 and 14 -day strengths of the laboratory -cured cylinders for any portion of the, work falls significantly below the strengths deemed necessary to produce the 28 -day required strength, the Engineer shall have the right to require conditions of temperature and moisture necessary to secure the required 28 -day strength. Furthermore, the Engineer may require pull out tests in accordance with ASTM C900 or tests in accordance with the "Standard Methods of Securing, Preparing and Testing Specimens of Hardened Concrete for Compressive and Flexural Strengths", ASTM C42 or order load tests to be made on the portions of the structure so affected, in accordance with Chapter 2 of the ACI Building Code. In the event an area is found to be structurally unsound, the Engineer may order removal and replacement of concrete, as required. The costs of the testing and structural evaluation and redesign, if required, shall be borne by the Contractor. c. Slump Tests: Slump tests will be performed by the Testing Agency, using the "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete", ASTM C143. The cost of slump testing shall be borne by the Owner, except for retests due to concrete not conforming to the Contract Documents. Retests shall be paid for by the Contractor. 16. SUPPLEMENTAL TANK CONSTRUCTION REOUIREMENTS: a. Description. The work covered by this section consists of covering all plant costs, labor, equipment, appliances and materials in performing all operations in connection with the construction of the concrete tank in accordance with this Specification and Drawings. b. General. The tank shall conform to all applicable provisions of these Specifications and all applicable provisions of ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete". c. Bidders Qualification. The General Contractor shall have constructed several comparable structures satisfactory to the Engineer in its own name. The Contractor shall guarantee workmanship and materials entering into his portion of the work for a period of one year 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S Ba -2 I from date of acceptance of the work. In case leakage or other defects appear within the one-year period, the General Contractor will be responsible for making the required repairs at his own expense upon written notice by the Owner that such defects have been found. Leakage shall be defined as the appearance of free water showing stream flow or wetness which can be picked up on a dry hand or facial tissue, on an exterior surface, the source of which is from the inside of the tank. d. Tank Construction Procedure. 1. Construct the wall footing and floor slab monolithically. The floor slab shall be constructed with only those construction joints shown on the drawings (if any). No construction joints in the floor slab will be allowed except as shown or reviewed by the Engineer. Submit the elongation records to the Engineer for review. 2. Construct the walls floors and walkways. 3. Perform watertightness testing of the tanks. 4. Backfill in accordance with the Technical Specifications herein, and the Soils Engineer's recommendations. e. Backfilling. 94-021.002:03130 Backfilling shall not begin until the tank is complete and has passed the watertightness test. Backfill around tank wall shall be built-up in maximum 8 -inch loose lifts compacted as called for in the specifications and soil report. Differential backfill elevations greater than 4 feet around the perimeter of the tank will not be permitted. Backfill over tank roof, if any, shall be built-up in successive 6 -inch compacted lifts. Differential backfill thickness greater than 6 -inches over the entire roof area will not be permitted. Heavy mechanical equipment shall not be allowed to compact backfill within 5 feet of the tank wall. Hand or light mechanical equipment (5,000 lbs. GVW max.) shall be used for compaction within this area. Heavy mechanical equipment shall not be allowed on the tank roof. Maximum GVW on the tank roof is 5,000 lbs. for front end loader type equipment and 10,000 lbs. for dozer type equipment. 1 1 SBb-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATION Bb YANK/BASIN WATERTIGITNESS TESTING 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this specification shall consist of furnishing all material, equipment, supplies and accessories required, and of performing all operations needed in connection with the cleaning, watertightness testing, and repairing of basins, tanks, wet wells, and sumps. 2. CLEANING: After a tank/basin has been completed, including the top slab, and before backfilling, the inside of the roof, the walls, and the floor shall be broomed clean. Plug the normal outlet to the system during cleaning. After the brooming and removal of all debris, all cracks over 0.1 mm wide and joints shall be properly sealed, and approved by the Engineer. After sealing, the walls and floor shall be hosed off and the tank/basin shall be tested for watertightness. Any water used during construction, testing, or cleaning, will not be allowed back into the Owner's system. The Contractor shall make provisions to drain or pump all water to the existing sanitary sewer system, or storm drain system. Rate of discharge shall not exceed sewer or storm drain capacity. 3. WATERTIGI-ITNESS TESTING: The following tests shall be applied to determine that the tank/basin is acceptably watertight. a. Preparation. Fill the water bearing structure with potable water to the highwater level and let it stand for at least 24 hours. If the water level drops during the 24 hour period, it shall be refilled. b. Global QrIteria. Measure the drop in liquid level over at least the next 72 hours to determine the liquid volume loss for comparison with the allowable. The maximum allowable average loss shall be 0.10% of 1% of the tank/basin volume per 24 hours. The Contractor may cover the opening of the tank/basin with plastic so as to eliminate evaporative losses. The length of the test period shall be long enough to result in a minimum 3/8 -inch drop in liquid level at the maximum permissible loss rate. If the loss exceeds the maximum allowable, the test may be extended. If at the end of the extension, the average daily loss does not exceed the maximum allowable, the test shall be considered satisfactory with regard to quantity of loss. If the net liquid loss exceeds the maximum allowable, leakage shall be considered excessive and the tank/basin shall be repaired and re -tested until watertightness is achieved within the appropriate limit. c. Visual Criteria. Wet spots on the exterior wall surfaces or flowing water at the wall base shall not be permitted. Wet spots are defined as spots where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand or facial tissue. The source of water movement through the wall shall be located and permanently sealed by epoxy injection or other successful method acceptable 94-021.002:03150 SBb-2 to the Engineer. Leakage through the wall base joint or footing shall likewise be corrected. Damp spots on the wall or wet spots on the footing if not flowing are generally to be expected, and are permissible if the overall loss is within allowable limits. d. Repairs. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs if the concrete tank/basin fails the watertightness tests or is otherwise defective. The method of repair shall be acceptable to the Engineer. See Specification: Cast in Place Concrete. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sac -I SPECIFICATION Bc PRECAST CONCRETE 1. SCOPE OF WQRK: The work required under this Specification consists of furnishing all plant labor and materials, and perform ing al I construction operations in connection with installation and erection of all precast prestressed concrete units and all related embedded items, and connection plates. 2. REFERENCES,: Precast, prestressed flexural members shall conform to all applicable provisions of the latest editions of the ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" and ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Precast -Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Plant Certification Program prior to the start of production. The erector shall have been regularly engaged for at least 5 years in the fabrication and erection of precast -prestressed structural concrete similar to the requirements of this project. 3. MATERIALS: a. General. Unless otherwise noted herein, all materials shall conform to requirements of the Concrete Work Specification. b. Prestressing Tendons. Tendons shall conform to the appropriate Specifications as indicated below. 1. "Specifications for Uncoated Stress -Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete" (ASTM A421). 2. "Specifications for Uncoated Seven -Wire Stress -Relieved Steel Strand for Prestressed Concrete" (ASTM A416). c. Reinforcing Steel. 1. Bars shall be deformed billet steel conforming to ASTM A 615. 2. Wire shall be cold drawn steel conforming to ASTM A 82. 3. Welded wire reinforcement shall be welded steel conforming to ASTM A 185. 4. FABRICATION: a. General. Units shall be fabricated in a plant that can demonstrate similar experience as required in paragraph 2 ofthis specification. The Contractor shall substantiate the experience upon request of the Engineer. All members shall be true to dimensions (within specified tolerance) with no twists or bends. b. Strength. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete shall be 5,000 psi at 28 days. 94.021.002:03150 SBc-2 c. Camber. Camber For all members to be minimized by uniform concrete control prior to stressing. Differential camber between adjacent members shall be leveled by an acceptable method. d. Dimensional Tolerances. 1. Cross-sectional Dimensions: Less than 24 -inches +%-inch 24 to 36 -inches +3/a -inch Over 36 -inches +'/:-inch 2. Length: Less than 30 -feet +%2 -inch 30 to 50 -feet +3/4 -inch Over 50 -feet + 1 -inch 3. Deviation in Squareness of Ends: Vertical Less than 12 -inch 1/32-in./in. Over 12 -inches 3/16-in.+1/64-in./in. Horizontal 1/64-in./in. 1/64-in./+1 /64-infin. 4. Deviation from Straight Line (SWEEP): 3/16 -in per 10 feet x total length 5. Deviation from Mean Camber (as installed): +'/e -in per 10 feet x total length. 6. Prestressing Force: Deviation in location from specified C.G. Individual tendon force or elongation Total prestress force or elongation 7. Concrete Cover Over Reinforcing: ±3 percent ±5 percent ±5 percent ±'/4 -inch e. Surface Finish. The surface finish shall be reasonably smooth and uniform with no defects such as honeycomb, rock pockets, unsightly patches, cracks, spalled edges, exposed steel, etc., and surfaces shall be left clean and fully acceptable to receive succeeding work. The exposed vertical ends of double -tee roof units are to receive shop applied sacked finish. Strand ends are to be cut off in recessed pockets. Pockets are to be adequately plugged before sacked finish. 5. TRANSPORTATION. HANDLING AND ERECTION: Perform work in such manner as to prevent damage to the members or other construction. Cracked or defective units shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. 94-021.002:03130 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBc-3 All units shall be permanently secured in position without forcing or imposing any undue stress or Toads on any portion of the work. 6. SUBMITTALS: Submit shop/erection drawings, design calculations, and a complete description of the proposed material sources, concrete mixture, methods and equipment to the Engineer for review before fabrication commences. The drawings must show all required openings and all embedded items. Detail drawings shall fully describe the stressing system and procedure to be employed, and shall show type, length, number, size, location, and initial prestressing force of strands, reinforcing bars, and connections with erection detai Is. The shop Drawings and the calculations shall bear the Colorado Professional Engineer Stamp of the Design Engineer. 7. OUALITY CONTROL: a. Testing and Inspection. Concrete cylinders and tests, and other testing and quality control services and facilities as necessary to determine conformance to the specifications shall be provided by the Contractor. b. Design. Members shall be designed and fabricated to minimize camber due to plastic flow. Any proven system of prestressing will be accepted. Facilities for pretensioning shall be in accordance with recommendations of the Precast -Prestressed Concrete Institute. Pretensioning facilities shall meet the experience requirements given in Paragraph 2 of this Specification. Members shall be designed to support the superimposed dead loads and live Ioads called out on the Drawings. Members shall be designed by an engineer licensed to practice in the State of Colorado. Members shall be designed with connections adequate for all required vertical and lateral loads. The precast designer shall coordinate connections between the precast units and the structure with the general contractor. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATION Bd CONCRETE MASONRY 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required and of performing all operations needed in connection with all masonry work shown on the Drawings, and herein specified. All work required in this Specification shall be coordinated with work required in the Specifications: Concrete; Interior Piping and Plumbing; Carpentry, Millwork and Miscellaneous Metalwork; Metal Doors, Frames, and Hardware; Electrical; Heating and Ventilating; Control; and General Equipment Provisions. Masonry work shall include patchup around all pipes that pass through special blocks, strips, bolts, anchors, etc. for other work furnished under other Specifications that shall be installed during masonry work as required. Prepare holes, recesses and bedding as required for all chases and duct spaces, as required for installing of plumbing, electrical work, ventilation, etc. All work shall comply with requirements of the most recent edition of the Uniform Building Code. 2. MATERIALS: a. Concrete Block. The concrete blocks for all walls shall be steam cured, hollow, load-bearing concrete masonry units conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation C90, Grade N-1, and shall have a minimum face shell thickness of 1-1/4 inches. The nominal dimensions of all blocks shall be 8 inches high, 16 inches long, and at widths indicated on the Drawings. Block shall have a smooth face free from cracks, chips and other defects and shall weigh approximately 105 pounds per cubic foot. All units will comply with materials scheduled on Drawings. Block to be used in this project is as follows: Standard Lightweight Block with aggregates meeting ASTM C331 requirements. All masonry units will meet WPI ratings as measured by the Standard Masonry Permeability Test. b. Horizontal Wall Reinforcement. The horizontal wall reinforcement at brick and block shall be standard galvanized "Dur -O -Wall", or approved equal, with No. 9 Guage deformed side rods. The reinforcement shall be butt -weld construction with ladder type design. The rods shall comply with the material requirements of ASTM specification, Designation A82. The minimum weight of tensile steel in the reinforcement shall be 0.18 pounds per lineal foot. When cast in regular mortar joints, the deformation of the side rods shall be of such extent as to develop a minimum surface bond stress of 700 psi. c. Vertical Reinforcement. Where required by the Drawings, the reinforcement for use in reinforced masonry shall be new -strength grade billet steel, deformed bars conforming in quality to the latest ASTM A-615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 94-021.002:03150 SBd-2 d. Pea Gravel Grout for Encasinz Vertical Reinforcement. 1 part Portland cement 0 to 1/20 parts of lime 2-1/4 to 3 parts sand 1 to 2 parts pea gravel Minimum compressive strength shall be 3,000 psi in 28 days. Grout shall be mixed with a slump of 5-8 inches. e. Bond Beams. The bond beams at the top of the masonry walls shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. The concrete for the bond beams shall be made with 3/4 -inch aggregate, sand, and not less than 5-1/2 sacks of Portland cement per cubic yard (mix to be submitted to Engineer for approval) or the above pea gravel grout. f. Lintels. Masonry lintels shall be constructed of bond beam blocks filled with reinforced concrete. Blocks shall meet the requirements of this Specification. Reinforcement shall be equivalent to the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 60. Lintel details are shown on the Drawings. g. Mortar. Mortar for all masonry work shall conform to the requirements of the Property Specifications of ASTM Standard Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry, Designation C270. Mortar shall be a cement -lime mixture, Type "S", as defined in Table 2 of ASTM C270. To all mortar work shall be added "Hydrocide Powder" waterproofing in the approved integral treatment, proportioned in exact accordance with the directions of the manufacturer, Sonnebom Building Products. The use of masonry cement will not be permitted, except with written approval of the Engineer. Portland cement shall be the same as specified for concrete, and hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM Specification, Designation C207, Type S. The sand for the mortar shall conform to ASTM Specification, Designation C 144, and shall pass a No. 16 sieve. All mortar shall be thoroughly mixed in a rotary machine and shall be mixed only in such quantities as are needed for immediate use. All measurements shall be made with cubic foot or known volume containers. No measurements for proportioning mortar shall be made by "shovel" volumes. No retempering will be permitted, and masonry mortar which has been mixed for a period greater than 150 minutes shall in no case be used on any portion of the work, but must be discarded. h. nsulat ion. All cells in masonry that are not filled with grout shall be filled with insulation. The insulation shall be pourable Perlite, silicone treated to reduce moisture absorption, conforming to ASTM C549, Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. i. Caulk. Caulk shall be General Electric Silicone Sil-Pruf guaranteed not to stain unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 94.021.002:03130 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SBd-3 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS: a. General. All work shall be done by skilled workmen. Care shall be taken to work units to the best advantage in horizontal runs. All masonry shall be braced and supported as necessary to insure a completely safe condition until set and tied into the structure. The necessary bolts, inserts, sleeves, conduits, door frames, louvers, and other work required shall be accurately set and securely held in place in accordance with standard practices during laying of masonry. All portions of the completed wall shall be thoroughly wet down and kept continuously wet for four hours after installation. b. Sample Panel. Prior to the start of installation of any masonry the Contractor shall be required to build a sample panel of masonry to be used on the project unless instructed in writing by the Engineer voiding this requirement. The purpose of the panel will be to demonstrate proposed reinforcing, bond, mortar joint and workmanship. The panel shall be 4 feet by 4 feet and include special shapes or conditions. Approval of the panels will be made by the Engineer after drying, curing time, and the cleanup by proposed methods to be used on the project. Should the panel not be acceptable, additional panels shall be constructed until approved. The accepted panels shall not be moved and shall become the standard for comparison for all masonry work on this project. c. Wall Construction. All masonry shall be laid with level courses, uniform joints, square corners, plumb verticals, true surfaces, and uniform running bond. Masonry shall be laid in a full bed of mortar within one minute of spreading mortar and shall be shoved into place with horizontal and vertical joints completely filled. All corners shall be bonded. All interior partitions shall be joined to the exterior walls by bonding with Dur -O -Wall. All masonry shall be close fitted and neatly trimmed, if necessary, against frames and walls, and rigidly anchored thereto. Cavities shall be kept clear of mortar extrusions and droppings so that there will be no interference with insulation. 94-021.002:03150 Joints on exterior faces shall be flush and follow profile of the block face. The mortar shall be worked to a hard dense surface and shall be free of shrinkage cracks or other cracks between mortar and block. Tooling shall be delayed until mortar has initially set sufficiently to prevent shrinkage in the mortar due to excess water. Finish work shall be protected by boards and paper, and new work shall be covered at night. No masonry shall be laid down when temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. An air temperature above 50 degrees Fahrenheit shall be maintained on both sides of the masonry for a period of at least 48 hours. Contractor shall follow the recommended practices for cold weather masonry construction by the International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council. The Contractor shall build in all lintels, plates, anchors, conduits, sleeves, pipes, etc., and shall provide all chases required by other crafts. At the completion of the work all holes or defective mortar joints shall be pointed, and, where necessary, defective joints shall be cut out and re -pointed. Exposed masonry shall be SBd-4 protected against staining from wail coverings or other sources, and excess mortar shall be wiped off the surfaces as the work progresses. At the completion of the work, all exposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned. d. Caulking. The caulking shall be applied with a gun, or by hand when necessary, to insure a complete and deep installation. Caulking joints shall be not less than 1/4 -inch nor more than 3/8 -inch wide. and shall be a minimum uniform depth of l/8 -inch with approved nonstaining backing. The joints shall be neatly trimmed and struck smooth and the surfaces shall be left true. All caulking shall be reviewed at the completion of construction and any sags or other defects shall be corrected. The caulking shall be applied around all windows and louvers and around the exterior of door frames, at the intersection of materials or units, at the intersection of dissimilar materials, and elsewhere as shown or necessary to complete sealing of joints. e. Vertical Wall Reinforcement. Wall reinforcement shall be placed in block cells as indicated on the Drawings. Those cells in which reinforcement is placed and the corner blocks shall be solidly filled with pea -gravel grout. Reinforcement shall be accurately formed to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. All bars shall be bent cold. Metal reinforcement shall not be straightened or repaired in a manner that will injure the material. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Heating of the reinforcement will be permitted only when the entire operation is approved by the Engineer. In splicing vertical reinforcement or attaching to dowels, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. When it is necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than shown on the Drawings, the character of the splice must have prior approval of the Engineer. Wherever possible, grouting shall be done from the unexposed face of the masonry. Extreme care shall be used to prevent any grout or mortar from staining the face of the masonry to be left exposed, stained or painted. If any grout or mortar does contact the face of such masonry, it shall be immediately removed. Protect all sills, ledges, offsets, etc., from droppings of mortar and protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction. All reinforcement embedded in masonry walls shall be grouted in place with pea -gravel grout in lifts not to exceed four feet. Each pour of grout shall be stopped at least 1-1/2 inches below the top and puddled with a wooden puddler. Consolidation with a trowel is not acceptable. Allow at least 15 minutes for settlement of grout before pouring the next lift. f. Horizontal Wall Reinforcement. The reinforcement shall be placed in the first through bed course above the foundation line and in bed joints at 16 -inch centers vertically. Also, where no lintels are specified, the reinforcement shall be placed in the first and second bed joints above and below openings, the reinforcement shall be continuous, and in the second bed joint 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 94-021.002:031 SO 1 1 SBd-5 above and below openings, it shall extend two feet beyond each side of the opening. Provide reinforcement at each course at mitered corners, extend minimum 24 -inches horizontally. The reinforcement shall be wide enough to bridge the air spaces and shall be two inches less in width than the nominal thickness of the splices to insure continuity, and the corners shall be cut and bent as required. The reinforcement shall not pass through the vertical masonry control joints or knock -out panels. Where splices are required reinforcement shall lap a minimum of 12 -inches. 1 1 SCa-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATION Ca BURIED PIPELINES 1. SCOP: This Specification covers materials and installation to be used in the construction of buried pipelines and appurtenances. 2. GENERAL: All materials shall be new and the best available. All material used shall be according to the mentioned standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and the American Society of Testing for Materials (ASTM) latest revisions unless referenced. Miscellaneous fittings shall be as called out on the Drawings. All pipe will be field inspected at the job site and checked for conformance to these specifications. Pipe and fittings will be checked for out -of -round or damaged joints, interior and exterior surface damage, gasket damage and the other requirements listed herein. Any pipeline or appurtenant material found defective will be rejected. Any material rejected at the job site shall be marked "Rejected," and the Contractor shall remove it immediately from the job site. The Contractor shall provide results of tests required by the various standard specifications listed herein. The Contractor will not be reimbursed for the pipe tested, the testing, or for the reports submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with 2 copies of the standard specifications covering the manufacture and testing procedures of the pipelines and other materials. The submittal shall be made prior to delivery of the materials. 3. DUCTILE-A9N PIPE. FITTINGS. AND APPURUNANCES: Unless revised on the Drawings or in the Special Construction Provisions the pipe shall be Class 54 in accordance with ANSI A21.51 and shall have a forty mil nominal (0.040") lining of ceramic epoxy. The lining shall be an amine cured nonvalae epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment. The lined ductile iron pipe must comply with the testing requirements of ASTM B 117-85, ASTM G95-87 and ASTM D714-87. The lining shall be Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy Lining by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal. Unless otherwise specified the pipe joint shall be the "push -on" type, made in accordance with ANSI A21.11, and the gaskets shall be standard for buried water service and as provided by the pipe manufacturer. The fittings shall be ductile -iron or cast-iron conforming to the requirements set forth in ANSI A21.10, AWWA C110. Cast-iron fittings 12 -inch size and smaller shall be Class 250, and fittings larger than 12 inches shall be Class 150. The interior of the fittings shall be lined with the same liner used for the pipe. The fittings shall have mechanical joints in accordance with ANSI A21.11. The gaskets for the joints shall be suitable for municipal sewage. 94-021.002:102199 SCa-2 a. Polyethylene Encasement. When required, the ductile -iron pipeline and fittings shall be encased in polyethylene film in accordance with the following requirements of ANSI A21.5, AWWA C105. (1) Polyethylene: The polyethylene film shall be manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to the requirements of ASTM D-1248. The raw materials shall be Type 1, Class A (natural) or C (Black), Grade E-1 with flow rate of 0.4 maximum and dielectric strength of 1015 ohm -cm3 minimum. (2) Polyethylene Film: The finished polyethylene film shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 0.008 -inch (8 mil), and the minus tolerance on thickness shall not exceed 10 percent of the nominal thickness. The film shall have a minimum tensile strength of 1200 psi with an elongation of 300 percent minimum. The dielectric strength shall be 800 volts/mil thickness minimum. (3) Tube Size or Sheet Width: The tube size of sheet width for each pipe diameter shall be as listed in the following table: Nominal Minimum Width (In.) Pipe Diameter (In.) Flat Tube Sheet 4 16 32. 6 20 40 8 24 48 b. Thrust Restraint. Where designated on the Drawings or where existing conditions do not permit the use of concrete thrust blocks, fitting restraints shall be made with tie rods and pipe clamps or special fitting bolts. Tie rod restraint systems shall have a minimum of 2 bolts or rods per joint or clamp. Minimum tie bolt sizes and quantities are as follows: Pipe Size Bolt Diameter - Ouantitv 4" - 8" 6/e" - 1 pair The tie bolts shall be fabricated from "Cor -Ten" steel or equal according to the requirements of ASTM A242 with a minimum yield stress of 46,000 psi. Retainer clamps shall be equal to "socket clamp," Figure 595, as manufactured by ITT -Grinnell. c. Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands. Where designated on the Drawings, fitting restraints shall be made with mechanical joint retainer glands. Mechanical joint retainer glands used shall be cast from 60-40-12 ductile iron and shall have bolt circles, bolt holes, and dimensions which will permit the glands to be used with standard mechanical joint bells and standard length bolts, as per ANSI A21.11 and AWWA C111. All special tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be used during installation and shall be supplied 94.021.002:102199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCa-3 to the Owner. Retainer glands shall be as manufactured by ESAA Iron, Inc., Series 100, or approved equal. 4. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (C900 and C9051: Four inch through 12 -inch pipe shall be similar and equal to Class 100, and shall conform to AWWA C900, "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 -inch through 12 -inch, for Water," unless otherwise designated on the Drawings or Special Construction Provisions. All Class 100 pipe shall meet the dimension requirements of DR 25 and shall have an equivalent cast-iron pipe outside diameter. DR 25 pipe shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Fourteen through 36 -inch pipe shall conform to AWWA C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters 14 -inch through 36 -inch", unless otherwise designated on the Drawings or Special Construction Provisions. All I4 -inch through 36 -inch pipe shall meet the dimension requirements of DR 25 and shall have an equivalent cast-iron pipe outside diameter. PVC pipe less than 4 -inch diameter shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A2241 for Schedule 80 Pressure Class. Joints shall be gasketed push -on type suitable for buried pipe. Pipe and fittings shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF Approved Class 12454-A or 12454-B PVC conforming to requirements of ASTM D1784 (latest revision). Provisions must be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring and integral thickened bell as part of each joint. Pipe shall be supplied in laying lengths of 20 feet. All pipe and fittings shall be assembled with a non-toxic lubricant. Each length of pipe shall have marked on the exterior the following: Nominal size and OD base Material Code Designation Dimension Ratio number "DR 18" or "DR 25" AWWA Pressure Class "PC 150" or "PC 165" AWWA Designation, "AWWA C900" or "AWWA 905" Name or Trademark of Manufacturer National Sanitation Foundation Seal for Potable Water The fittings shall be ductile or cast-iron as specified above. 5. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIKE (SDR35). The 3 -inch to 15 -inch diameter pipe shall be type PSM polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC) and shall be suitable for gravity sewer service. The pipe material shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B or 12364-C or 12454-C or 13364-B (with a minimum tensile modules of 500,000 psi) as defined in ASTM D1784. All PVC pipe and fitting shall meet or exceed all of the material requirements of ASTM D3034 and thickness requirements of SDR -35 (3 -inch to 15 -inch diameter). SDR -35 PVC shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. 94-021.002;102199 SCa-4 Provisions must be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring and integral thickened bell as part of each joint. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Pipe shall be supplied in laying lengths of 19-1 to 20 feet. All pipe and fittings shall be assembled with a non-toxic lubricant. Each length of pipe and all fittings shall have marked on the exterior the following: a. Manufacturer's Name or Trademark b. Nominal Pipe Size c. PVC Cell Classification (e.g. 12454-8) d. Legend - Type PSM SDR -35 Sewer Pipe e. ASTM -D3034 All fittings to be used with the PVC pipe shall be those manufactured by the manufacturer of the pipe. Each special fitting shall be a completely manufactured unit with either bells or spigots on each connection that are an exact duplication of the bells and spigots on the pipeline. Fittings with any other type of connections will not be accepted. 6. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (PRESSURE PIPE): The pipe shall meet the specifications and requirements of American Water Works Association Standard C901. The polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from prime virgin resins exhibiting a cell classification of PE 334434C as defined in ASTM D3350 with an established hydrostatic design basis of 1600 psi for water at 73°F. Pipe O.D. sizes 3" to 24" shall be furnished in ductile iron pipe sizes. The wall thickness shall have a Dimension Ratio (DR) of 13.5, as prescribed in AWWA C901. Pipe O.D. sizes less than 3 -inches shall have a DR of 7 and meet all of the requirements of AWWA C901. Laying lengths are 40 ft standard. The pipe is to be joined by heat fusion, flanges or other mechanical joint systems proven for HDPE pipes. The pipe shall comply to the testing specifications and requirements of AWWA Standard C901 for both pipe and fittings. 7. JNSULATION: Insulation where shown on drawings, or where the pipe has less than 5 feet of cover, shall be STYROFOAM 115 brand High Load, with a thickness of 2 inches, as manufactured by the DOW Chemical Corporation, or approved equal. 8. CONCRETE: Concrete for encasing the sewer pipeline, manhole bases, securing clean-out access castings, thrust blocks, and other similar items shall have a 28 -day compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi. All reinforcement required shall be standard deformed reinforcement conforming to the requirements set forth in ASTM A615, Grade 60. 9. MANHOLES: Manholes shall be constructed of pre -cast concrete riser sections, in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. The concrete sections shall conform to ASTM C478. The top section required for change of diameter shall be eccentric cone or fiat slab if permitted by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings. 94-021.002:102199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCa-5 To bring the manhole cover to the correct elevation, the adjustment section of each manhole shall be Pre -cast concrete grade adjustment rings. These rings shall be not less than 6 inches wide and furnished in heights to allow for 1 -inch adjustment. Total adjustment height, with grade rings and casting, shall not exceed 8 inches. Joints between manhole sections shall be sealed by RUB'R-NEK, Kent Seal N2 2 or LO -MOD GEL Joint Material. Diameter of the gasket shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Gaskets for connecting PVC pipe to manhole sections shall be specifically manufactured for that purpose. The gasket shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer. The manhole frame and cover shall be J -Mark Model J-1161 or approved equal. The manhole steps shall be Alcoa Aluminum Na 12653B or approved equal. Stubs shall be provided at manholes when so shown on the Drawings. Such stubs shall be sealed with a removable plug. 10. MISCELLANEOUS: a. Plugs. Plugs shall be specifically manufactured for the pipelines in which they are to be installed. The plug shall be constructed of a material approved by the Engineer and shall provide a permanent water -tight installation without permanently sealing the joint. b. Couplings. Couplings for PVC gravity pipe shall be used only where shown on the drawings or where approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a description of and exact location of any couplings used. Flexible couplings for PVC gravity pipe shall consist of a rubber gasket or boot, stainless steel shear ring, and 300 series stainless steel tightening bands. The coupling shall conform to requirements of ASTM C425 and shall be "Mission" ARC or approved equal. c. Fittings. Fittings shall be of the same material and to the same requirements, including coatings and linings, as the pipeline in which they are installed. The fittings shall be standard manufactured form with the same type of joint as the pipe. d. Grout. Grout shall be a non -shrink type with aluminum filings; grouts with iron filings are not acceptable. Grout shall be "Five Star Grout," "Embeco Grout" or equal. The Contractor may substitute a 2 -component, 100% solids epoxy resin (Sikadur Hi -Mod LV) for the specified grout. 94021.002:102199 Grout used for sealing service connections shall be a 2 -component, waterproof epoxy grout specifically manufactured for this application. The grout shall adhere to any of the dissimilar materials. SCa-6 e. Sealants. Sealants used on manholes or pipe connections shall be equal to SIKAFLEX-la, a one component polyurethane base, elastomeric sealant. When required due to moisture or immersion, provide SIKAFLEX 429 primer for application onto the substrate according to manufacturer's recommendation. 11. FLAP VALVE: Flap valves shall be furnished with a cast iron body, iron faces and bronze hinge pins. They shall be flanged mounted and have a 10 degree inclined seat plane. They shall be able to bolt a standard DIP flange and be drilled to ANSI 125 lb. standard. They shall be similar and equal to the Waterman Model PF -25F flap valves. 12. GATE VALVES AND BOXES: Where designated on the drawings, gate valves for buried pipelines two inches and larger shall be iron -body, bronze -mounted, double -disk, parallel -seat conforming to AWWA C500 for buried service, open CCW, non -rising stem, 2 -inch operating nut, for a working pressure of 150 psi. The joints for valves connected to the ductile -iron or PVC pipe shall be mechanical joints in accordance with ANSI A21.11. All gaskets shall be for standard water service. The valve box shall be installed over each buried valve. The valve boxes shall be of cast iron, complete with cover, having the word "SEWER" cast on the top. Boxes shall have 5 -'/4 -inch shaft, with a minimum thickness of 1A -inch. Valve boxes shall be three-piece adjustable screw type, similar and equal to Tyler screw-type Series 6860 with Ng 160 oval base. Two operating keys or wrenches shall be provided. Valves that are buried over 5 feet in depth shall be provided with operator extension rods including centering rings. Provide 2 -inch operating nut on rod, located approximately 2 feet below ground surface. 13. COUPLINGS: The pipe couplings shown on the Drawings to be used when connecting new pipes or pipes into existing buried pipelines with varying outside diameters shall be similar and equal to "Smith -Blair" 433 cast-iron transition coupling for sizes up to 16 inches and "Smith -Blair" 413 steel transition coupling for larger diameters. Couplings shall have an interior coating of a epoxy suitable for use with potable water. Exterior coating shall be equivalent to the attached new pipeline. Couplings for use with new pipe of the same outside diameter shall be "Smith -Blair" 431 cast iron or 16 -inch and smaller or steel for larger sizes. Coatings shall be the same as the transition couplings listed above. Coupling bolts shall be high strength, low alloy steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A325, Type 3. 94-021.002:102199 1 1 SCa-7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14. CORPORATION STOPS: All corporation stops for copper pipe shall be similar and equal to N2 H-15000, threaded inlet, coupling outlet, as manufactured by Mueller Company. Corporation stops used with polyethylene pipe shall be equal to Mueller H-15005. 15. COPPER PIPE: The copper pipe for all service connections shall conform to the requirements set forth in ASTM B-88, or its latest revision, and shall be Type K, soft annealed. 16. SERVICE ADDLES: Corporation stops 2" and larger shall be inserted in a double -strap bronze service saddle, similar and equal to "Smith -Blair" N2 323. 17. HANDLING QF MATERIAL: Pipe, fittings, valves, manhole rings, frames and covers, and all other accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage to them. Under no circumstances shall any materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Skidding which damages protective coatings will not be permitted. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench to prevent moving more than once. All pipe and fittings shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Any area damage beyond repair must be cut off and discarded. Any area of ductile -iron or PVC pipe damaged beyond repair must be cut off and discarded. Any length of reinforced concrete, asbestos -cement or vitrified clay pipe with damage shall be discarded. 18. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Each pipe length and fitting interior, interior surface of bells, and exterior surface of spigots shall be cleaned of all foreign material before placing it in the trench and shall be kept clean all times thereafter. Each item must also be examined for cracks and other defects before installation. Pipe shall be cut, only whenever necessary, to conform to location of manholes or connections. All cuts shall be straight, true, and at right angles to the axis of the pipe unless otherwise noted or directed by the Engineer. The cutting process shall leave a smooth end without damaging the pipe. All burrs shall be removed from the ends of cut pipe, and the end lightly rasped or filed. All tools used in cutting pipe shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with the spigot ends of pipe pointing in the direction of the flow, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Each pipe length shall be laid true to line and grade in such manner as to form a close concentric joint with the adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to the flow line. Pipe shall be laid in an unwatered trench and shall not be used for draining water from the trench. 94.021.002:102199 SCa-8 19. INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE -IRON PIPELINES: Except as specified herein or unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all installation of pipe shall conform to the recommendations contained in "A Guide for Installation of Ductile -Iron Pipe," published by the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association. A copy shall be available at the job site. a. Pipe Laying. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Pipe shall be laid on the bedding with support over the full length of the pipe barrel. Pipe joint deflections shall not exceed the amount shown in the following table. DMTJJ.E-IRON PIPE DEFLECTION Approx. Radius of Curve Size of Bend in Deflection in One Produced by Succession Pine One Joint 18 -Foot Length of 18 -Foot Joints 4" - 12" 4° 15" 250' The information in the columns referring to the deflection and the approximate radii shall be adjusted for pipe lengths different than 18 -foot lengths. To lay pipelines on curved alignment with shorter radius if called for on the Drawing, the Contractor will be required to use shorter pipe lengths. No increase in the proposal unit price shall be allowed for use of shorter pipe lengths. Double hubs may be used to lay pipelines on curved alignment. Vertical deflections shall not exceed any of the above values. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or by other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. The flame cutting of pipe by means of an oxyacetylene . torch will not be allowed. The pipe end shall be bevelled and free of sharp edges that could damage the gasket during installation. b. Jointing of Mechanical Joints. The last 8 inches of the pipe spigot and the inside of the bell of the mechanical joint shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, tar (other than standard coating), and other foreign matter from the joint, and then painted with a soap solution made by dissolving one-half cup of granulated soap in one gallon of water. The cast-iron gland shall then be slipped on the spigot end of the pipe with the lip extension of the gland toward the spigot end. The gasket shall be painted with the soap solution and placed on the spigot end of the pipe to be laid, with the thick edge toward the gland. 94-021.002:102199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCa-9 The entire section of the pipe being laid shall be pushed forward to seat in the spigot end of the bell of the pipe in place. The gasket shall then be pressed into place within the bell, being careful to have the gasket evenly located around the entire joint. The cast-iron gland shall be moved along the pipe into position for bolting, all of the bolts inserted, and the nuts screwed up tightly with fingers. All nuts shall then be tightened with a suitable (preferably torque -limiting) wrench. The torque for various sizes of bolts shall be as follows: Size (Inches) Range of Torque ft. - lb. % 45 - 60 34 75 - 90 1 100 - 120 11A 120- 150 Nuts spaced 180 degrees apart shall be tightened alternately in order to produce an equal pressure on all parts of the gland. c. Jointing of Pus(i-On Joints. In jointing the pipe, the exterior 4 inches of the pipe at the spigot end and the inside of the adjoining bell and particularly the groove for the gasket shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, tar (other than standard coating), and other foreign matter. The proper gasket supplied with the pipe shall be placed in the bell as described by the pipe manufacturer so it will spring into its proper place inside the pipe bell. A thin film of the pipe manufacturer's joint lubricant shall be applied to the gasket over its entire exposed surface. The spigot end of the pipe shall then be wiped clean and inserted into the bell to contact the gasket. Then the pipe shall be forced all the way into the bell by crowbar, or by jack and choker slings. The location of the gasket shall be checked with a gauge or tool designed for that purpose to assure that the gasket is in the proper position. d. Installation of Polyethylene Encasement. When required, the polyethylene encasement shall prevent contact between the pipe and the surrounding backfill and bedding material, but is not intended to be a completely air and watertight enclosure. Overlaps shall be secured by the use of 2 -inch wide, 10 mil thick, polyethylene pressure sensitive tape. Three different methods for the installation of polyethylene encasement on pipe are acceptable. Methods A and B are for use with polyethylene tubes and Method C is for use with polyethylene sheets. 94-021.002:102199 1) Method A. Cut polyethylene tube to a length approximately two feet longer than that of the pipe section. Slip tube around the pipe, centering it to provide a one -foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, and bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise until it clears the pipe ends. 1 SCa-10 1 After assembling the pipe joint, make the overlap of the polyethylene tube. Pull the bunched polyethylene from the preceding length of pipe, slip it over the end of the new length of pipe, and secure in place with pressure sensitive tape. Then slip the end of the polyethylene from the new pipe section over the end of the first wrap until it overlaps the joint at the end of the preceding length of pipe. Secure the overlap in place. Take up the slack width to make a snug, but not tight, fit along the barrel of the pipe, securing the fold at quarter points. Repair any rips, punctures, or other damages to the polyethylene with tape or with a short length of polyethylene tube cut open, wrapped around the pipe, and taped in place. Proceed with installation of the next section of pipe in the same manner. 2) Method B. Cut polyethylene tube to a length of approximately 1 foot shorter than that of the pipe section. Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. Make polyethylene snug, but not tight; secure ends as described in Method A. Before making up a joint, slip a 3 -foot length of polyethylene tube over the end of the preceding pipe section, bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise. After completing the joint, pull the three-foot length of polyethylene over the joint, overlapping the polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least one foot; make snug and secure each end as described in Method A. Repair any rips, punctures, or other damage to the polyethylene as described in Method A. Proceed with installation of the next section of pipe in the same manner. 3) Method C. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than that of the pipe section. Center the cut length to provide a 1 -foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching it until it clears the pipe ends. Wrap the polyethylene around the pipe so that it circumferentially overlaps the top quadrant of the pipe. Secure the cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet. Lower the wrapped pipe into the trench and make up the pipe joint with the preceding section of pipe. A shallow bell hole must be made at joints to facilitate installation of the polyethylene. After completing the joint, make the overlap as described in Method A. Repair any rips, punctures, or other damage to the polyethylene as described in Method A. Proceed with installation of the next section of pipe in the same manner. All fittings shall be covered in the same manner as the pipe. Where appurtenances are odd -shaped, they shall be covered with flat sheet, wrapped with seams doubled over, and 94-021.002:t02199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCa-11 taped. Branch services and other extensions shall be provided for with an X-shaped cut in the film, then the ends taped in place. At connections with unwrapped pipe, the polyethylene shall extend 2 feet onto the unwrapped pipe and securely taped in place. e. Installation of Special Restrained Joints. Restrained joint pipe and ductile -iron retainer glands shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. Torque wrenches and any recommended special tools shall be used during installation. Any special tools shall be supplied to the Owner. 20. INSTALLATION OF PVC PLASTIC PIPE: a. Pipe Laying. Pipe shall be laid with bell end facing in the direction of laying, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. No deflection in the joints shall be allowed. Whenever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane, to avoid obstructions or to plumb valve operators, the pipe itself may be uniformly curved as shown in the table below. Pipe Size Offset in Approximate Radius C1 150 20 foot length of Curve 4" 16" 150' 6" 12" 200' 8" 10" 250' Pipe deflection for curvature shall not be permitted at temperatures less than 32°F ambient temperature. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe, and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Bevel the end of the pipe with a beveling tool after the pipe is field cut. Place a clearly visible position mark at the correct distance from the end of the field cut pipe. b. Jointing the Pipe. The outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be thoroughly wiped clean. Set the rubber ring in the bell with the marked edge facing toward the end of the bell. Lubricate the spigot end using a thin film of the manufacturer -supplied lubricant. Push the pipe spigot into the bell manually, with blocking and bar or with special jacks. Position the completed joint so that the mark on the pipe end is in line with the end of the bell. Pipe joint shall not be assembled using power or trenching equipment. 94-021.002:102199 SCa-12 21. INSTALLATION OF HDPE PIPE: 1. Bedding. Bedding of the pipe should be performed in accordance with Specification A, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES, and the Drawings. Deviation from the specified compaction rates should be done only with the approval of the Engineer. 2. Joining. Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements of 500°F, alignment, and 150 psi interfacial fusion pressure. Butt fusion joining shall be 100% efficient offering a joint weld strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe. Socket fusion shall not be used. Extrusion welding or hot gas welding of HDPE shall not be used for pressure pipe applications, nor in fabrications where shear or structural strength is important. Flanges, unions, grooved - couplers, transition fittings and some mechanical couplers may be used to mechanically connect HDPE pipe without butt fusion. Refer to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Special Conditions. ASTM -D -2321 -Section 11.2, Minimum Cover for Load Application, Section 11.3, Use of Compaction Equipment, and Section 11.4, Removal of Trench Protection should apply unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 22. INSTALLATION OF VALVES AND BOXES: Valves shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field and shall be set with the operator plumb. Valves shall have the interior cleaned of all foreign matter before installation. Stuffing boxes shall be tightened and the valves shall be operated to opened and closed positions to insure that all parts are in working condition before installation. Installation and jointing procedures shall be similar to the attached piping installation. Special piping shall be used when required because of conflict with butterfly valve discs. Unless otherwise noted, a valve box shall be provided for every valve. The box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve or operator and shall be centered and plumbed over the operating nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished grade or such other level as may be directed by the Engineer. The adjustable valve box shall permit at least 3 inches of adjustment either direction when in place. 23. SEWER ENCASEMENTS: Whenever any sewer lines are crossed such that they are above or less than 18 inches below the water lines, the sewer line shall be encased with concrete to a horizontal distance of ten feet on either side of and perpendicular to the water line. The length of encasement shall be sufficient to insure that the water line is not within ten feet of an unencased sewer line. Encasement shall be as shown on the drawings. 94-021.002:102199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCa-13 An alternative to concrete encasement is use of an impervious and structurally sound pipe equal to Class 150 PVC (AWWA 900) extending the full length required with all joints encased in concrete extending at least 6 inches outside and beyond the joint. 24. EXTRA DEPTH EXCAVATION: In order to facilitate crossing under existing pipelines and other utilities, or as shown on the Drawings, the Contractor may be required by the Engineer to increase the depth of burial of new pipelines beyond design depth. No separate payment for extra depth will be made. 25. INSTALLATION QF THRUST RESTRAINT: The movement of fitting shall be restrained by use of concrete thrust blocks or steel clamp and tie bolt assemblies. The thrust blocks shall be poured between undisturbed solid ground and the fitting to be anchored; the area of bearing on the undisturbed trench wall shall be that shown on the thrust block detail or directed by the Engineer. The concrete shall be so placed that the pipe or fitting joints will be accessible for repair. Thrust blocks or other thrust restraint where thrust blocks cannot be used shall be required at all the fittings unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. A bond breaker shall be placed over the fitting before placing concrete. Thrust restraint clamps and tie bolts shall be assembled using clamps on each side of pipe bells with tie rods extending full pipe length for the dimensions shown on the detail drawings each direction from the restrained fitting. Clamp shall be installed tight enough to prevent twisting around the pipe. Two tie bolts per clamp with washer at clamp shall be located on side of pipe. Tighten tie bolt nut to "hand tight" with 12 -inch wrench (approximately 50-100 foot-pounds torque). Threaded tie rod ends shall extend two full threads past nut in final position. 26. GROUTING: Any opening between manhole walls and pipe made by the Contractor, or as designated elsewhere, shall be closed watertight with grout. The opening shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the pipe, "O"rings, and grout. The grout shall extend no less than the full width of the manhole barrel. 27. FLUSHING. TESTING. AND DISINFECTING: a. pipeline Flushing. The Contractor shall flush the pipelines as the work progresses by a means in accordance with good practice to insure that sand, rocks or other foreign material are not left in any of the pipelines. If possible, the flushing shall be made through an open pipe end; otherwise, use of a fire hydrant may be acceptable, but only on approval of the Engineer. b. Pressure Test. After each section of pipeline has been laid and partially backfilled (except for the joints or when the Engineer directs the trench to be backfilled for reasons of public safety, or if the Contractor elects to backfill prior to testing, as permitted), the pipe shall be slowly filled with water and tested. All pipe shall be tested at a pressure of 50 psi at the lowest point in each section. The duration of each pressure test shall be at least one continuous hour. All water used in testing the pipelines shall be taken from a potable water supply. 94-021.002:102199 SCa-14 Each section of pipeline being tested shall be slowly filled with water and all air removed. The specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, equipment, and connection corporation stops to the pipeline to perform the test. No testing shall be permitted against valves or fittings that are a part of the existing system unless specifically approved by the Engineer. All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, and joints will be carefully examined during the test. Any cracked or defective pipe, fittings, valves or hydrants discovered during the pressure test shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material. The test shall be repeated until it is satisfactory to the Engineer. c. Leakage Test. A leakage test shall be conducted, on the pipelines designated above and the copper lines, after the pressure test has been completed unless the pressure test indicates that there are no leaks. The Contractor shall furnish the pump, pipe, connections, meters, and all other necessary apparatus, and shall furnish all necessary assistance to conduct the test. The duration of each leakage test shall be two hours, and, during the test, the main shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 50 pounds per square inch. No pipeline installation will be acceptable until the leakage is less than the amount computed by the following formula: L = SD(P)" 133,200 L = Allowable leakage in gallons (per hour) S = Tested length of pipe (feet) D = Nominal diameter of pipe (inches) P = Average test pressure during the test (psi) Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that specified above, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and repair the points of leakage until the leakage is within the specified allowance. The pipe may be subjected to hydrostatic pressure, inspected, and tested for leakage at any convenient time after the trench has been partially backfilled, except at the joints, or backfilled as permitted by the Engineer. Where any section is provided with concrete thrust blocks, the pressure test shall not be made until at least two days have elapsed after the concrete was installed. The Engineer shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipe is to be tested so that he may be present during the test. 44-021.002:102194 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCa-15 d. Disinfecting. The following pipelines shall be disinfected: Pipeline Name 14/8 -inch Chlorine Contact Outfall Line Piping shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C601 after all construction work has been completed. Chlorine shall be added to the water at the necessary locations in the amount to form a 50 ppm free chlorine residual. The chlorine solution shall be left in the pipelines for not less than 24 hours, during which time all valves and fire hydrants shall be operated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. After that length of time, the chlorine residual of the solution at any place in the system shall not be less than 10 ppm. As required, the Contractor shall make all necessary taps for inserting the chlorine solution in the pipeline and venting and draining pipelines using approved corporation stops. After the disinfection has been completed and approved, the corporation stops shall be closed, left in place, and sealed with a cap. All chlorination work must be done under the super- vision of the Engineer. At the end of 24 hours, a bacteriological test is to be performed by the local health authority to insure adequate disinfection. After approval of the disinfection operations, the Contractor shall flush the new system until the chlorine residual is 0.3 ppm and a clear water test made. e. Alignment and Grade. Alt pipelines shall be checked for alignment and grade. Pipelines will be checked by the Engineer to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred after the trench has been bedded to an elevation 6 inches above the pipe and tamped as specified. The test will be as follows: f. Leakage. The leakage test described below shall be performed on all pipelines except those called out in Paragraph a. above. Tests for watertightness shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide assistance to the Engineer in development of a detailed record of the testing program. The sewer and connections shall not leak in excess of the following rate for a 24-hour test period: 94-021.002:102199 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE Pipe Size Leakage Inches Gal/Foot/24 Hours 8 0.30 6 0.23 4 0.15 Each reach of pipeline between manholes shall be tested individually. Any individual reach that leaks in excess of the amount allowed in the previous paragraph shall be considered as failing, and shall be repaired and retested. g. SCa-16 At the discretion of the Engineer, the time for leakage rate test may be shortened to four (4) hours. The tests and measurement of infiltration or exfiltration shall be conducted in a manner as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall repair the sewer in a manner that is satisfactory to the Engineer and re -test until satisfactory tightness is obtained. Infiltration tests will be used if the groundwater table is 1 foot or more above the finished sewer; otherwise, exfiltration tests will be used. The minimum head for the exfiltration tests shall be 2 feet above the top of the pipe at its highest point in the test section. Sections shall be bulk -headed so that during any test the head on the sewer at its lowest elevation will not be more than 10 feet. This restriction does not apply to ductile -iron pipe. In any section of the pipeline if the head at the lowest point in the section exceeds 10 feet, then the Engineer will set forth the special method of testing to meet the field conditions. Deflection. All PVC pipelines shall be tested for vertical deflection after placement and compaction of backfill unless testing is specifically excepted by the Engineer. Method of testing shall be by deflectometer of the rigid GO/No-GO type device. An alternative method will be permitted only by written permission of the Engineer or as defined in the Special Construction Provisions of these Specifications. Maximum allowable deflection shall be five (5) per cent of the pipe diameter. Any and all pipe with vertical deflection greater than the allowable shall be excavated, removed from the pipeline, replaced, backfilled and compacted as specified, and retested at the Contractor's expense. 28. MISCELLANEOUS: a. Sealants. Manufacturer's instructions, including curing time requirements, shall be strictly adhered to. Sealants and primers shall be delivered to the job site in new, manufacturer -sealed containers. After a container seal has been broken, the contents shall be used within the time frame specified by the manufacturer; the Contractor will not be allowed to reseal the container and use the contents at some later time. Sealants shall be applied to sound, dry surfaces which have been thoroughly cleaned. Concrete surfaces shall be free from form release agents, curing compound and other surface treatments. Metals and glass shall be washed with an oil -free solvent. b. Flexible Couplings. Flexible couplings shall not be used to bridge gaps larger than '/a -inch between pipe ends. Pipe ends shall be inserted into the coupling such that a '/a -inch gap remains at the center of the shear ring. 94-021.002:M2199 2199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCb-1 SPECIFICATION Cb EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed under this Specification shall include all labor, materials, equipment, plant and services as are necessary for the excavating and backfilling of all pipeline trenches. Refer to the standard trench section in the drawing set. The work shall include the excavation of whatever substances are encountered to the depths shown on the Drawings or modified in the field by the Engineer and installation of compacted bedding, backfill and surface restoration as described herein. Wherever in this Specification a Standard is quoted or used, such as, but not limited to, ASTM, AWWA and ACI, this shall be interpreted to be the latest revision of that Standard. 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Except as shown otherwise on the Drawings, all excavation shall be made by open cut. Permission may be granted to tunnel under driveways, crosswalks, curbing, walkways and utility installations, but such tunnels shall not exceed 10 feet in length. The length of trench permitted to be open at any one time may be limited when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such limitation is necessary for protection of the work or the convenience of the public. When excavations are through lawns, cultivated fields, pastureland, or areas having grass cover, the Contractor must stockpile separately all topsoil, which shall be replaced on top of the backfilling in the trench. All surfaces that have grass shall be reseeded by the Contractor. All lawns and other grass -covered areas, not excavated, on which excavated material is placed, shall be protected from damage by placing burlap over the grass. Where indicated on the Drawings or required herein, removed grass shall be replaced with sod. It is the general intent that the Contractor leave the work area in a similar and equal condition as it was preceding the Contract work. The Contractor must conform to the amended Rules and Regulations, Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR Part 1926, subpart P, Title 29, of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, including revisions and Appendices thereto. 3. SITE PREPARATION: Fences, walls, curbs, sidewalks, or structures shown on the Drawings to be removed, or if not so shown on the Drawings and authorized in writing by the Engineer to be removed, shall be so removed and shall later be replaced in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. All materials removed and not reused shall be hauled from the site and disposed of by the Contractor, at his expense. 94-021.002:03150 SCb-2 4. PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES: a. General. Existing power lines, telephone lines, 6 -inch and greater diameter trees, six feet or more from the pipe centerline, shrubbery, fences, water mains, gas mains, sewers, cables, conduits, ditches, embankments and other structures in the vicinity of the work not authorized to be removed, shall be supported and protected from injury by the Contractor during the construction and until completion of the work affecting them. The Contractor shall be liable for all damages done to such existing facilities and structures, as herein provided and he shall save the Owner from any liability or expense for injuries, damages, or repairs to such facilities. b. Underground Facilities. The type, size, location and number of all known underground facilities have been shown on the Drawings; however, no guarantee is made as to the true type, size, location, or number of such facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the existence and location of all underground utilities along the route of the work. The omission from, or the inclusion of, utility locations on the Drawings is not to be considered as the nonexistence of, or a definite location of, existing underground utilities. The Contractor shall notify the owner or owners of the existing utilities, whether aboveground or underground, 48 hours prior to proceeding with trench excavation whenever such trenching operations are within ten feet of the possible location of any existing utility. The notification shall also include a request for field staking any such underground facility that may be in the area of influence by the construction. Should any such utility be damaged in the trenching operations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the owner of such utility and, unless authorized in writing by the owner of utility, the Contractor shall not attempt to make repairs except to prevent further damage to property. Duplicate copies of any written authorization given to the Contractor to make repairs shall be filed with the Engineer and shall be so worded as to save the Owner from any responsibility whatsoever relative to the sufficiency of the repairs. If a conflict that is not shown on the Drawings develops between an existing utility and the work required by this Contract, the Contractor shall notify the owner of the utility and the Engineer immediately in writing. Such conflict may be considered, by the Engineer, to be a change in the work. The Contractor may request a change in the Contract amount for such change in the work, subject to the General Conditions. If during construction any underground utility conduit, including sewers, water mains, gas mains and drainage structures, or any aboveground utility facilities are required to be relocated, the Contractor shall notify the utility owner well in advance of his approach to such utility so that arrangements with the owner or owners of the affected utility can be completed without delay to the work. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCb-3 Except as otherwise provided in the Proposal, the cost of relocating both underground and aboveground utilities, exclusive of house water and sewer service connections, will be borne by the Owner. 5. SUBSURFACE INFORMATION: Except as may be shown on the Drawings or in the Soils Report, no additional subsurface exploration has been made along the pipeline alignment as a part of this project. 6. CLASSIFIED EXCAVATION: Excavation will be not be classified. The cost for all excavation is to be included in the installed pipe unit price, as provided in the Proposal. 7. TRENCH WIDTH: The minimum clear trench width measured at the top of the pipe barrel shall be not less than the outside pipe diameter, plus 16 inches. For all pipe, the maximum clear trench width measured at a point 12 inches above the top of the pipe barrel shall be not greater than the trench width shown on the following table. MAXIMUM TRENCH WIDTH TABLE Pipe Diameter Maximum Pipe Diameter Maximum Inches Trench Inches Inches Trench Inches 4 24 24 48 6 26 27 52 8 28 30 56 10 30 33 60 12 33 36 68 14 35 15 36 39 72 16 37 18 40 42 75 20 42 21 44 48 82 If the above -stated maximum trench widths are exceeded, either through accident or otherwise, and if the Engineer determines that the combined dead and live loads will exceed the design loadings on the pipe, the Contractor shall either cradle the pipe in concrete, or use a pipe of a stronger class, as required by the Engineer. The cost of such remedial measures shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense. 8. TRENCH WALLS: For payment quantities, all the trench sidewalls shall be considered to be vertical from the bottom to the top of the excavation. Any rock excavation, trench stabilization or backfill material required will be measured and paid for on the basis of trench width set forth in the table in Subsection 7, "Trench Width," for the size of pipe being installed. No backfill outside of the specified maximum trench widths will be measured for payment. 94421.002:03150 SCb-4 The Contractor may slope or bench the trench sidewalls when necessary due to soils conditions to maintain a safe trench condition and conform to OSHA requirements. Such sloping or benching shall terminate at a depth not lower than one foot above the top of the pipe barrel, and from that point down, the trench wall shall be vertical. The trenching operation, including the spoil bank and sloping of the trench sidewalls shall be confined to the width of the permanent and temporary rights-of-way, if any. The Contractor shall provide a design for sloping or benching by a registered professional engineer for trenches over 20 feet in depth. A clear area shall be maintained a sufficient distance back from the top edge of the excavation to avoid overloading which may cause slides or caving of the trench walls. The excavated material shall be kept trimmed in such a manner as to be of as little inconvenience as possible to the public and adjoining property owners. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all public thoroughfares and crossroads shall be kept open to traffic. When authorized by the Engineer at street crossings, sidewalks and other points considered necessary, the trenches shall be bridged in a safe manner so as to prevent serious interruption of travel and to provide access to fire hydrants and public and private premises. 9. TRENCH DEPTH: The trenches shall be excavated to such depths that the pipeline can be laid at the elevation of the grade lines shown on the Drawings, or at depths or covers specified on the Drawings or as specified in the pipeline installation specification. a. Ductile -iron pipe and reinforced concrete pipe (ASTM C 76 and C 361). Unless required otherwise on the Trench Detail drawing, the trench shall be excavated to the depth required to install the pipe barrel on firm, undisturbed soil. With the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may over excavate the trench by a depth of 4 inches and the trench bottom brought to the pipe invert with granular bedding material. For areas where large boulder or rock excavation is required, the trench shall be over excavated approximately 6 inches and the trench bottom brought to the pipe invert with squeegee material. b. All other pipe materials. The pipe trench shall be excavated to at least a depth of 4 inches below the bottom of the pipe, backfilled with the specified roadbase bedding material and compacted to the requirements of this Specification. 10. EXISTING ROAD GRAVEL SURFACING: The gravel surfacing that is removed, disturbed, and/or contaminated during trench excavation shall be replaced to not less than 6 inches compacted depth. Replacement of road gravel surfacing shall be in accordance with this Specification. 11. TRENCH PREPARATION: The trench shall be excavated only so far in advance of pipe laying as permitted by the Engineer. The trench wall shall be so braced that the workmen may work safely and efficiently. All trenches shall be drained so that pipe laying may take place in unwatered conditions. Trench preparation shall also conform to the details shown on the Drawings. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCb-5 Trenches above a point 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall be of such extra width, when required, as will permit the convenient placing of timber supports, sheeting and bracing, and the handling of special units as necessary. Bell holes in the trench bottom shall be provided at each joint to permit the jointing to be made properly and to prevent the pipe from bearing on the bells. After excavation, the trench bottom shall be uniformly graded and hand -shaped so that the pipe barrel (exclusive of the joint) will have uniform and continuous bearing on firm. undisturbed trench bottom (when permitted). or compacted. specified granular bedding throughout the length of the pipe. The trench grade shall permit the pipe spigot to be accurately centered in the preceding -laid pipe joint, without lifting the pipe above the grade and without exceeding the permissible joint deflection. If it is necessary to raise the pipe subgrade. approved. compacted granular bedding; material shallbe used at the Contractor's cost. If unstable foundation is encountered, the Contractor shall excavate the unstable material and backfill the overexcavation with 11/ -inch uniformly -graded, crushed rock concrete aggregate. The overexcavation for unstable bedding and supplying and installing of crushed rock concrete aggregate will be paid for as set forth in this Specification and in the Proposal. 12. SHORING: As needed, all trench sidewalls shall be properly sheeted and braced to meet Federal, State and local laws in regard to safe working conditions. The shoring shall be arranged so as not to place any stress on portions of the completed work until the general construction thereof has proceeded far enough to provide ample strength. Any damage to pipes or structures resulting from settlements, heaving, water or earth pressures, slides, caving, or other causes, due to lack of shoring, sheeting, or bracing, or due to failure of shoring, or due to improper shoring, or due to any other negligence on the part of the Contractor, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. Shoring shall be removed as the work progresses, unless left in place by written order of the Engineer. The Contractor will be paid for shoring so ordered left in place on the basis of invoice material cost only. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point the trench walls are not properly supported to protect the work, he may order the placement of additional supports by, and at the expense of, the Contractor. Compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibilities for the safety of the work. 13. BLASTING: In general, excavation blasting will be permitted for portions of the work which may be expedited thereby and for which a permit is granted by the municipal authority having jurisdiction. The governmental authority having jurisdiction shall have the right to limit the use of explosives or to order the discontinuance of any blasting methods which, in their opinion, may endanger any part of any public or private property, the safety of inhabitants of the area or the traveling public. 94.021.002:03150 SCb-6 The Contractor shall enlist the services of an experienced explosives engineer for advice on blasting methods and protection of existing structures and facilities. Blasting shall be performed in such manner that no damage will result to any building, structure, pipeline, utilities, or facility on or off the site of the work, or above or below ground. Any damage suffered as a result of blasting shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. Blasting shall be done in such manner that the rock is not loosened or disturbed below the pipe foundation. Unless authorized by the Engineer, blasting in a trench shall not be done until the trench walls have been shored or braced in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 14. REMOVAL OF WATER: The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times ample means and devices with which to remove promptly and to properly dispose of all water entering the trench excavation. Water shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property or without being a menace to public health and convenience. No water shall be drained into work built or under construction without prior consent of the Engineer. Dewatering shall be accomplished by well points, sumping, or any other acceptable method which will insure an unwatered trench to a sufficient depth below trench bottom, so that the Contractor's operations will not disturb the trench bottom. Any dewatering method shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Dewatering by overexcavation and installation of crushed rock shall not be paid as rock used for trench stabilization. 15. BEDDING AND BACKFILLING: a. Trench, Zonel. For the purposes of this Specification, the terms "Bedding Zone," "Pipe Zone" and "Backfill Zone" shall refer to the trench zones identified on the Pipe Trench Details shown on the Drawings and at the end of this section. (1) Bedding zone. The Bedding Zone shall consist of all material placed below the pipe invert or, when permitted, the native materials graded and prepared for direct placement of the pipe. (2) Pipe zone. The Pipe Zone shall consist of all material placed above the pipe invert to an elevation shown on the details. (3) Backfill zone. The Backfill Zone shall consist of all material above the Pipe Zone. b. Material. All bedding and backfill material shall have the approval of the Engineer and shall be included in the unit price for the pipe unless otherwise specified and indicated in 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S*02I.002;03I50 SCb-7 the Proposal. Al! bedding and backfill material shall be free of frozen material, organic material and debris. The materials to be used in each trench zone are indicated on the Pipe Trench Details shown on the Drawings and these materials are described below. All materials may be subject to gradation tests and compaction tests prior to approval of the use of that material. The test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and verified as to their accuracy. The cost of these tests shall be borne by the Contractor. (1) sand and shall conform to the following limits when tested as material shall be lean, well -graded laboratory sieves: by ears of laboratory d Sand Total Percent aigvglitsPa^ ssin Wei ht %-inch NQ 4 100 Ng 8 70 - 100 Ng 16 36 - 93 NQ 30 20 - 80 NQ 50 8-65 NQ 100 2 - 30 Ng 200 1-10 0-3 (2) Roadbase bedding material or roadbase backfill. This material shall be Class 6 aggregate base course as specified by the State of Colorado Department of Highways; and shall meet the following gradation: Total Percent Sieve Size'assin Weight 3/4 -inch Ngo 100 Ng8 30-65 NQ 200 20 - 55 3-12 (3) Squeegee Sand. This material shall be clean, well graded and conform to the following limits when tested by means of laboratory sieves: Total Percent Sieve Size Passing by Weight 3/8 -inch 100 Ng 200 0-5 (4) Granular bedding or granular backfill material. This material shall be imported crushed rock or angular surfaced gravel and meet the following gradation (ASTM D448, Ng 67): 1 SCb-8 1 Total Percent Sieve Size Passing by Weight 1 -inch 100 34 -inch 90-100 3/e -inch 20-55 N° 4 0-10 NQ 8 0-5 (5) Select material. Select material shall not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer. This material shall consist of suitable material screened from the excavated earth having no rocks or stones greater in size than 2 inches for DIP or RCP and 3a -inch for all other pipe. When specified and acceptable select material (suitable for placement within 12 inches of the pipe barrel) is not available at any particular location, the Contractor shall screen out rocks and stones larger than permitted or shall provide acceptable screened material from excavations at other locations of the work under this Contract. No extra cost will be paid for moving and handling of this select backfill material. If sufficient material is not reasonably available, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. If the Engineer agrees, he will locate a source of suitable material. Payment for this material shall be made according to the provisions contained in "Payment for Bedding and Backfill" of this Specification.. (6) Trench stabilization material. This material shall be crushed rock, concrete aggregate and shall meet the requirements listed in Paragraph 12, "Trench Preparation." (7) Flowable fill. Flowable fill shall meet the following requirements and shall be used for trench backfill whenever specified in the Contract Documents, Drawings or by the Engineer, or as a groundwater barrier. Ingredients Lbs./C,Y. Cement 50 Coarse Aggregate 1700 (AASHTO N2 57 or 67) Fine Aggregate 1845 (AASHTO M 6) Water (39 Gallons) 325 (or as needed) The amount of water shall be such that the flowable fill flows into place properly without excessive segregation. Approximately 39 gallons of water per cubic yard of flowable fill is normally needed. 44-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCb-9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Contractor may use aggregate which does not meet the above specifications if the cement is increased to 100 pounds per cubic yard (lbs./C.Y.) and the aggregate conforms to the following gradation: Sieve Size % Passing 1 inch (25.0 mm) 100 N2 200 0-10 The Contractor may substitute 30 lbs.IC.Y. of cement and 30 lbs./C.Y. of fly ash for 50 lbs./C.Y. of cement or may substitute 60 lbs./C.Y. of cement and 60 lbs./C. Y. of fly ash for 100 lbs./C.Y. of cement. The Engineer reserves the right to review the use of recycled broken glass (glass cullet) as part or all of the aggregate. Proposed mix design must be submitted in accordance with Item 5 of the General Conditions. Compaction of flowable fill is not required. The maximum layer thickness for flowable fill shall be three feet. Additional layers shall not be placed until the flowable fill has lost sufficient moisture to be walked on without indenting more than two inches. Any damage resulting from placing flowable fill in layers that are too thick or from not allowing sufficient time between placement of layers shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. (8) Backfill material. Backfill material shall consist of suitable material from the excavated earth, meeting all the requirements of this Specification. No boulders over 6 inches in any dimension shall be allowed in the top 12 inches of the trench. All boulders shall be carefully placed so that no damage will be done to the pipeline. No backfill material shall have boulders larger than 24 inches in any dimension. Boulders larger than 8 inches in any dimension shall be carefully lowered into the trench until the backfill is 4 feet over the top of the pipe. c. $edding and Backfill installation: 94-021.002;03150 (1) General. Unless accurate results cannot be obtained, the compaction requirements shall conform to maximum dry density according to ASTM D698, Moisture -Density Relations of Soils (Standard Proctor). When the ASTM D698 test is not applicable, the percentage compaction requirements shall conform to ASTM D2049, Test for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate backfilled trenches for the purpose of performing compaction tests at locations and depths required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for reinstalling and compacting the test excavations at no additional cost to the Owner. SCb-10 (2) Bedding zone installation. Bedding material shall consist of the material on which the pipe is placed in accordance with the Pipe Trench Details. Bedding material shall be placed to the required elevation of the pipe invert. Tamping equipment shall be used to thoroughly tamp the bedding material to a minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density or to 75 percent relative density. The moisture content of the material shall be within 2 percent of optimum. (3) Pipe zone installation. After bedding material has been placed and approved and after the pipe has been installed and approved, the pipe zone backfill shall be installed to an elevation shown on the details on the drawings. The backfill material shall be as specified on the details and shall be placed and compacted in distinct, separate lifts not to exceed 6 inches of loose depth; except that the first loose lift shall not be higher than the pipe centerline (springline). If select backfill materials are permitted in this zone but acceptable select backfill material (suitable for placement within 12 inches of the pipe barrel) is not available at any particular location, the Contractor shall use imported granular backfill material. Compaction shall meet the requirements of "Bedding Zone Installation," utilizing T -bars or mechanical tamping equipment. (4) backfill zone installation. Unless otherwise provided in the Special Construction Provisions, the following method of installation shall apply. After the pipe zone backfill has been placed and approved, the trench shall be backfilled. All backfill above the pipe zone backfill shall be carefully placed in the trench in lifts no greater than 2 feet. Each lift shall be compacted by mechanical equipment to 90 percent of laboratory dry density. After the trench is backfilled to the ground surface a loaded dump truck or loader placed in the trench line shall compact the backfill by its wheel load. No less than two passes shall be made. If the backfill is depressed below the finished grade elevation, the depressed area shall be refilled and compacted. The backfill shall be mounded higher than the adjacent ground to allow for settlement. (5) Backfill zone installation in roads and streets. Beneath all traveled way -in roads and streets, highway shoulders and within 15 feet of pavement in State Highway Department rights-of-way, unless otherwise specified on the plans, backfill shall be carefully placed and compacted up to the limit of base course material or w gravel. Compaction shall be by mechanical tamping in 8 -inch maximum loose lifts using mechanical or hand tampers, weighing not less than 20 pounds, or vibratory rollers. All other means must be approved in writing by the Engineer. All backfill shall be compacted to 95 % of maximum laboratory dry density or 70 percent relative density. The material shall be within 2.0 percent of optimum moisture content. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCb-11 The Contractor may request approval of alternate means of compaction. Such request must be submitted to the Engineer in writing. Approval of the compaction method will be made by the Engineer only in writing. Use of specified or approved compaction methods does not relieve the Contractor from providing a completed project meeting the intent of this Specification. d. payn ept For Bedding And Backfill. Unless specifically excepted in this Paragraph, all costs for furnishing, processing, installing and preparing all bedding and backfill shall be included in the unit price for pipelines. (1) Bedding for ductile -iron pipe and reinforced concrete pipe (ASTM C 76 and C 361). When the use of imported material is requested by the Contractor, the cost to furnish and install granular bedding material shall be included in the unit price to furnish and install the pipe. The cost to prepare the bedding to receive the pipe shall also be included in the unit price for the pipe. When overexcavation is authorized by the Engineer for rock excavation, payment for granular bedding material shall be included in the unit price for rock excavation, within the specified limits. (2) Trench stabilization material. When required due to unstable trench conditions and when authorized by the Engineer, separate payment will be made for this material as set forth in the Proposal. (3) Select backfill. When specified for installation and sufficient materials are not reasonably available from trench excavation for select backfill, the Owner will purchase acceptable material and the Contractor shall haul the material to the point of use. If the haul distance is greater than one-half mile, the hauling shall be paid for as extra work for the distance in excess of one-half mile. (4) Backfill. Unless otherwise listed in the Proposal, the cost to furnish, handle and install backfill shall be included in the unit price for installing pipe. e. MVlainienance of Backfill. All backfill shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition and all places showing signs of settlement shall be filled and maintained during the life of the Contract and for a period of one year following the date of final acceptance of all work performed under the Contract. When the Contractor discovers or is notified by the Engineer or the Owner that any backfill is not in compliance with the provisions of this Contract, the Contractor shall correct such condition at once. Any utilities and road surfacing damaged by such settlement shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost to the Owner of all claims for damages filed with the Court and actions brought against the said Owner for, and on account of, such damage. 94-021.002:03150 1 SCb-12 1 16. RIPRAP a. Rock. The color of the riprap must be approved by the Engineer. Once approved, the color shall be kept consistent throughout the project. All stone shall be angular, each piece having its greatest dimensions not greater than 3 times its least dimensions and shall conform to the following test requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standards: Apparent specific gravity, minimum Abrasion, maximum percent Freeze thaw loss, maximum percent after 12 cycles Requirement 2.60 45 10 ASTM Standard C-127-59 C-535-65 AASHTO 103 Procedure A Concrete masonry or concrete pavement may not be used for riprap. The gradation requirements for ordinary riprap shall be as follows (approximate weight assumes spherical shape which more closely approximates the weight of the individual stone): CLASSIFICATION AND GRADATION OF ORDINARY RIPRAP Approximate' % Smaller Than Intermediate Rock Min -Rock Riprap Given Size Dimension Weight dm` Designation Dy Weight (Inches) (Pounds) finches) Type M 70-100 21 455 50-70 18 287 35-50 12 85 12 2-10 4 3 1 Based on Specific Gravity = 2.60 *d30 = Mean particle size Excavate for placement of rock riprap lining as indicated. Remove all soft, yielding material; replace with suitable on-site material; compact to smooth firm surface. Machine -place stones into position following details indicated. Arrange as necessary by use of gradall or multi -prong grapple device or hand to interlock and form a substantial bond. Dumping and/or backhoe placement alone is not sufficient to ensure proper interlocked placement. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCb-13 Basic procedure will result in materials that are dS0 and larger flush to the top surface with faces and shapes matched to minimize voids. Surface grades will be a plane or as indicated, but projections above or depressions under the average surface plane more than 20% less of the rock layer thickness will not be allowed. The average surface plane is defined as the plane where 50% of the tops of rocks would contact. Voids will be filled with a well -graded mixture of the remaining material that is securely locked between the larger stone. It is essential that the material between stones not be loose or easily displaced by flow. The remaining stone will also be used to provide a subgrade that will arrive at a proper grade for the surface stone. The stone will be consolidated by the bucket of backhoe or other means that will cause interlocking of the material. The stream side of the riprap is to be uniform and free from bulges, humps, or cavities. All rock is to be placed in a dewatered condition beginning at the toe of the slope or other lowest point. b. Bedding. Use porous, free -draining material, consisting of sand, gravel, crushed stone or other approved free -draining material. On-site materials shall be used if available when approved by the Engineer. Imported materials shall be used if no on-site materials are available. All materials shall meet the following gradation requirements: 94.021.002:03150 GRANULAR BEDDING GRADATION U.S. Standard Percent by Weight Passing Square Sieve Size Mesh Sieves Type I Type II 3 inch 100 11/ -inch 34 -inch 20-90 %-inch 100 N2 4 95-100 0-20 N2 16 45-80 N2 50 10-30 Ng 100 2-10 Na 200 0-2 0-3 For in-situ fine grained soils a layer of Type II bedding shall be placed on top of a layer of Type I bedding. For in-situ coarse grained soils only a layer of Type II bedding is required. At the Contractor's option, a 12 -inch layer of Type II bedding may be substituted for the combination layer of Type I and Type II bedding over in-situ fine grained soils. Bedding thicknesses shall be as follows: Riprap Type M SCb-14 Minimum Bedding Thickness (Inches) Coarse Fine Grained Soils Grained Soils* Type I Type It Total Type II 4 4 8 6 '50% or more by weight retained on the #40 sieve. 17. SURFACE RESTORATION: a. General. Where pavement, curb and gutter, sidewalks, or other improved surfaces have been removed or damaged during the course of the work, such items shall be restored to a condition equal to that prior to removal, to the same elevation and alignment. The subgrade for all restored surfaces shall be thoroughly compacted by mechanical or hand tampers, weighing not less than 20 pounds, or vibratory rollers, or by other proposed means of compaction acceptable to the Engineer. Base course shall be added for bituminous pavement. b. Road Gravel Surfacing. After the backfill has been approved by the Engineer, new gravel, where required, shall be placed to a 6 -inch minimum thickness. The gravel shall be compacted by a vibratory roller to the elevation of the undisturbed surface. The material shall be Class 6 aggregate base as specified by the Colorado Department of Highways. The cost of re -graveling shall be included in the price bid for constructing the pipelines. 18. BERM: The berm shall be constructed so that after compaction it will conform to the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown on the Drawings. Only suitable berm material obtained from excavations shall be placed in the berm. The material used shall be free from rubbish, or other material which might injure the watertightness and stability of the berm. The berm shall be constructed of material containing rocks no larger than 12 inches in greatest dimension, and the material shall not contain more than 30 percent of rocks by volume. Sufficient earth or other fine material developed in the excavations shall be incorporated with the rocks as it is deposited in order to fill the interstices and to provide a dense, solid berm. Frozen materials shall not be used in the construction of the berm, and fill material shall not be deposited on frozen ground. All rocks larger than 12 inches in greatest dimension shall be removed from the excavation and placed on the site at the location directed by the Engineer. Before commencing the placement of the first layer of fill for any berm, the stripped surface of the berm foundation shall be scarified and compacted in order to provide integration of the berm material with the foundation. 94421.002:03150 SCb-15 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the constructed berm and shall bear the expense of replacing any portions which have obvious localized leaks and any section that is displaced. Each layer of berm material shall be placed uniformly across the entire width of the fill. The Contractor shall utilize approved rollers for compaction. All fill shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture contents, ASTM Specification, Designation D698 (Standard Proctor). The berm material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8 inches in thickness and rolled, with not less than four passes per layer. Care shall be taken to distribute the movement of all compacting equipment over each layer of berm so that uniform compaction of the material is facilitated. Successive layers of berm shall not be placed until the layer under construction has been properly compacted. In the construction of the berm, the rate of placement of berm material shall be coordinated with the compaction and wetting operations so that the required density in the berm is obtained. 19. FINISH D1 ADING AND CLEANUP: The Contractor shall final grade the trench line to a smooth grade to effect a neat and workmanlike appearance of the trench line. Boulders which cannot be placed in the trench backfill shall be collected and hauled to the new plant site, at a location directed by the Engineer. Rubbish, and construction debris if any, shall be hauled away to a licensed dump site location, off the easements and rights-of-way for this project. Alternately, the Contractor may haul this material to private property upon approval of the Owner of that property and the Engineer. Roadway surfaces shall be repaired as required by the Specifications, the Drawings, and/or the "Special Construction Provisions." All tools, equipment of the work, barricades and temporary structures shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. The construction site shall be left clean, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 94-021.002:03150 S Da -1 SPECIFICATION Da GENERAL EOUIPMENT PROVISIONS I . SCOPE OF WORK: These General Equipment Provisions, which apply to all systems and equipment, are hereby made a part of each and all of the separate Sections of this Specification. Contractor shall direct the attention of all Subcontractors and suppliers of mechanical and related appurtenances for the work to the provisions of the Contract Documents and this Specification. 2. MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIEN?E: Unless specifically named in the detailed specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has demonstrated successful operation and is in regular use. Each manufacturer shall be represented by a local (Colorado) firm. 3. STANDARD OF QUALITY: Items of equipment are specified by the name of a manufacturer for the purpose of establ ishing a standard ofquality and acceptable experience. Substitute equipment will be acceptable if it can be demonstrated to the Engineer that the substitute is in strict accordance with the Specifications and equal in quality, type, function, efficiency, and standard of design to those models specifically named. Manufacturers specified have been determined by the Engineer to be capable of meeting or exceeding the minimum acceptable standard for the designated equipment style and model. Only one brand, kind, or make of material or equipment shall be used for each specific purpose throughout the work notwithstanding that similar material or equipment of two or more manufacturers may be specified for the same purpose. All materials and equipment incorporated in the Work shall be new unless otherwise specified. Materials and equipment not covered by detailed requirements in the Contract Documents shall be of the best commercial quality, suitable for the purpose intended, and approved by the Engineer prior to use in the Work. Where materials or equipment are referred to in the singular number, it is intended unless otherwise limited that such references shall be applied to as much material or equipment as is required to complete the Work. 4. ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT: Equipment which requires alteration of other equipment or structures will be considered only if the Contractor assumes all responsibility for making and coordinating all necessary alterations. Engineer approval of all revisions to structures, mechanical, electrical, or other work made necessary by such substitution shall be obtained and the cost of said revisions, including cost of redesign, shall be made at the Contractor's expense. a. Horsepower Ratings specified or shown for the proposed equipment are in accordance with the best information available to the Engineer. In the event any equipment item proposed by the Contractor should require motors with larger horsepower rating than indicated on Electrical Drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the proper control equipment, required modifications to motor control centers, starting equipment, feeder and branch circu its, and accessories as required to make the installation comply with the electrical code and to prevent excessive voltage drop without added cost to the Owner. 94-021.002:03150 SDa-2 b. Equipment. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials and equipment to be furnished fit the space available, and shall make the necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections. Where equipment to be furnished is installed in an existing enclosure or adjacent to existing equipment, the Contractor shall field check the dimensions ofexisting equipment, location ofcondu its, etc., and shall familiarize himself with all existing conditions and difficulties to be encountered in performing such work. c. Operating A Ititude. All equipment must have a specified capacity, efficiencies, and operating characteristics at 6,200 feet above Sea Level Datum. 5. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES: The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work. In addition to the general guarantee requirements, equipment guarantee shall cover (1) faulty or inadequate design; (2) im proper assembly or fabrication; (3) defective workmanship or materials; and (4) leakage, breakage, or other failure. It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility to ascertain the conditions and service under which the equipment will operate and to warrant that operation under those conditions shall be successful. For equipment bearinga manufacturer's warranty in excess of one year, furnish a copy of the warranty to Owner with Owner named as beneficiary. Any defects or failure within the guarantee period shall immediately be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. 6. SUBMITTALS: Contractor shall examine the details and data on each submittal to assure that it complies with the requirements of the specifications. Submittals received by the Engineer without Contractor review acknowledgement will be rejected and returned immediately. Any approval by the Engineer of submitted data shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of supplying equipment properly designed and manufactured to produce the quality, efficiency, and capability specified or implied. a. Storage and Installation instructions. Submit manufacturer's storage and installation instructions to the Engineer for approval prior to delivery of the equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for following the manufacturer's installation and storage instructions, as approved by the Engineer, including the rotation of idle pumps and motors and all other items, until acceptance by the Owner. No equipment shall be delivered unless such instructions have been approved by the Engineer. b. Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise specified or directed, submit shop drawings for all mechanical equipment specified. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in complete sets indexed by Specification paragraph and Drawing number describing the various equipment items or systems. An anchor bolt template shall be shown on the shop drawings and shall be furnished unless waived in writing by the Engineer. c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Prepare and submit required manuals covering all mechanical equipment and machinery. d. Manufacturers' Certified Reports. Each major equipment manufacturer, or his authorized representative, shall submit a written report with respect to his equipment certifying that: 94-02 .00213150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SDa-3 (1) the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated under his supervision, (2) the equipment is in accurate alignment, (3) he was present when the equipment was placed in operation, (4) the equipment has been operated and inspected under full load conditions and operated satisfactorily, (5) he is fully covered under the terms of the guarantee. 7. PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: Box, crate, or otherwise enclose and protect equipment during shipment, handling, storage, and following installation so as to ensure the preservation of the required quality and fitness of all materials and equipment until final acceptance of the project. Keep equipment dry and covered from exposure to weather. Store pumps, motors, electrical equipment, controls, insulation, and equipment having anti -friction or sleeve bearings in weather -tight storage facilities. Lift Targe equipment items only at the points designated by manufacturer. Protect factory painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repair damage as directed and approved. 8. ,JOB CONDITIONS: Drawings are diagrammatic and show the intended arrangement of principal apparatus, piping, and appurtenances. Conform to Drawings as closely as possible and exercise care to secure approved headroom and space conditions, neat arrangement of piping, valves, hangers, and like items, and to overcome structural interferences. Submit written detai Is and reasons for proposed deviations from Drawings and Specifications, and do not deviate therefrom unless authorized by the Engineer. If approved changes require alteration of structures or related work, make such alterations as approved in advance by Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 9. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: All parts of the equipment shall be amply proportioned for all stresses that may occur during fabrication, erection, and intermittent or continuous operation. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best modem engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. Submerged fasteners shall be SS. 10. LUBRICATION: Provide and install lubricants of types recommended by equipment manufacturers to properly place equipment into operation. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment with the same type of pressure grease -gun fittings, provide a separate, lever operated grease gun for each type of grease required. Lubrication of equipment shall insure constant presence of lubricant on all wearing surfaces. Lubricant fill and drain openings shall be readily accessible. 94-021.002:03150 SDa-4 l I . ANCHORS AND SLEEVES: Provide anchor bolts of length to allow for 1''h inches of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural concrete. Other specifically detailed lengths either shown or specified will supersede this requirements. Provide sleeves of at least 11/2 times anchor bolt diameter and of the same material as the anchor bolts. Anchor bolts shall be Hot dip galvanized or cadmium plated steel for dry interior locations. For exterior or wet locations use anchor bolts of Stainless Steel Type 304 which conforms to ASTM A-167 and ASTM A-267. 12. SAFETY GUARDS: Belts, chain drives, projecting setscrews, keys, fan blades, couplings, exposed shafts and other moving or rotating parts located so that a person could come in contact therewith shall be enclosed or properly guarded on all sides with safety guards conforming to all Federal, State, and local codes and regulations pertaining; conform to the most restrictive requirements. Use corrosion -resistant materials at least equivalent to hot -dip galvanized steel, 16 USS gage or heavier, or %:-inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Design guards for easy installation and removal. Provide necessary supports, accessories, and fasteners, of hot -dip galvanized steel or stainless steel. Design guards in outdoor locations to prevent entrance of rain and dripping water. 13. DRIVE UNITS: Provide drive units designed with an AGMA rating and service factor suitable for continuous duty service under operating load, constructed to preclude oil leakage around shafts. Thermal rating of each unit shall exceed the design load or proper cooling devices shall be provided. All drives shall be designed especially for the service for which they are to operate. 14. NAMEPLATES AND DATA PLATES: Provide nameplates of ample size with embossed lettering, fastened to the equipment in a prominent place with corrosion -resisting pins. On nameplates, display manufacturer, serial number, date of manufacture, model number and essential operating characteristics. 15. PAINTING: Conform applicable requirements of"Painting and Coatings" and following requirements unless modified or superseded under other Sections. 16. COORDINATION: a. The Drawings show in a diagrammatic form the arrangements desired for the principle apparatus, piping, and similar appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment must be exercised in carrying out the work to secure the best possible headroom and space conditions throughout, to secure neat arrangement of piping, valves, fixtures, hangers, and similar appurtenances, and to overcome local difficulties and interferences of structural conditions wherever encountered. b. The Contractor shall take all measurements for his work at the installation sites, verify all subcontractor drawings and be responsible for the proper installation, within the available space of the apparatus specified and shown on the Drawings and must secure the approval of the Engineer for any variations before making any changes. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SDa-5 c. Inspect each item of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing. Inspect previously installed related work and verify that it is ready for installation of equipment. 17. INSTALLATION: a. Equipment. Manufacturer's details and instructions shall be followed in the installation. Employ skilled craftsmen experienced in installation ofthe types of equipment specified. Use specialized tools and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, dial indicators, gages, and micrometers, as applicable to produce installations free ofvibration, in proper alignment, and free of defects. b. Anchor Bolts. Deliver bolts with templates or setting drawings and verify that bolts are correctly located before structural concrete is placed. Use double nut with cut washers for level and plumb. All anchor bolts shall be SS. c. Base and Bedplate Grouting. Do not place grout until initial fitting and alignment of connected piping is completed. Level and align equipment of the concrete foundations, then entirely fill the space under base or bedplates with non -shrink grout. Bevel exposed grout at 45 degree angle, except round exposed grout at horizontal surfaces for drainage. Trowel or point exposed grout to a smooth dense finish and damp cure with burlap for three days. When grout is fully hardened tighten nuts on anchor bolts. Check the installation for alignment and level, and perform approved corrective work as required to conform to the tolerances given in the applicable manufacturer's instructions. 18. FIELD OUALITY CONTROL: a. General. All costs for performing operational demonstrations and system tests shall be included in the Contract Price, and no extra payment will be made to the Contractor costs required to perform and complete the demonstrations and validation tests. Requirements specified herein are in addition to the demonstration and test requirements specified under other Sections of these Specifications. All testing shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the submitted and approved procedure plans to demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction that all components are fully completed and operable; and that all systems operate with the efficiency, repeatability, and accuracy indicated and specified. Test schedules shall be established to allow continuous inspection by the Engineer. b. Operational Demonstrations. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the performance of installed equipment complies with all requirements ind icated and specified. The Contractor and each respective equipment manufacturers representative shall operate each equipment item through entire no-load to full -load range in accordance with the approved procedure for not less than 24 consecutive hours. Operate variable speed equipment to cycle through the applicable speed range at a steady rate of change. Induce simulated alarm and distressed operating conditions to test controls and protective devices for correct operation in adjusting system functions or causing system shutdown. 94.021.002:03150 SDa-6 19. MOTORS: Except where modified by a specific technical specification, all motors shall meet the following standards. Electrical motors furnished under this contract shall be designed to meet load and operating conditions under which they will be used. Fractional horsepower motors shall have a service factor of L25; motors of 1 -horsepower, or more, shall have a service factor of 1.15. The motor shall be rated at an elevation of 6,200 feet. Motor nameplate volts shall be in accordance with voltages specified on Drawings and stated in the Specifications and shall be designed to operate successfully at a rated load with a voltage variation of 10 percent plus or minus. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Motors shall be designed to operate successfully carrying rated loads when supplied a rated voltage at a frequency of 60 cycles plus or minus 5 percent. Motors shall be designed for continuous duty as defined by NEMA -MG -1 unless otherwise specified. Motors shall operate satisfactorily at the specified altitude, at an ambient temperature of 40°C. Motors furnished under this Contract shall be of such rating that temperatures specified by NEMA MG 1-12.42 will not be exceeded. Motors shall be of the premium efficient type; Reliance XE or approved equal. The motor manufacturer shall furnish, for installation by the Contractor, power factor correction capacitors for all motors 20 Hp and larger with a rated nameplate power factor of less than 95 percent. All motors requiring correction shall be corrected to at least 95 percent under nameplate conditions. Power factor correction equipment shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the proposed location, and units shall be sized for switching with the motor. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S Db- 1 SPECIFICATION Db PUMPS 1 SCOPE OF WORK: This Specification covers furnishing and installing all pumps. The functional name, type and number of the pumps covered by this Specification are as follows: a. RAS b. WAS c. Scum d. Chlorine Metering Submersible, non -clog Submersible, non -clog Submersible, non -clog Diaphragm, electrically actuated 1 required 1 required 1 required (1 reserve) 1 required (1 reserve) 2. GENERAL: The Contractor shall submit certified performance curves for all pumps. The curves shall be developed for the individual pump and must include overall efficiencies. The curves shall show a flow capacity range from 0 to 125 percent of the maximum specified flow. The Contractor shall submit the following on all pumps except sump pumps: a. Motor horsepower for maximum load condition at 6,200 elevation b. Shaft sizes c. Power factor at design load d. Motor efficiency at design load e. Wire to water efficiency at design load f. Shut off head in feet g. Safety factor of drive system All pumps shall include the motor, drive mechanism, base plates and frames, OSHA required guards, suction and discharge fittings and all other parts and fittings required to place the pump in operation. Pumps on lines without check valves shall be designed such that no damage will occur in the event of backflow through the pump. All pumps of a given type shall be of the same manufacturer. All sheaves and pulleys shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Couplings or V -belt drives shall have a safety factor of at least 1.25. All belts shall be supplied in matched sets and a spare set of belts shall be provided for each pump requiring them. 3. SLUDWACUM PUMPS: The pumps shall be submersible type with enclosed impeller, non -clog wastewater pumps capable of pumping unscreened nitrification sludge. The pumps shall be supplied with a 2 Hp submersible electric motors, close coupled volute, cast-iron discharge elbow, guide bar and brackets, power cable and accessories. 9440121.00200:03150 S Db -2 1 1 The Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) and scum pumps shall be Flygt Model CP 3067 with a ' 267 impeller, or approved equal and shall have the following operating characteristics: Normal Operating Head, feet 35 RPM 3600 Normal Operating Flow Rate, GPM 50 Discharge, inches 21/2 The Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump shall be Flygt Model DP -3067 with a 474 impeller, or approved equal and shall have the following characteristics: Normal Operating Head, feet 15 RPM 1800 Normal Operating Flow Rate, GPM 50 Discharge, inches 21 a. Major pump components shall be grey cast-iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30, with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes or other irregularities. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 304 stainless steel or brass construction. All exterior metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumpage, other than stainless steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of alkyd primer and a chlorinated rubber paint finish. b. All O -rings shall be of Nitrile Rubber. The lifting handle shall be AISI type 304 stainless steel. Cast-iron impellers shall be sprayed with primer. Pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft shall rotate on two single row ball bearings. The pump shaft is an extension of the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The shaft shall rotate on two permanently lubricated ball bearings. The shaft shall be of 304 stainless steel. c. The motor shall be a 2 Hp, 3 Phase, 60 Cycle, 460 Volt, 1750 RPM, induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled watertight chamber, NEMA B type. Thermal switches set to open at 260°F shall be embedded in the stator lead coils to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection. The stator windings and stator leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise at rated horsepower. Motor bearings shall be permanently grease lubricated. The calculated 810 bearing life rating shall be not less than 18,000 hours. d. The pump lifting system shall be the Flygt-Lift system, or approved equal. The system shall consist of 10 meters (33 ft.) nylon line, short length of high tensile strength proof -tested chain and forged steel Grip -Eye for use with mechanical lifting device. System shall be appropriately sized for the weight of the pump. The pump lifting system shall include a stainless steel upper guide bar bracket for the pump. The guide rail pipes shall be 2 -inch SCH 40 galvanized steel. These pipes are to be furnished by the installing contractor (not the pump manufacturer) and cut to the required length in the 94-021.00200:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SDb-3 field. Two pipes are required for the pump to act as guide rails. A safety chain hook for the pump shall be furnished. Four anchor bolts for the discharge connection shall be furnished. The size and length of the anchor bolts shall be determined by the pump manufacturer. The material of construction shall be stainless steel. e. After installation of the pumping equipment and when water is available, the unit shall be given a running test during which it shall demonstrate its ability to operate without vibration or overheating and to pump satisfactorily. During the tests, observations shall be made of head, capacity, and motor input to detect any defects in the equipment. All defects or defective equipment revealed by or noted during the test shall be corrected or replaced promptly at the expense of the Contractor, and if necessary, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. In case the Contractor is unable to demonstrate to the satisfactorily perform the service required and that they will operate free from vibration and heating, the unit may be rejected. The Contractor shall then remove and replace the equipment at no additional expense to the Owner. The pump and motor manufacturer shall warranty the units against defects in the workmanship and material for a period of five years or 10,000 hours for both parts and labor at a prorated basis. 4. CHEMICAL FEED PUMPS: Shall be of the positive displacement, electrically actuated diaphragm type have a maximum capacity of 0.58 gallon per hour. The pump shall be suitable for accurately feeding a sodium hypochlorite solution (up to 15 %NaOCI) into a water stream having a maximum pressure of 250 psig. Both stroking rate and stroke depth shall be adjustable. An HOA selector switch shall be provided and the pump shall accept a 4-20 maDC signal for remote automatic -mode pacing. Pump shall be for 120 VAC power and have an integral circuit breaker. Peak input power shall be 300 watts. Connections shall be for 3/e" ID x 1" O.D. polyethylene tubing. The metering pump shall be similar and equal to the Series A, Model A941 35151, electronic metering pump manufactured by Liquid Metronics, Inc. Provide the pump with accessories as follows: bleed valve assembly; suction tube with foot valve, pressure relief valve with 250 psig relief setting; 100 ml calibration column; repair kit with replacement diaphragm, O -rings, and ball valves. The pump assembly shall also include a universal heavy-duty ABS plastic wall mount bracket, to be installed by the Contractor at a location determined by the Engineer. All other accessories shall be provided by the pump manufacturer unless otherwise approved. 94-021.00200:03150 1 1 SPECIFICATION Dc AGITATORS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SDc-1 1. SCOPE OF WORK: This specification covers furnishing and installing the submerged turbine agitator as shown on the Drawings. Refer to Specification "General Equipment Provisions" for general equipment requirements. Painting shall be in accordance with Specification "Painting and Protective Coatings". 2. MECHANICAL: a. General. The agitator shall consist of a speed reducer, output shaft, impeller, motor, high speed coupling, and such method of distributing the air as may be required by the manufacturer if other than that shown on the Drawings. Gear -motor drives will not be permitted. The agitator shall operate at 0 - 150 scfm airflow without exceeding 90 percent of the motor nameplate horsepower. The agitator shall draw a minimum of 5 horsepower at any gas flow. Prior to shipment, a factory applied protective coating shall be applied to all gears, bearings, and exposed non -painted parts of the unit to provide protection for normal shipping and indoor storage of the units. The internals of the speed reducer must be sprayed with a rust preventative lubricant. b. $peed Reducer. The speed reducer shall be right angle design that can be serviced in place. The basic rating of the speed reducer shall bear an AGMA nameplate. The speed reducer shall be provided with lifting lugs. 94-021.002:031 50 Gearing shall be helical and spiral bevel throughout to insure highly efficient power transmission. The helical gears shall be through hardened. Case hardened helical gears are not acceptable. Work gears will not be permitted. The speed reducer shall be equipped with helical change gears removable without the use of wheel pullers. The change gears shall be such that they are accessible without dismantling the inner parts of the drive. All drive bearings shall be anti -friction type, oil or grease lubricated. All bearings must have a B-10 life greater than 100,000 hours; no sealed -for -life bearings will be permitted. Bearing rating calculations shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer. Grease lubricated bearings shall have easily accessible fittings. Lubrication of the speed reducer shall be by means of oil, with gears running in an oil bath to insure constant flow of oil to all gear surfaces. The speed reducer shall be equipped with readily accessible lubricant fill and drain openings, and a dipstick or visible indicator for checking the oil level. The drive shall be provided with an oil dam around the output shaft to provide positive protection against lubricant leakage along the impeller shaft. S Dc -2 The drive must be designed and rated in accordance with AGMA practice. The service factor must be suitable for a 24 hour/day load as recommended by AGMA 430.03. The minimum service factor shall be 1.70 based on the motor nameplate horsepower. The AGMA thermal rating must exceed the mechanical rating of the drive. c. Output Shaft. The shaft shall be not less than 3 -inches in diameter. The speed reducer output shaft shall be constructed and supported so that the shaft deflection caused by operating loads does not affect the alignment of the anti -friction bearings or cause misalignment of the gearing during mixer operation. When turned by hand, the impeller shaft runout or deflection shall not exceed 'A -inch per 10 -feet of length. The shaft and bearing assembly shall be designed to operate at or below 0.40 of the natural frequency of the system. Operation up to 0.80 of the natural frequency will be allowed, provided proper stabilizing devices are used. The impeller shaft shall be mounted on no more than two anti - friction type bearings. The impeller shaft bearings must be at least 25 inches above the liquid level. The shaft shall be extended through the impeller hub and transmit the torque through a hooked key and keyway. If low speed couplings are required, they shall be all welded rigid flanged couplings with a rabbeted fit. d. Impeller. A disc type impeller shall be supplied consisting of a disc, hub, and bolted or welded blades. The impeller shall be removable from the shaft for repositioning or replacement. The impeller shall be secured by means of a hooked key. Impellers requiring dynamic balancing will not be permitted. The impeller shall have 4 blades. The impeller shall have solidity of at least 85 percent. e. Motor. Drive motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan cooled type suitable for outdoor service with windings impregnated with a special moisture resistant compound. Motors shall be horizontal, premium efficiency, foot mounted type with normal starting torque. f. High Speed Coupling. The connection between the motor output shaft and the reducer input shall be by means of a flexible coupling. The coupling shall be similar and equal to a T.B. Woods Sureflex or Falk Type T. Rigidly connected motor and speed reducer will not be acceptable. 3. JNSTAJ.,LATION: The agitator shall be installed in a vertical position with propellers located at elevations shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall secure the service of the supplier for startup and operation procedures including proper maintenance and lubrication requirements. Painting may not be required if factory applied painting is in undamaged condition. 4. SPECIFIC CONDITIONS: Each agitator shall meet the specific conditions following. a. Plant Conditions. Minimum actual oxygen transfer Basin sidewater depth Basin dimensions Basin contents 94-021.002:03150 125 pounds per day 14' 8" 40' 0" x 22' 0" Raw effluent at 60°F 1 SDc-3 Residual DO level 1.0 mg/I Alpha ratio 0.85 Beta ratio 0.9 Air input 200 scfm Basin temperature 35°C b. Motor. Size 5 Hp Maximum speed 56 rpm Power supply 460 VAC, three phase c. Model The aeration basin agitators shall be LIGHTNIN model 504Q5C with 5 Hp TEFC motor and single 54" diameterA-320 impeller operating at 56 RPM, with 316 stainless steel wetted parts. The agitator used in the chlorine mixing basin shall be LIGHTNIN model XJQ65 with 0.65 Hp TEFC motor, 11/4" x 112" shaft and single 13.6" diameter high efficiency A 310 impeller operating at 350 RPM. The unit shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts. 94-021.002:03150 SDd-1 SPECIFICATION Dd BLOWERS SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing aeration blowers, accessories, and control panels with variable speed controllers for the aeration basin. It is the intent of this specification that the manufacturer of the blower select and furnish accessories, control panels, and variable speed controllers that are properly coordinated with the blowers provided. 2. GENERAL REOUIREMENTS: The Manufacturer shall submit the following information for the blowers: • Blower efficiency at all specified conditions and at both ends of the operating range. • Motor Horsepower • General dimension drawings The Manufacturer will be required to warrantee the blowers and all ancillary equipment work for a period of one year after the equipment is placed into service. 3. BLOWERS: Each of the blowers shall be of the positive displacement, rotary lobe, overhung drive type. Each blower shall be rated for 280 1CFM at a discharge pressure of 9.0 psig at the point of connection to process piping when operating at 3120 rpm and at a maximum BHP of 16.6. The blowers shall operate under ambient temperatures of 40° to 100°F and at a 6,200' site elevation. The blowers shall operate between 2400 and 3300 rpm. The blowers shall be factory assembled by the blower manufacturer and delivered with all accessories necessary for operation. Accessories shalt include an inlet filter/silencer, discharge silencer, pressure relief valve, non -return flap valve, flexible outlet connection, and no-load startup device. Each blower shall have a maximum operating sound level is 89 dB(A) at one meter in a free field. The blower casing shall be cast iron with ribs. Rotors and shafts shall be cast iron and be dynamically balanced. The timing gears shall be hardened and ground alloy steel. The shafts shall be aligned horizontally with respect to each other such that the lower portion of all bearings and gears run continuously submerged in an oil bath. Bearing shall have a minimum B-10 life of 40,000 hours. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple labyrinth type with atmospheric venting. The blowers and accessories shall be supported by vibration isolators suitable for anchoring to the concrete floor. The blowers shall be provided with the following spare parts: 1) one set of shaft seals, 2) one set of bearings, 3) two inlet filter media. The blowers shall be similar and equal to the Model 4MPSS as manufactured by Sutorbilt. 94-021.002:031S0 SDd-2 The blower shall be provided with a variable speed controller. Refer to Specification Electrical and Control. a. Discharge Check Valve shall have a flanged ANSI Class 125, cast iron body and shall positively prevent reverse air flow through the blower when the blower is not running. The valve internals shall be aluminum and the sealing member shall be silicone. The valve shall impose a maximum headloss of 0.05 psig at the rated capacity of the blower. b. Flexible Couplings/Expansion Joints shall be provided on the discharge side of the blower and shall positively isolate the blower from the piping system. The flexible couplings shall be of nylon reinforced rubber with steel retaining rings, be suitable for installation between ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges, and be suitable for operation at the temperatures developed at the discharge side of the blower. c. Inlet Filter shall be of the dry type and have a painted, welded steel housing. The filter shall be rated for at least 500 SCFM with a "clean filter" pressure drop of not more than two inches water column. The filter element shall be cleanable and replaceable and shall be pleated polyester panels. The filter shall be suitable for mounting on an ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flange and shall be fully supported by this flanged connection. d. Control Panel shall be provided with each blower. The panel shall contain a variable speed drive conforming to the Variable Speed Controller Specification provided, blower protection devices and a read-out of amperage, discharge gage pressure and air flow rate. Each blower shall have an HOA switch and local speed control. In the AUTO mode the blower shall run subject to a signal from the SCADA system. Speed in the AUTO mode shall be same as in hand mode. All alarms shall have a separate contact for remote alarm indication. A common contact shall be provided to activate light in the MCC for any failure. e. Blower protection Devices shall include alarm contacts for high bearing temperature at both the inlet or outlet bearings. The blower protection devices shall be installed in the control panel which shall be located adjacent to each blower. The bearing temperature monitors shall consist of capillary type temperature monitors located at the inlet and outlet bearing housings which continuously monitor the bearing temperatures. The bearing temperatures shall be separately indicated by temperature gauges flush mounted on the enclosure and having a red drag pointer which will indicate the highest bearing temperature reached. Should either bearing temperature exceed the factory set point of about 230°F, a stop switch shall open, causing the blower to shut down and a remote alarm to be activated. The snap switch shall have a rating of at least 4 amps, VAC. A reset/test selector switch with red indicator light and a latching control relay shall be provided for each bearing. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SDd-3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The blower manufacturer shall coordinate the design and implementation of the blower protection devices with the electrical/control system. The protective devices shall also provide for surge protection which will protect the blower from damage, include a current transformer, red alarm light, manual reset pushbutton switch, and related components enclosed in a NEMA 12 enclosure for mounting next to the blowers. If, while the blower is operating, the motor amperage drops below the surge point after the startup time delay relay has timed out, a red alarm light shall be illuminated and the blower shall stop, requiring manual pushbutton acknowledgment for restart. However, the surge protection system shall not prevent the blower from automatically restarting following resumption of good power quality after a power failure. Phase protection shall be provided within the control panel. 4. MANOMETER: A mercury manometer of the well type and suitable for wall mounting next to the aeration blower shall be provided and installed. The manometer shall indicate the discharge pressure in pounds and tenths over a range of 0 to 12 psig and shall have an adjustable scale to facilitate zero adjustment. The manometer housing shall be steel with all wetted parts of stainless steel. A transparent cover window shall protect the glass manometer tube and scale from dirt and damage. The manometer shall be connected to the blower discharge by 0.25 -inch copper tubing. A bronze stop cock shall be provided to isolate the manometer. 94.021.002:03150 SDe-1 SPECIFICATION De CLARIFIER EOUIPMENT 1. PURPOSE: The sludge removal equipment described herein shall be installed in the clarifier basin to provide for conveying the settled sludge on the clarifier floor to the sludge pocket in the center of the tank, and also to provide for sweeping floating material on the water surface to a scum removal trough. The equipment shall include a center drive unit and torque control, walkway and platform with handrail, stationary influent pipe, energy dissipating inlet, center feedwell, rotating drive shaft, rake arms, anchor bolts, scum skimmer(s), scum box, effluent weir, scum baffle, and all other appurtenances required or shown on the drawings. 2. DESCRIPTION: The clarifier mechanism shall be of the center drive type, mounted on a walkway which spans the tanks and bears on the wall at each end. Flow shall enter the energy dissipating inlet through an influent feed pipe. The clarifier shall be designed to remove settled sludge from the bottom of the tank and floating scum from around the periphery of the tank. The clarifier shall perform the following integrated functions: a. Dissipate energy and control localized currents. b. Separate solids from the clear liquid. c. Evenly withdraw the clear liquid. d. Transport and thicken settled sludge. e. Remove scum from the clarifier surface. 3. MATERIALS: All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36. Steel pipe used for structural members shall conform to ASTM A53. Steel members in contact with liquids, either continuously or intermittently, shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4" unless otherwise noted. All aluminum shall be type 5052, 6061, or 2014 alloy unless noted. The circular clarifier equipment shall be installed in a 22 foot square concrete tank with a side water depth of approximately 13.5 feet and a bottom slope of 1 -inch per foot as shown on the drawings. The mechanism shall be of the side feed and peripheral overflow type with a central driving mechanism which shall support and rotate a vertical shaft with two rake arms and a skimmer attached thereto. Rake blades attached to the arms shall be arranged to move the sludge that settles on the tank bottom to a sludge discharge cone at the center of the tank. The clarifier mechanism shall be so designed that there will be no chains, sprockets, bearings, or operating mechanism below the liquid surface or in contact with the liquid. 94-021.002:03150 SDe-2 The shaft drive shall withstand a minimum of 2,300 ft -lbs torque, with cycloidal or helical gear speed reducer, and a minimum / HP TEFC motor suitable for 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power. The center drive mechanism shall consist of a drive head assembly, overload alarm and drive assembly. The drive head assembly shall be mounted on the mechanism support and shall consist of a gear drive and mounted in a high-grade cast, metal housing with a removable cover. The gears shall operate in an oil bath. A sight gauge shall be provided for observance of the oil level. Bearings shall be tapered roller bearings or equal and shall operate in an oil bath. The overload alarm shall be mounted to the drive unit and enclosed in a weather-proof housing. A steel beam type mechanism support bridge shall withstand a live load of 50 psf and be fabricated to the same dimensions shown on the Drawings, with 36" wide access walkway extending from one wall to the center platform and to the four wet wells. The walkways will consist of 1-1/4" aluminum grating, with 2 -rail 1-1/2" diameter and 42" high aluminum handrails with kickplate along both sides. Deflection shall not exceed 1/360 when both the dead load and live loads, including momentary peak torque, are applied. ,The center drive platform shall provide 24" clearance outside the center drive components. An influent well fabricated of 1A -inch steel plate shall be provided to diffuse the liquid into the tank without disturbance. The influent well shall be at least 5 feet in diameter and shall project at least 3 feet 9 inches below the liquid level. The steel inlet pipe shall discharge vertically into the feedwell and be supported from the tank wall per the design requirements of the clarifier manufacturer. The vertical shaft shall be fabricated of 6 -inch diameter schedule 80 pipe and shall have a flange at its upper end for mounting to the drive head and shall have a flange at its upper end for mounting to the drive head and attachments at its lower end for the rake arms and center scraper. The center scraper shall be attached to the vertical shaft and shall extend into the sludge discharge cone. The shaft shall be designed to support the weight of the suspended structure and to withstand the cut-out torque of the drive. Two (2) structural steel rake arms confirming to the slope of the tank floor shall be rigidly connected to the vertical shaft and shall be provided will stainless steel blades to scrape the settled sludge along the tank bottom to the sludge discharge cone at the center of the tank. The rake blades shall be fabricated of 4 -inch steel plate, have a minimum depth of 61/ inches and shall be so designed that the entire tank bottom is scraped at least once for each revolution of the mechanism. Adjustable spring brass squeegees shall be furnished for all the blades and they shall project 11 inches below the bottom of the blades and shall be adjustably secured by brass bolts and nuts. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SDe-3 Each arm shall be designed to withstand the full torque that can be imposed by the drive mechanism and not less than 150% of the peak torque of the drive without over stressing the members. Loading to develop the torque shall be considered as uniform loads applied to each arm individually. A steel skimming blade supported and rotated by the vertical shaft shall be furnished to move the floating scum outward to the hinged skimmer blade. It shall have a recessed hinged wiper assembly. A steel skimming blade shall be the full width of the scum trough and have a wearing plate on its outer edge and Neoprene strips on the bottom and inner edge to properly seal the entrapped scum and water when discharging into the trough. The hinged blade shall be constantly forced against the scum baffle of the tank by a coiled spring arrangement to effectively keep the scum baffle clean. The coiled spring shall be enclosed in a cast iron housing and the housing shall be bronze bushed and grease lubricated for easy movement of the hinged blade. The hinged blade shall be adjustable so that the quantity of liquid discharged with the scum can be varied and shall be so designed that the blade can move in a vertical plane so that the bottom edge of the blade is always in contact with the scum trough even if the trough is not horizontal. The scum trough and shelf shall be fabricated of 1/4 " welded steel plate, be adequately supported from the tank wall, be at least 2 feet width by 4 feet 9 inches long and have a 6 -inch standard pipe flange connection for the scum discharge pipe. The Contractor shall procure the services of a manufacturer's representative to inspect the equipment after erection and to supervise its initial operation. The clarifier equipment shall be similar and equal to that manufactured by WesTech. 94-021.002:03150 SDf-1 SPECIFICATION Df FLOW MEASUREMENT EOUIPMENT 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing and installing flow metering and level monitoring equipment. The Contractor shall provide and install all piping, valves, strainers, air bleeds, blowoffs and other appurtenances required to complete and calibrate the installations and to facilitate with their maintenance. 2. FLOW METER,: The Contractor shall provide and install a flow meter at the locations shown on the drawings. a. Magnetic Flow Meter. The flow meter shall be of the electromagnetic induction -type and shall generate a signal linearly proportional to flow for full scale velocity settings from 1 to 33 feet per second. The meter shall be suitable for liquids having a conductivity of 1 micro mho per centimeter or more. Accuracy shall be ±1% of rate down to 10% of full scale, and be .2% of the reading below 10% of full scale; regardless of changes in fluid pressure, temperature, viscosity, or conductivity. The flow meter body shall be epoxy coated die-cast aluminum with full line size diameter. The lining shall be appropriate for the application, as determined by the manufacturer of the flow meter. The body of the meter shall have Class 150 flanged ends. Signal, grounding, and empty pipe detection electrodes shall be Hastelloy C-22. The meter shall utilize bipolar pulsed DC coil excitation with auto zeroing each half cycle. The meter shall incorporate a high impedance amplifier of 100,000 megohms or greater. Manual zero adjustment shall not be required. Electronics shall be microprocessor based with pushbutton programming. Response time shall be adjustable. An internal LCD shall display programmed values, flow rate, totalized flows and error codes as required. Flows shall be entered and displayed in gallons per minute. The unit shall provide a flow proportional analog signal of 4-20 maDC into 700 ohms load. The unit shall be for 120 VAC operation. Electronics shall be housed in an epoxy coated die-cast aluminum NEMA 4 enclosure for wall mounting below the meter. The flow meter shall be similar and equal to the Promag 30 magnetic flow meter manufactured by Endress + Hauser. The unit shall be installed with stainless steel grounding rings at both inlet and outlet. b. Ultrasonic Flow Meter. The system shall be of the ultrasonic type for continuous level and/or open channel flow measurement. System shall consist of transmitter, transducer P:94-021.002:03150 SDf2 and interconnecting cable. The system accuracy shall be 0.25% of measurement span or as dictated by the supplier. The transmitter shall be microprocessor based with an integral operators housed within a NEMA 4X corrosion resistant enclosure with a separate wiring connection compartment. Transmitter shall support Floating Average Curve (FAC), fixed target suppression, zone evaluation and agitator filtering algorithms. The transmitter shall support transducers covering a span of one inch to 150 feet without modification or hardware adjustment. One or two fully isolated 0/4-20 outputs @ 600 ohms maximum shall be supplied. Output shall be proportional to level, flow or volume. Five fully programmable 4 amp SPDT relay outputs shall be provided as well as companion LED status indicators on the operator interface. An integral mechanical six digit non resetable counter and remote totalizer counter driver shall be provided. Pump sequencing, differential level, open channel flow, solids level, liquid level applications shall be supported. Remote HART or RS 485 Distributed Measurement System DMS digital communication shall be supported. The standard transmitter shall support the local connection of a PC based operator interface. The transmitter shall support the input of a separate overfill/underfill level switch for enhanced fill control. The location of the transmitter shall be located above the level meter at an exact location to be determined by the Engineer. The transducer(s) shall be powered by the transmitter with less than 50 V up to 1000 feet away via standard twisted shielded two conductor cabling. EMI/RFI effects on the combined system shall be less than 1% at 10 volts/meter (NAMUR, IEC 801-3 standards) allowing installation in standard aluminum conduit. The transducer(s) shall have polypropylene housings and be rated Class 1 Division 1 or Class II Division I by Factory Mutual (FM). A 1 inch NPT connection shall be provided to mount the transducer. The transducer shall be provided with a 15 foot interconnecting cable and can be extended from the transmitter up to 1000 feet away via splicing standard twisted shielded two conductor cabling. Transducers shall have integral temperature sensors to support speed of sound compensation and be weather proof and fully submersible. The transmitter shall be the Endress + Hauser Prosonic FMU 861 -R -1-F-1-8-8, or approved equal. The sensor shall be the Endress + Hauser Prosonic FDU 80 -Q -N -1-A Sensor, or approved equal. P:94-021.00103150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE -I SPECIFICATION E INTERIOR PIPING AND PLUMBING 1. SCOP) OF WORK,: Furnish all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required, and perform all operations needed to construct all interior piping, piping under structures and piping through walls to 5 feet of outside any structure exterior wall or as shown on the Drawings. Provide pipe supports, hangers, and brackets, fittings, specials and all appurtenances as shown and as required to make the entire piping system operable including connections to equipment specified elsewhere. Refer to Specification Valves. 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Drawings and Specifications. The mechanical details on the Drawings are diagrammatic in character; and exact locations ofthe elements ofthe system, the measurements for cutting and installing pipe, and the dimensions of the equipment, shall be determined from the structure and from the actual equipment. The Contractor shall investigate space requirements and locations of connections of equipment prior to ordering. The Contractor shall not scale off the Drawings to cut pipe or make connections to equipment selected. Equipment which will not enter the openings or which will not fit the assigned space will not be acceptable. All Drawings relating to the construction, including architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing, piping, heating, and ventilating, together with these Specifications, shall be considered collectively in bidding on the work. b. Codes and Ordinances. The Contractor shall comply with the laws and ordinances in effect at the site and the rules ofthe State and local plumbing inspector. Such codes and ordinances, where they apply, shall take precedence over these Drawings and Specifications. National Board of Fire Underwriters' rules shall be observed in the work done under this contract. Materials having Underwriters' labels shall be used when available. c. Permits. The Contractor shall make application and pay for all necessary permits and certificates of insurance. d. Materials and Equipment. All materials shall be new and free of blemishes. All pipe, fittings, and valves shall be clearly marked to identify material, class and thickness. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured of the materials noted on the drawings unless otherwise specified herein. Such piping and fittings shall have the strength, thickness and other characteristics given in this specification. e. Standards. Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specifications of a manufacturer shall be complied with unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. The American Society for Testing and Materials, American Water Works Association, American National Standards Institute, Uniform Plumbing Code or other published standards referred 94.021.002:03 1 SO SE -2 to herein shall be complied with unless there is a conflict between standards or specifications, then the more stringent requirement shall govern. In the absence of specific dates on Standards, the latest published revision shall be applicable. f. Submittals. Submit shop drawings, complete with material, grade and class for all pipe, fittings, and coupl ings and/or all joints, coatings, and appurtenances prior to fabrication and shipping. Submit detailed catalog and engineering data sheets for all components such as flexible couplings, rubber gaskets and insulating joints. On a set of drawings show and identify the pipe, pipe joints, fittings, couplings, joint harnesses, wall sleeves with sealant and backup thicknesses, wall castings, hangers, saddles, straps and other supports, and miscellaneous details. Submit a proposed pipe support plan for all piping, except where pipe supports are specifically detailed on the Drawings. 3. SMALL PIPE AND FITTINGS. Copper piping shall be seamless copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, Type L rigid where exposed, and Type K for buried service. Fittings shall be compression and hard -solder type as required. Flared type shall be Parker-Hannefin "Triple -Lock", American Brass "Anaconda", Imperial -Eastman "High -Seal", or equal. Hard solder fittings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze conforming to the requirements of ASTM B62. All piping for gauges shall be brass with threaded brass fittings. The brass pipe for the gauge piping shall be "regular" seamless red brass pipe, conforming to ASTM B43. Small steel piping, used in water, sewage, sludge and/or low pressure air pipelines, shall be standard weight, Schedule 40, galvanized, wrought steel with threaded joints. Fittings shall be malleable iron with ends suitable for threaded pipe. Plastic pipe shall be used for sludge and scum transport, as shown on the Drawings. The plastic pipe shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), 12454-B, Schedule 80. Flanged joints shall be used where indicated on the Drawings. Fittings shall be made of material equivalent to the pipe and meet the requirements of ASTM Standards D-2466, D-2467, and D-2464. ABS (Acrylonitrile -Butadiene -Styrene) piping and fittings used for drain, waste, and vent piping, shall conform with the requirements set forth in ASTM D-2661. Connection between pipes of dissimilar materials shall be made with the appropriate transition coupling including insulation for jointing pipes with potential galvanic reaction. Where copper piping is in direct contact with metal pipe supports, a protective copper saddle shall be soldered to the underside of the pipe. Saddles may be of split copper pipe. 4. DUCTILE -IRON PIPE. FITTINGS. FLANGES AND JOINTS: LIOUID AND AIR SERVICE. All ductile -iron pipe used for water, sewage, and low pressure air pipelines shall comply to ANSI A21.51 and shall be Class 52 except pipes through concrete, below slabs or inaccessible shall be Class 55. All cast-iron fittings shall conform to ANSI A21.10. All pipe and fittings, except those used for air service, shall have cement mortar lining in accordance with ANSI A21.4. All flanges on cast-iron pipe and fittings shall conform to ANSI A21.15 and B16.1. All push -on and mechanical joints, bolts, and 94-021.002:03130 1 1 SE -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 nuts shall conform to ANSI A21.11. Bolts on submerged piping shall be SS. Exposed pipe shall be provided with flanges and buried pipe shall be provided with mechanical joints or as called out in the Drawings. The exterior surfaces of pipe and fittings not to be painted shall be foundry -coated with a bituminous coating. Where exposed pipe is to be painted, the bituminous exterior coat is not required. Surface preparation shall be as required by the Specification "Painting and Protective Coatings". Joints in flanged pipe shall have inserted therein red rubber ring gaskets, full face width and not Tess than Va-inch thickness. Mechanical joint gaskets are specified in ANSI A21.11. Buried ductile iron pipe, fittings, and joints shall be installed with polyethylene encasement in accordance with Specifications: Buried Pipelines. 5. TIE RODS .6,ND CLAMPS: Restraining devices shall be of heat-treated Cor -ten steel meeting requirements of ASTM A242, except nuts which shall be zinc coated carbon steel meeting requirements of ASTM A563, Grade C3. Restraining systems shall be Superstar by Star National Products. 6. WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIQNS: a. Wall Pipes. Cast or DIP wall pipes shall have an integrally cast intermediate collar and have mechanical joint, drilled flange or plain end connections as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be similar and equal to Clow figure numbers F-1426, F-1428, or F-1431, as required. Steel wall pipes shall have a collar welded to a section of steel pipe meeting other requirements of this specification. The collar shall be the same diameter as the collar on the same size cast or ductile wall pipes; shall be at least %.-inch thick; shall be located at the center of the wall; and shall be continuously welded to the pipe. b. Wall Piece. Cast or ductile iron pipe with an annular ring attached and sealed around the pipe barrel. End connections as indicated on the drawings. Wall pieces shall not be used for high pressure pipes; and shall not be substituted for wall pipes where the latter are specified or shown on the drawings. c. Wall Sleeves. Where small diameter pipes penetrate walls, wall sleeves shall be installed. Wall sleeves to be installed in concrete walls, slabs, and floors shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe and shall have a steel annular ring continuously welded to the middle of the pipe. The ring shall be'/. -inch thick by 1 -inch wide for 3 -inch pipe or smaller. The ring shall be secured to the barrel by continuous welds on both sides of the ring. After fabrication the sleeve and ring shall be hot -dip galvanized. d. Wall Sleeve Sealant. Seal pipes in sleeves or cored openings with sealant that bonds securely to concrete and steel, is watertight under continuous submergence, and will not contaminate water in any way. The material shall not harden materially when exposed to weather, and 94-021.002:031SO S E-4 shall be suitable for application by caulking, knife, or gun. The compound shall be a polyurethane polymer that cures at ambient air temperature to a firm flexible, tear -resistant rubber designed for bonding to continuously submerged surfaces. It shall have cured physical properties meeting the requirement of ANSI A116.1 and Federal Specification TT -S -00227E; shall develop a Shore "A" hardness of between 22 and 40 after 7 days submergence in water; shall have 150 -psi m inimum tensile strength and 500 percent minimum elongation when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation D412 at 75 degrees F. e. .Expansion Seal. Expansion seal metal components shall be stainless steel. The Contractor shall coordinate the proper sizing of the sleeve or opening and seal so as to insure a proper and watertight installation. The seals shall be similar and equal to the Link -Seal manufactured by the Thunderline Corp. 7. SMALL PIPING VALVES: Valves on small diameter piping shall be suitable for use with the liquid or gas being transported. Plant water system valves shall be bronze complying to ASTM B-62. Screwed end connections shall be used unless otherwise designated on the Drawings. Valves shall permit repacking while under pressure. Gate valves shall be solid wedge disc, rising stem, screwed bonnet, 125 -pound class equal to Crane N2428. Globe valves shall be bronze disc, rising stem, screwed bonnet, 125 -pound class equal to Crane N21. Check valves shall be bronze swing check disc, integral disc and hinge, 125 -pound class equal to Crane N° 37. Corporation Stops shall be similar and equal to Mueller Company H-10013. Small pressure reducing valves (up to 2 -inch size) shall be simi lar and equal to the Series H-9300 as manufactured by Mueller. Strainers shall be similar and equal to Mueller H-9330 "Y" Type. 8. PIPE COUPLINGS: Mechanical sleeve -type couplings shall have sleeves and follower flanges of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536; alloy steel bolts conforming to ASTM A-325; hexagon nuts conforming to ASTM A-563; and gasket material suitable for sewage service. Couplings for use on prerequired pipe shall have integral thrust restraint. Couplings shall be or equal to the following: Straight Coupling - Smith Blair 441 Reducing Coupling - Smith Blair R441 Flanged Coupling Adapter - Smith Blair 912 Reducing Flanged Coupling Adapter - Smith Blair 914 9. PIPE SUPPORTS: All pipelines shall be supported so that all lines are at a uniform slope or level as required herein or as shown on the Drawings. All pipe shall be supported so that there are no sags in the lines. a. Ceiling and Floor Supports. In absence of details shown on the Drawings pipes over 4 feet above the floor shall be supported with clevis type hangers from above or brackets from an adjacent wall. Hanger supports that are located and embedded in concrete must be an adjustable type. Pipes nearer the floor than 4 feet shall be supported by use of a pipe or 94.021.002:03150 1 1 SE -5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 concrete saddle. Where concrete saddles or thrust blocks are required there shall be a polyethylene bond breaker between concrete and pipe. b. Materials. The materials used for piping support shall be similar and equal to those manufactured by ITT Grinnell for the following types: Headed welded steel brackets Figure 199 Adjustable clevis Figure 590 U -bolts Figure 137 Machine threaded rods Figure 140 Pipe saddle Figure 264 Concrete inserts Figure 281 Chain or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. Trapeze hangers may be used in place of separate hangers for pipes running parallel and vertically adjacent. c. Spacing. Pipe supports shall be no more than 10 feet apart and each fitting or valve shall have supports on either side. Pipe manufacturers shall approve of the type of support and spacing to prevent local overstressing of pipes. AlI pump and equipment piping shall be supported in a manner that prevents any loading or stress on the connections. 10. MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT: a. Pressure Gauges. Pressure gauges where required are indicated on the Drawings. The gauge installation shall include the gauge, a shutoff valve, a snubber and a ball valve on PVC pipelines or a corporation stop on cast- or ductile -iron pipelines. On pipelines containing impure water, there shall also be a liquid filled chemical seal to insulate the gauge from the pipeline liquid. All pressure gauges shall have aluminum cases, back flanged with screwed ring cover, 4%2 -inch dial, non-reflecting white face, bronze socket and tube, '%-inch NPT bottom connection. The shutoffvalve shall be %.-inch brass with a "T" handle. The snubber shall be'/. -inch brass threaded connection. The liquid seal shall be bronze,'/ -inch connections, maximum pressure of 1,000 psi with glycerin fiul Iiquid. All gauges and accessories shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and shall be equal to Crosby Valve and Gauge Company or US Gauge. Gauges shall read in both pounds per square inch (psi) and feet of water. b. Hose Bibbs. The hose bibbs shall have a nickel -plated body, red bronze valve seat, Buna-N disc, stainless steel disc screw, an aluminum handwheel, graphite impregnated packing, and standard thread garden hose connection. 94-021.002:03150 1 SE -6 1 The hose bibbs shall be similar and equal to Angle Sillcocks Figure NQ 63 as manufactured by NIBCO. Frost -proof hose bibbs shall be equal to Figure N2 62 as manufactured by NIBCO. c. Floor Drain. Floor drains are to be installed at the location shown on the Drawings. Floor drains shall be similar and equal to Josam type N2 30004 with 6 -inch adjustable bronze strainer, 4 -inch threaded outlet and P -trap. The channel drain shall be similar and equal to NDS type Spee -D with a 4 -inch bottom outlet and trap. Traps shall be cast-iron with NPT clean out plug similar and equal to Josam Type N2 88124. Provide adaptor for connection to ABS piping on outlet, if required on drawings. d. "P" Traps. P Traps shall have 3 -inch, no -hub connection. The trap shall be of cast iron and provide a water seal of about 3 -inch. The trap shall have a 2 -inch NPT clean-out plug at the bottom. The trap shall be similar and equal to Type No. 8810-60 by Josam. 11. CONSTRUCTION REOUIREMENTS: Due to the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the piping systems nor to show all offsets, fittings, etc., which may be required. a. Location. All piping shall be installed as closely as possible to walls, ceilings, columns, beams and equipment (consistent with proper space requirements for maintenance and operational appurtenances) so as to occupy the minimum of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this must be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense. b. Alignment. Provisions for maximum flexibi lity are not always shown and the Contractor may add flexible joints where required and approved by the Engineer. All piping shall be installed plumb and square. Exposed pipe shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the adjacent walls and floors. At locations where metal interior piping connects with metal buried piping, a dielectric or insulating gasket shall be provided. Piping shall be run in a straight grade between elevations shown on the Drawings, except when not possible due to conflict with other facilities. Pipelines carrying liquid shall be installed without high points that could trap gasses or air and shall be kept below the static water level in the items to which they connect. c. Testing Pressure Piping. All piping that will be subjected to internal pressures for transporting liquids or gasses shall be tested for leaks in accordance with the instructions from the Engineer. In general, tests shall comply with the Uniform Plumbing Code. In the event the line tested should fail, repairs shall be made and the line retested until it does comply. 94.02002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE -7 d. Progress ofthe Work. In the installation and finishing of the piping, plumbing, heating, and ventilating systems, the Contractor shall be governed by the construction. All parts of the work in contact with or running through masonry or concrete work shall be installed as required to avoid cutting and unnecessary adjustments. Pipes, pipe hangers, inserts, supports, ducts, frames, sleeves, boxing, and other members shall be incorporated within the structure at the proper time and as required to obtain the best results in following the Drawings and Specifications. Coordination of the work ofalI crafts involved to accomplish a neat, practical, and efficient installation of all mechanical equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. e. Al Iowance for Expansion. All air lines, and other lines subject to temperature variations shall be so installed as to allow free movement to take care of expansion and contraction. Special expansion joints shall be installed as shown and specified on the Plans. Where expansion is taken up by bends in pipelines, the Contractor shall so install the line that adequate room is available for movement of the pipelines. Anchorages shall be provided at the proper joints to prevent creeping. f. Installation Through and Within Concrete Structures.. Unless otherwise specifically detailed on the Drawings, when a pipe(exceptcopperor wrought steel) passes from concrete to earth or from earth to concrete, a bell and spigot, ringtite, wedgelock, or other flexible type joint or coupling shall be installed on the earth side. Particular care shall be taken to secure full support of the pipe in the earth. Where pipes terminate in or pass through concrete sections below finished grade, they may be set in place, or cored opening may be made in the concrete. Location of the openings shall be accurately determined, and they shall be of sufficient size to permit passage of flanges and bells to allow satisfactory caulking of the opening. Cored openings shall not be perm itted in tank walls or slabs containing liquid. Wherever a pipeline passes through a concrete wall or floor slab ofa tank designed to contain liquid the Contractor shall install a cast -in-place wall pipe with an integrally cast collar. Cutting for the installation of the mechanical work shall be done at times most suitable for ' other crafts and as directed by the Engineer. Where necessary to cut chases in walls, they shall be reinforced as directed. After the work is installed, all holes shall be patched to match the finish of the adjacent surface. 1 12. SMALL PIPE INSTALLATION: 1 1 1 1 1 a. General. All piping shall be reamed and cleaned of all dirt and scale before being installed. All concealed piping shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer before being concealed. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings. Pipe showing kinks or wrinkles will not be accepted. All joints shall be made watertight or airtight, depending on their use. b. Steel Pipe. All threads on steel pipes shall be cut with sharp dies to standard depth, left clean-cut, and tapered. All screwed pipe joints shall be properly sealed with an approved joint paste or teflon tape applied on the male threads only. Expansion joints and unions shall be provided as required. 94.021.002:03150 SE -8 c. PVC Pipe. All Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall have either solvent weld or threaded connections and Schedule 40 shall have solvent weld joints unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Threads shall be cut with proper tools and connections shall be sealed correctly and completely with teflon tape. d. Sleeves. For small size piping in those structures not holding water, sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through floors, ceilings, and partitions at the time the structure is being constructed. After installation, all sleeves shall be caulked with approved appropriate material. e. Miscellaneous Fittings. In all small piping, unions must be installed at all equipment so that the equipment can be removed without dismantling the piping. At each piece ofequipment using water, valves must be installed in the water supply line, or lines, whether shown or not. All connections ofcopper pipe to ferrous pipe or ferrous equipment shall be made with "Epco" dielectric unions or other dielectric connections approved by the Engineer. 13. LARGE INTERIOR PIPE INSTALLATION: a. Location. In general, the location of the piping has been fixed on the Drawing, but variations win be permitted to suit the type or make of approved equipment purchased by the Contractor. However, the general plan of fittings and connections is expected to be followed unless variations are approved by the Engineer. b. Installation. All pipe and valves shall be carefully aligned and shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner. The bolts in the flange joints shall be drawn up tightly around the flange without overstraining the flanges. All joints must be made watertight. If any joint, pipe, fitting, and valves is found defective upon testing, it shall be immediately repaired or replaced by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. Make-up piping and closure pieces shall be sized and measured after equipment selection has been completed and located, and all permanent parts of the structure are in place. Couplings may be used when locations are approved by the Engineer. c. Penetrations. All pipes and fittings to be embedded in concrete shall be accurately located and shall be securely held in place to prevent displacement when concrete is placed. Such embedded items shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, grease, dirt, and other foreign material that will destroy concrete bond. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE -9 d. Pipe Supports. Hanger supports that are located and embedded in concrete must be an adjustable type that will allow the piping to be located in straight lines and slopes, where required, at a uniform grade without sagging. Pipe type floor supports are acceptable for piping up to 4 feet above the floor; however, the supports must be properly anchored and coated. Concrete thrust blocks for bracing pressure pipe shall have reinforcement and shall be tied into the concrete floor or wall. Wall brackets and braces shall be sufficiently anchored to the wall in an approved manner. e. Testing and Cleanup. After each of the systems has been installed, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all parts of the installation. All equipment, piping, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and other debris. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to any of the work due to the Contractor's failure to properly install or to properly clean the systems shall be repaired without cost to the Owner. 94-021.002:03150 Fol lowing the cleaning, each system shall be completely tested in the presence ofthe Engineer and to his satisfaction, and all equ ipment shal I be adjusted to operate in the most efficient and satisfactory manner. Only such tests shall be made as will demonstrate that each line will be leak -free at a pressure equal to twice the operating pressure, except that no test pressure in excess of 200 psi will be required. The minimum test pressure shall be 50 psi. Special care shall be taken in testing the air lines, and all joints shall be soap tested under pressure. All air lines shall be completely airtight. SF- 1 SPECIFICATION F VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with this specification consists of providing and installing all valves and accessories as specified, indicated, and required. Principal valves include, diffuser check, eccentric plug, ball check, mud, and appurtenances including valve boxes, and operators. See Specification "Interior Piping and Plumbing" for small (less than 2 -inch) valves, pressure reducing valves, solenoid valves, Y -strainers. See Specification " Blowers" for air check and spring loaded pressure relief valves. Buried valves specified herein shall be installed in accordance with Specification: "Buried Pipelines". 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: The referenced standards of the American Waterworks Association (AWWA) shal l apply to the extent that the AWWA requirements are not in conflict with this Section. All valves of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. 3. SUBMITTAL$: Submit certified shop drawings complete with bill -of -materials showing kind and class of materials, and catalog and engineering data showing compliance with specified requirements. Drawings shall show principal dimensions, general construction, materials used for all partsofvalves and operators, weights of valve components, complete assembled valve and operator with all principal dimensions required for setting, assembly, and clearance requirements for operator removal and replacement. Include preventive and corrective maintenance instructions. 4. GENERAL DESCRIPTION: Below -ground valves shall be non -rising stem, nut operated with position indicators. Above -ground and vault -installed valves shall be handwheel or lever operated with indicators, except where indicated or specified as motor or cylinder operated. Valves shall have pressure rating not Tess than the adjacent piping unless otherwise indicated. Valves over 2 -inch size shall be provided with pipe supports on either side ofthe valve. Assemblies of valves, operators, and accessories shall be complete and adequate for the intended purpose and shall include all essential components of equ ipment together with all mountings and other appurtenances normal and necessary for proper installation, whether or not indicated or specified. Direction of rotation to open each valve shall be to the left (counter -clockwise). Each valve body or operator shall have cast thereon the work "OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction to open. All valves identified by a number on the drawings shall be tagged with a permanent, stamped, non -corroding metal tag. Handwheel actuators shall be designed to produce the required torque with a minimum pull of 80 pounds. The handwheeI shall be manufactured of cast-iron. Chains for the chain handle and chainwheel operators shall be looped with the bottom of the loop at about 4 foot above the floor, or higher as directed by the Engineer. 44021.002:03150 SF -2 5. PLUG VALVES: Plug valves shall be the non -lubricated eccentric plug type. Valves shall open from fully open to tight closure in one-quarter (90 degrees) turn and shall have an indicator to show plug position. Valve plugs, bearings, and seals shall be easily removable for repair or replacement without removing the valve body from the pipeline in which it is installed. All valve connections shall be 125 Ib. ANSI B16.1 flanges. Valve materials shall be compatible with sewage and sludge and shall be as follows: Body: Cast iron/epoxy lined Plug: Cast iron with neoprene/EPT coating Bearings: Stainless steel Seals: Adjustable "V" type of Buna - N Seating surface: Nickel or 304 stainless steel Each plug valve shall be supplied with its own operator as outlined below, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Operator extensions shall be provided where required to avoid interference with adjacent equipment, piping, walls, etc. Valve Size 3 to 8 inch all sizes Location of Center of Valve up to 6' 6" above floor more, than 6' 6" above floor Operator Type Detachable lever Chainwheel The valves shall be sim i lar and equal to DeZurik 118, CLOW FUL-FLO, or approved equal. All plug valves shall be from the same manufacturer. 6. BALL CHECK VALVES: Check valves shall be cast iron body, Buna-N covered metal ball, 1251b. flanged connections, ball check valves, suitable for vertical mounting and use with sludge. Valves shall be G A Ball, Check Figure NQ 240, or equal. 7. COARSE BUBBLE DIFFUSER CHECK VALVES: Diffuser check valves are to be molded rubber of the flow operated check type with a slip-on connection and supplied with vendor furnished stainless steel clamp. The port area shall contour down to a duckbill, which shall allow passage of airflow in one direction, while preventing reverse flow. Synthetic elastomer shall be selected to be compatible with process fluid. The valves shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written installation and operation manual. All valves shall be Red Valve Co. Series TF -A, with %-inch male pipe threads, or approved equal. 8. MUD VALVES: Mud valves shall be of the flanged body, rising stem type with cast-iron body and bronze stem, stem nut, disc, ring, and seat. Valves shall be provided with extension stems, stem guides at 4' on center, and handwheel operator. Mud valves shall be similar and equal to F-3085 iron body, 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S F-3 bronze mounted mud valves as manufactured by CLOW. Stern guides shall be similar and equal to CLOW F5660 adjustable guide. 9. INSTALLATION: a. Buried Valves and Valve Boxes shall be set in true alignment and grade in accordance with the requirements of specification: Installation for Buried Pipelines. Valves shall be operated and all adjustments and operating settings of valves and appurtenances shall be made prior to installation. The valve boxes shall be checked for centering plumb over the wrench nut and to ensure that the box cover is flush with the finish grade. Earth backfill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to prevent displacement. b. Aboveground and Vault -Installed Valves shall be rigidly held in place using supports and hangers. The stem orientation of valves in elevated piping shall be as approved by the Engineer for accessibility. Saddle type valve supports shall be provided for all valves. Supports shall be of rugged construction providing at least 120 degrees under -support for the valve body, shall be adjustable, and shall be anchored to the foundations using galvanized anchor bolts. Valves shall be operated and adjusted before installation. Valves shall be tested with adjacent piping. c. Protective Coatings: All interior non -working ferrous surfaces other than stainless steel, and all exterior ferrous surfaces other than stainless steel shall be given protective coatings. Unless otherwise specifically modified herein, the coatings shall conform to the provisions of Specification "Painting and Protective Coatings" for preparation of surfaces, coating materials, application, and dry film thickness. The interior waterway passages of all valves shall be given a shop applied coating system. The exterior surfaces shall be given a shop prime coating compatible with finish exterior coating applied in the field. 94-021.002:03150 SGa-1 SPECIFICATION Ga ELECTRICAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies and accessories and of perform ing all operations needed in connection with all electrical work required by the Drawings and Specifications for all power, lighting and control systems. The work shall also include the performance and installation of such necessary work, and the providing of such necessary material and devices of a minor nature that are neither indicated on the Drawings nor specifically mentioned in the Specification, but which are necessary for the compliance with codes, and for the successful operation ofthe entire electrical system indicated on the Drawings, and/or described in the Specifications. The Contractor will be allowed no extra compensation because of this requirement. An overview of the required work includes but is not limited to the following: a. Install main service power secondary. Coordinate installation with local utility per drawings and specifications. b. Purchase and install the following electrical equipment per specifications and drawings: (1) Motor Control Center (2) Panelboards (3) 30 KVA Transformer (4) Disconnect switches per one line diagram (5) Lighting inside and outside (6) Heating and Ventilation Power & Controls (7) Power & Controls to clarifier, blowers, submersible pumps and all other motors. c Provide start-up support for Blower 1 & 2 Variable Frequency Drives. d. Purchase, fabricate and install Plant Control Panel and all instrumentation per Instrumentation and Controls specification and drawings. 2. GENERAL ELECTRICALJEQ_UIREMENTS a. Materials: All electrical equipment and materials shall comply with the latest standards ofthe following: National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Insulated Power Cable Engineers' Association (IPCEA) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society of Testing for Materials (ASTM) National Bureau of Standards (NBS) All equipment, materials, and installation methods and procedures shall comply with all applicable state and local code requirements and ordinances, and the latest applicable 94-021.002:3150 SGa-2 requirements of OSHA and the National Electrical Code of the NFPA, as interpreted by the local inspection authority, and as approved by the Engineer. All equipment and materials shall also comply with all requirements of the utility and telephone companies. All minor items of electrical apparatus which are furnished with the various items of equipment, but which are neither detailed on the Drawings or set forth in the Specifications, shall be considered a part of the electrical work. All electrical materials shall be new, first quality and free of defects. The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery and safe storage of his materials and equipment and shall arrange to have materials delivered to the job at such stages of the construction as will expedite the work as a whole. b. Examination of Premises: Examine the premises prior to bidding and become fully familiar with existing conditions. c. Codes: All work shall be done in accordance with best recognized modern practice and shall conform to the National Electrical Code, and to any modifications to the code by local authority. If any conflict occurs between the applicable codes and this Specification, that which is most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall accept this condition upon submitting his proposal, and no extra payment will be allowed in order to conform to this condition. d. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain any necessary permits for inspection and installation of the work and shall pay all fees in connection therewith. After all required electrical work has been completed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, the Contractor when required shall procure a certificate approving the work from the proper authority and deliver it to the Engineer. Contractor shall comply with the following: (1) Building Authority Inspection Record 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contractor shall maintain an inspection record on-site for use by local electrical inspection and/or building authority. Rough -in inspections: Notify and arrange for timely partial rough -in inspections scheduled and coordinated with construction progress. (2) Master Electrician's Inspection Record All electrical work must be inspected and approved by the master electrician in charge of and in control of the work. The master electrician shall provide an inspection and approval record. The record shall be in a bound log and shall indicate a description of the approved work, approval date, master electrician's written approval and written acceptance of general contractor. 94-021.002:3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGa-3 The approval record shall be maintained by the supervising managing general contractor For review at all times by the Engineer. e. Purchasing and Guarantees: Refer to Section of Specification on "Equipment General Requirements" for requirements for purchasing and guarantees. f. Substitutions: No substitution shall be made unless pre -approved by the electrical engineer. Where substitutions alter the design, conduit, wiring or space requirements indicated on the drawings, contractor shall include items of cost for the revised design and construction. g. Engineering Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine the locations and extent of all the equipment to be connected. Unless dimensions are shown on the Drawings, locations ofoutlets and equipment shown are approximate. The Drawings indicate the general design and arrangement of circuits, equipment, systems, etc., and all information shown is diagrammatic. The Drawings shall not be scaled for dimensions. The Contractor shall check the equipment drawings furnished by the equipment manufacturers to determine the correct location for roughing in the outlets for connection to the equipment. The Contractor shall give careful consideration to conduit routing and the locating of electrical equipment in order to preserve the architectural presence of the building, to ensure unobstructed passage through doors, floor hatches, corridors, and around equipment, and so as not to interfere with process and mechanical equipment. h. Shop Drawings: Completed detailed shop drawings shall be furnished to the Engineer for his approval prior to fabrication. The shop drawings shall show in complete detail all wiring, dimensions, layouts, equipment schedules, installation details (to include conduit routing), spare parts bulletins, and a complete description of operation. Three copies, plus the number of sets he needs for his own use, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 days after award of contract. Installation shall not proceed until the Engineer approves the submittals. Contractor shall submit shop drawings to include but are not limited to: 94.021.002:3150 (1) Lighting equipment, lamps and accessories (2) Distribution equipment, dry -type transformers, panelboards, accessories, associated supports and housekeeping pads (3) Control schematics, wire, routing, wire connection (by numbered terminals), terminal boards and enclosures (4) Motor Control Center, starters, components, accessories, and associated supports and housekeeping pads (5) Loose starters, loose control apparatus, components, accessories, associated supports (6) Conduit Routing Plans, oversize junction and pull boxes, wire -way systems (7) Concrete pull boxes SGa-4 (8) All materials (i.e. commodities list, conduit junction boxes, fasteners, fittings, support systems, wiring devices, all appurtenant incidental material, etc.) i. Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list ofall proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description. Partial list shall be cause for rejection. Material list shall include complete data on proposed item. All information shall be current to include catalog number, dimensions, material type, finish, function and common use. Provide material liston 8 1/2" x 11" paper, bound in loose-leaf binder with an index. Material list shall be submitted as a shop drawing. j. As Built Drawings: Contractor shall maintain a complete set ofelectrical drawings at the site, with all changes, etc., marked neatly thereon in a contrasting color. This set shall not be used for any other purpose. Drawings shall be kept current at all times, and presented to the Engineer upon completion of work. k. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of work prepare and deliver to the Engineer four (4) sets of complete operations and maintenance manuals. The information in this manual shall include: (1) Final "as -built" detailed wiring diagrams of all furnished control devices and equipment (2) Manufacturer and catalog/part numbers for all equipment and recommended spare parts lists (3) Shop drawings, Performance curves and rating data (4) Manufacturer's operating and maintenance data Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate installation of new electrical service with the local utility, Holy Cross Energy. The utility office is located in Glenwood Springs, Colorado, and may be contacted by calling 970 945-5491. The Contractor shall coordinate all dimensional and construction details for the utility transformer pad. Utility shall install the new pad -mount transformer. Contractor shall obtain metering requirements to include enclosure, current transformers and mounting hardware from the utility. Utility shall install meter and metering equipment. Contractor shall provide and install a nametag on meter with utilities name, address and phone number. m. Altitude and Temperature: All equipment and material shall be designed, constructed and tested to operate successfully at 6198 feet above sea level and at the following ambient temperature range unless otherwise specified: Outdoors: -20° F to 100° F Indoors: +40° F to 104° F 94-021.002:3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGa-5 3. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT a. Safety Switches: Provide fused or non-fused heavy-duty safety switches where indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Switches shall be quick -make, quick -break, load -break type, horsepower rated. Main service disconnecting switch shall be approved for a service disconnecting means per NEC. Provide switches of sizes and numbers of poles as shown on the Drawings and as required, and with the proper NEMA enclosure for the area in which installed. Switches shall have cover interlock feature, and fused switches shall be equipped with rejection clips for Class R current limiting fuses as required. Provide switches of proper voltage and ampere rating to match the circuit electrical characteristics in which installed. All exterior mounted disconnects 12 feet and less above finished grade shall have pad locks, master laminated type minimum 3/16 inch shafts, master keyed, to lock disconnect doors. Switches shall be heavy duty, manufactured by Square D, Cutler -Hammer or approved equal. b. Fuses: Provide sizes, classes, and types of fuses as indicated for all fused safety switches. All fuses 0-600 amps shall have the Class R rejection feature. Verify actual load current of all motors prior to ordering fuses and provide fuses of sizes as recommended by the manufacturer. Fuses shall be of the proper voltage rating to match the circuit characteristics in which installed. Generally, motor fuses shall be of the dual element type and shall be set at 110 percent of full load amps, or 125 percent where required for heavy duty usage or high ambient temperatures. Fuses shall be of the power voltage rating to match the circuit characteristics in which installed. Fuses indicated on drawings shall be manufactured by Bussman Company, Gould Shawmut or Littlefuse. c. Spare Fuses: Provide three spare fuses of each size and type installed. Place in a metal cabinet adjacent to the main distribution equipment. Cabinet shall be wall mounted, shall have a hinged door and latch, and shall be labeled "SPARE FUSES" on cover. d. Nameplates: Engraved composition, laminated plastic, 1"x 3" nameplates shall be provided for each main switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, circuit breaker, switch, thermostat, starter, disconnect switch, etc. The plates shall have lettering or numbering as required and approved. Black nameplates shall have 'A -inch high white letters with black background; red background for emergency power equipment. Provide nameplates for all switches, circuit breakers and motor starters, in each motor control center and all individually mounted equipment. Nameplates shall be mounted with corrosion resistant screws (double back tape not acceptable) and positioned on the front of door adjacent to circuit breaker, or switch, so as to be clearly visible. The legend on the strips shall be so composed as to clearly indicate the equipment served by the protective devices. These data shall be submitted on shop drawings for approval. Provide a typed directory in all panelboards. Neatly label all J -box cover plates as to their function. Use a permanent ink pen. Labeling shall also include light fixtures, controls, alarms, receptacles, etc. Labeling shall be done on J -boxes that are above accessible ceiling, in storage rooms and maintenance areas, etc. Do not label J -boxes in public view areas. e. Conductors: Provide a complete system of conductors for all raceway systems. All conductors shal l be rated 600 volts and shall be of a manufacturer subscribing to applicable IPCEA and NEMA standards and practices. Conductors shall be of sizes and types as indicated, and as required by the NEC for specific uses. Where quantities of conductors in 94.021.002:3150 SGa-6 a raceway system are not specifically indicated, provide number as required to maintain function, control, and number of circuits as indicated. All conductors shall be UL listed and approved and shall conform to the following: Minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG except for control or signal circuits which may be #14 AWG (#16 for wiring directly to PLC). Unless otherwise ind icated, al I wiring for branch circuits shall be #12 AWG in Y2 -inch conduit (minimum 1 -inch in concrete slabs) protected by 20 -ampere circuit breakers. Ifdistance from panel to first outlet is 100 feet or greater (for 120 -volt circuits), #10 AWG shall be installed. All wire sizes #14 AWG through #10 AWG including #14 AWG control wire shall be stranded THWN/THHN with one exception: Receptacle and 1 ight fixture wire sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid type THWNITHHN. Wire size #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, type XHHW. All conductors shall be copper. The use of aluminum will not be allowed. All service conductors, feeders, and branch circuits shall be color coded in accordance with Article 210-5 of NEC and the following. The following color code prevails for all service, feeder and branch circuits: Neutral - White Ground - Green Phase A - Black for 120/208 Phase B - Red for 120/208 Phase C - Blue for 120/208 Brown for 277/480 Orange for 277/480 Yellow for 277/480 Service Conductor = Type RHW Feeder Conductors Below Grade or in Wet Locations = Type RHW Branch Conductors Below Grade or in Wet Locations = Type RIM Instrumentation and Control Wiring includes the following: 4-20 milliamp cable shall be 2/C #16 AWG, CU shielded, Belden #8719, or 3/C #16 AWG, CU shielded, Belden #8618, unless otherwise noted (UON). Multiple pair 2x2/C #18 AWG, twisted and shielded individual pairs, copper conductors, Belden #9368. Instrument Control Cable in conduit below grade and in wet locations. 2/C, 3/C, etc. #16 AWG THHN/THWN, CU Shielded, Anixter 2A-1600 Series. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet or junction box. Splices shall be held to a minimum. Where necessary, splice in readily accessible pull box, junction box, or outlet box. The insulation value of the splice shall equal that of the conductor. Splices and connections shall be made in an approved manner. No slices will be allowed for any cable installed underground. Wire and cable shall be of the proper size to fit under lug landings in accordance with UL listing. Where larger wire and cable is used for voltage drop & etc. which will not fit under UL listings, the Contractor shall provide proper wire & cable size under lugs and either pigtail 94-021.002:3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGa-7 to larger wire and cable or use power tap blocks. Provide insulation value equal to the wire and cable being used. f. Racewav Systems: All conduits shall be installed concealed in finished areas. Provide complete raceway systems for all conductors. All raceways shall be of a manufacturer subscribing to applicable NEMA and UL standards, and shall bear the UL label. Raceways shall be of sizes as indicated and required. Where sizes are not specifically indicated, provide sizes in accordance with the requirements of NEC. All raceways shall conform to the following: Use approved type couplings and connectors in all conduit runs and make all joints tight. Provide insulated bushings for all terminations in pipe sizes 11/4 -inch and larger. Provide expansion fittings and bonding conductors for all runs which cross building expansion joints. Provide waterproof fittings for all runs in wet locations such as exposed to weather, buried in slabs, etc. Fittings shall be as manufactured by O.A., Tomic, Raco, Appleton, Steel City, or T and B. Unless otherwise indicated, all wiring for branch circuits shall be #12 AWG in %-inch conduit (minimum %-inch in concrete slabs). All underground conduit shall be minimum size of one (1) inch. Provide seal -off fittings with moisture draws where conduits enter or leave a hazardous wiring area, chemical areas, or areas of widely different temperature and/or humidity. ' Provide the following types of raceways for the specific application or location indicated: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 94-021.002:7150 (1) Heavywall, Type II, Rigid, Schedule 80 PVC: (a) For all wiring runs embedded in concrete. (b) For all wiring runs buried underground, unless otherwise indicated. Note: all risers from below to above ground shall be PVC coated GRC. (c) For exposed wiring runs as noted on the Drawings. Conduit support shall not exceed 4 feet on center. (d) Embedded in concrete block. NOTE: Provide expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. (2) PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC/CR): Standard weight, PVC factory coated .040 mil. thickness: (a) Conduit exposed above grade in damp and wet locations. Seal threads and openings with compound PVC per factory requirements. (b) All sizes subject to abnormal conditions such as fumes or damp locations. Seal threads and openings with compound PVC per factory requirements. g. SGa-8 (c) Couplings, elbows, etc., shall be subject to same requirements as conduit with PVC coating. (d) 90 degree bends and vertical risers in or through concrete slabs and below to above ground transitions (e) Use in corrosive areas to include but not limited to digesters, basins, wet - wells, chlorine contact tanks, caustic soda, etc. (3) Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): (a) Conduit exposed above grade in dry locations (b) All sizes subject to abnormal conditions such as heat or cold (c) Couplings, elbows, etc., shall be subject to the same requirements as conduit (4) Flexible metal water tight conduit (LTC): (5) (a) For final connections to motors and other vibrating equipment (b) Overall length of flexible conduit shall not exceed 3'-0'. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): The use of EMT shall be allowed only when concealed inside a stud and sheet -rock type wall. Conduit Storage: All conduit materials shall be stored in a clean, dry environment. All conduit shall be stored on wood risers 6" above grade and shall be covered with suitable tarps or waterproof plastic sheeting. Conduit ends shall be covered to prevent entry ofd irt, dust or moisture. Conduits that exhibit shipping damage, dinged, dented, bent, rough weld joints, or otherwise damaged during storage shall not be installed for use in the project electrical system. Supports and Hangers: Provide supports and hangers as necessary and as required to ensure a good and substantial installation. Support raceways, fixtures, cabinets, boxes, etc., on approved types of trapeze hangers or wall brackets as manufactured by Unistrut or approved equal. Provide hanger rods securely fastened to or through the building structure for all trapezes, etc. Do not suspend from mechanical piping or ductwork. Perforated plumber's straps or wire will not be permitted. All supports, hangers, screws, bolts, etc., shall be stainless steel in corrosive areas to include but not limited to digesters, basins, wet -wells, chlorine contact tanks, caustic soda, etc. Use cadmium plated, or galvanized in non -corrosive areas. h. Outlets: Install all outlets in a secure and substantial manner and locate so as to be compatible with space, construction, and equipment requirements, and with the work of the other trades. Verify final outlet locations with Engineer prior to installation. Install all outlets plumb and in accessible locations. Flush outlets are to be installed with front of box or ring flush with the finished surface. All outlets are to be installed flush unless used in conjunction with exposed conduit system or unless otherwise indicated. If outlets are not installed plumb, flush, or in approved locations, relocate or reset and refinish at no additional cost to the Owner. Outlet Boxes: Provide nonmetallic boxes for all locations galvanized and malleable iron cast boxes not allowed U.O.N. Type FS, FD manufactured by Carlon or accepted equal. Provide 94-021.002:a M so 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 94-021-002:3150 SGa-9 malleable iron Type FS, FD in areas of physical damage. Provide explosion proof outlets and seal -offs as required in these areas. Back -to -Back: Outlets indicated on the drawings "back-to-back" are to be installed with a minimum of 6 -inch lateral separation between outlets for minimum sound transmission. "Through -the -wall" type boxes are not permitted. Fire Rated Walls: Maintain separation ofj-boxes of horizontal distance of24 inches box edge to edge of opposite sides of walls or partitions. Use steel outlet boxes or rated j -boxes not exceeding 16 square inches in area, providing the area of such opening does not aggregate more than 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall or partition area. In any event provide outlet boxes of proper type and design for the particular fixture or device to be installed. Boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton, Carlon or pre -approved equal. Pull Boxes: Provide nonmetallic or metal pulI boxes in raceway runs as required by NEC and job conditions. Install in accessible locations. Switch Outlets: Install 48 -inches above floor on Iatch side 4 inches to outside of doorframe of door. Verify door swing prior to installation. Use gang boxes for multiple device installation as required. Switches adjacent to double swing doors shall be located to be accessible with the door in its wide-open position. Receptacle Outlets: Install 48 -inches above floor in all general locations. Install at switch height where shown to be in combination. Install 18 -inches above floor in all labs, mechanical equipment rooms, and 6 -inches above counters. Other mounting heights to be as indicated on the Drawings. Devices and Plates: Switches: Provide the following flush switch devices where indicated and required. Verify color with Engineer prior to installation. Devices to be of rating required by the NEC for the load controlled. All devices to be specification grade, 120/277 volts, and shall be of the quiet type. All devices shall have screw-type terminals. Provide Hubbell, GE, or Leviton equal. Damp and Wet Locations 20 amp, Hubbell Presswitch 1281 - 1 Series 120-277 volt with 1750 neoprene cover Thermal Overload Switches: Provide horsepower rated thermal overload switches for all single-phase motors without an approved built-in overload device. Switches to be of size and number of poles as required and shall have suitable enclosures. Do not install on roof or exposed to the weather. Provide Allen Bradley Bulletin 600, Cutler -Hammer, GE, or acceptable equal. Size heater elements in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and the NEC. Receptacles: Provide the following receptacle devices where indicated and required. Verify color with Engineer prior to installation. All devices to be specification grade with screw type terminals. Provide Hubbell, GE, or Leviton equal. J• 20A -3W grounded duplex - 120 V Ground Fault (GFCI), 20 amp Duplex, wet locations (W.P.) Mount all W.P. outlets horizontally. Leviton #5362-I Leviton-6899-1 (p/n for ivory color) Crouse Hinds #WLRD Series with Leviton #5362-GY SGa-10 Lighting Equipment: Provide all lighting equipment and lamps as indicated on the Drawings and as called for in these Specifications. Provide all such equipment fully complete and prewired. Install all equipment in a secure and substantial manner, and in full accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide all such miscellaneous installation equipment such as supports, hangers, yokes, flanges, etc., as is necessary. Verify compatibility ofall fixtures with ceiling system specified by Engineer prior to purchase of fixtures. Fixtures (luminaries): All fixtures shall be weatherproof and suitable for efficient operation at the temperatures and conditions encountered unless otherwise noted. All fixtures shall bear the UL Iabel for its particular application. Install surface or pendant mounted luminaries true and straight. Ballasts: Ballasts shall be designed for reliable operation under an ambient temperature of 0°F cold environment, office and Iaboratory32°F. All ballasts shall be ETL-CMB certified Premium Class P, energy efficient UL approved, high power factor, equipped with built-in auto -resetting overload and overheat protective devices. Ballasts shall be GE Maxi Miser 1I or equal. Lamps: All lamps shall bear the label of GE Watt Miser II, or acceptable equal by Sylvania or Phillips. Verify lamp colors with Engineer prior to ordering. All incandescent lamps shall be rated for 130 volts. Verify that specified lamps will coordinate with indicated fixtures. Fluorescent lamps shall be lite white, energy-efficient, and rapid start. High intensity lamps as noted on drawings, manufacture same as fluorescent. k. Panelboards: Circuit Breakers for Switching Lights at Panelboards shall be identified type "SWD". Main, Neutral, and Ground Lugs and Buses shall have mechanical connectors for conductors. Panelboards shall be meet or exceed the following: Square D NQOD, 1 -Line or QMD for 120, 208 and 240 volts Square D NF, [-Line or QMD for 480 volts Special Features for each panel include: (1) Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit equipment ground conductors (2) Hinged front cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged trim cover (door -in -door) (3) 94421.002:3130 Transient Voltage Surge Arrester (TVSS): Provide and install to bottom of panelboard. Unit shall be rated for 90,000 maximum peak current with a peak nominal clamping voltage of 198 for 208/120V panels. Use MVC model MV200 SGa- II distrubuted by CED. Unit shall be rated for 200,000 maximum peak current for 480/277V panels. (4) Fungus proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for panel boards interior including circuit breakers and other components. I. Motor Control Centers (MCC): A new motor control center shall be installed as detailed on the Drawings. Provide variable frequency drives for motors as shown on drawings. The MCC shall be installed on a 4" high minimum concrete pad. The assembly shall be completely enclosed, free standing, with the vertical sections joined together to form one assembly. Access shall be from the front only. MCC shall include but shall not be limited to the following features: (1) NEMA Class II, Type B, in NEMA Type I, gasketed enclosure (2) Power Meter at incoming section for indicating total MCC 3-phase power, power factor, voltage and current. Use a Cutler -Hammer IQ Data Plus or pre -approved equal. (3) Power Protection 3-phase Monitor for sensing MCC phase loss, phase sequence, low voltage and high voltage. Use Time Mark model 269 or pre -approved equal. Power monitor trip contact shall be wired as a discrete input to Phonedialer. (4) Copper bus with a full ground bus bar installed at bottom across the entire width (5) 20 inch deep by 20 inch wide sections with vertical wireways (6) Gasketed bottom covers and ANSI -70 white interiors Each three-phase motor shall have the following optional devices mounted inside (inaccessible by operator) the individual MCC cubicle (bucket) as follows: Motor Circuit Protector, see one -line diagram for specified current rating NEMA rated magnetic starter, see one -line diagram for specified NEMA size Control Power Transformer(CPT) to provide separate 120V control power Pull -apart type terminal boards for control and power wiring Two auxiliary contacts per starter Each three-phase motor shall have the following optional devices mounted outside (on door, accessible by operator) the individual MCC cubicle (bucket) as follows: (1) (2) (3) "Hand -Off -Automatic" selector switch (HOA) Green "RUN" light, Red "OFF" Tight, Amber "AUTO" Tight (ROA) Run -Time Meter(RTM) with readout easily readable on cubicle door Pilot Devices and Relays: Selector switches shall be oiltight with 10 amp contact ratings. Pilot Lights shall be oiltight, 120V transformer -type with 50,000 -hour service life. Use AB 94-021.002:3150 SGa-12 800T, C -H 10250T or equal. Relays shall be 1 1 5 VAC with 10 amp contact ratings case enclosed. Use AB 700N or equal. Refer to the Speci fication Gb forother control requirements utilizing Phonedialer time delay relays, time clocks, auxiliary relays and other control devices. Identification: Top of Right Section: engraved 3" x 5" phenolic indicating MCC designation, "MCC", Section 1, voltage, amperes, phase, wiring characteristics, source of feed, date of manufacture, and manufacturer's drawing and/or order number. Incoming Cubicle: engraved 3" x 5" phenolic indicating the following: "Incoming Section" voltage, phase, Fed from Main Service Disconnect. Each Cubicle: engraved 3" x 5" phenolic indicating the following: "Description of Load served, Equipment Tag/Number, HP & FLA" m. Variable Frequency Drives: Refer to Specification for Variable Frequency Drives n. Power Factor Correction: Install power factor correction capacitors for any motor 25 hp and larger if motor is not VFD controlled. Provide a capacitor properly sized to match motor horsepower and speed with integral fusing and fuse blown lights and connect to load side of motor starter. Capacotor shall increase power factor of each motor to at least 95%. 4. HEATING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT a. Electrical components: Contractor shall install power to all unit heaters. b. Phase Protection: All motors 1 HP and above using 3 phase power shall have protection for phase reversal, loss of phase or low voltage of 10% voltage drop or greater on any one phase. Model D60 Cutler -Hammer or approved equal by Time Mark or Square "D". 5. INSTALLATION: a. All raceway installations shall meet or exceed requirements of the NEC. b. Quality Assurance: The entire system shall be coordinated and supplied by a qualified, approved contractor who is regularly engaged in the business of installing industrial electrical power, lighting, controls and instrumentation. c. Trenching: All trenching for buried cable or conduit shall be back-filled with selected material mechanically tamped into place along the sides of the cable/conduit or duct -bank and up to a level six inches above the top of the cable/conduit in lifts not to exceed six inches. The remaining backfill shall be consolidated by mechanical tamping in 6 -inch layers. All trench compaction shall be to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). Buried conduit shall have a minimum cover of 30 -inches, except conduits with conductors over 600 volts which shall have a minimum of 94-021.002:3150 SGa- 13 36 -inches cover and be located no closer than 5 feet horizontal, when parallel to other buried pipelines. Primary high voltage underground feeders shall be 42 -inches below finished grade. d. Raceways: Route conduit concealed wherever possible. The changing ofthe location ofthe outlets to conform to these conditions shall be considered as a requirement of this Contract, and no extra compensation will be allowed for this work. Route all conduits either parallel or perpendicular to walls and structural members, always avoiding proximity to sources of heat such as flues, hot water lines, etc. Conduit runs embedded in concrete or underground may be installed direct (augular) to fullest practical extent. Locate raceways so as not to endanger the strength of any structural members. All runs pertinent to the building structural system shall be installed only when and in a manner as approved by the Engineer. Actual conduit runs are not necessarily indicated, but are to be installed in the most feasible manner and shall be coordinated with building construction and work ofthe other crafts. Outlets shown connected together must be wired on the same circuit. All bends shall be made by the use of an approved bending tool. A1145 -degree and 90 -degree bends in conduit 11/4 -inch size and larger shall be made with a hydraulic bender. Conduits that are permitted to be bent shall be bent to not less than the same radius as factory conduit fittings. Cut all conduits square and ream all cuts to remove burrs. All bends shall be free from dents or flattened surfaces. Not more than the equivalent of four quarter bends shall be used in any run between terminals at cabinets, outlets, and junction or pull boxes. Boxes shall be located in accessible locations. All parts of the conduit system shall be protected against damage during construction. All conduits shall be securely fixed in position to avoid displacement due to other construction activities and shall be maintained in this required position until the work is accepted. Conduits extending out of floors, walls, ceilings, etc., that will be exposed to possible damage during construction, shall be boxed -in, sleeved or otherwise protected during and after installation. Exercise all necessary precautions during the construction period to prevent entry or accumulation of moisture, dust, concrete, and all foreign matter into the raceway system. All temporary ends of conduit shall be capped with threaded caps or plugs during construction to prevent the entrance of foreign material. Prior to pulling in wire and cable, all conduits shall be cleared by pulling a stiff wire brush of same size as the conduit, through the conduit. This cleaning shall be such that it removes all foreign matter, including water, from the conduit. The boxes in which the conduit terminates shall be cleaned of concrete, mortar, or other foreign matter, and all threads in boxes shall be left clean and true upon completion of the work. All spare conduits installed for future use shall be left with a suitable pull wire in place and shall be capped with a flush plug and coupling. Tapes, plastic sheeting and other forms of temporary covers shall not be used to cap conduits during construction. Al I fittings on conduit systems having threaded connections shall be made up tight with full thread engagement and with a minimum of wrench work. Joints shall provide structural rigidity and low electrical resistance across the joints. Metallic conduit runs into metal boxes or cabinets not equipped with threaded hubs shall be made up using a Myers hub or approved equal unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. All open conduit ends shall have 94-021.002:300 34 SGa- 14 bushings unless other terminations are shown. Threaded joints shall be made up by turning, if possible, from a point where a bend in the conduit occurs. Patch all galvanized holidays with 3 coats of "LPS" brand cold galvanize. All roof penetrations made by electrical contractor must conform to the Contractor's standard criteria and shall be subject to general contractor's authorized roofing contractor, and general contractor shall pay all such costs, therefore, directly to such roofing contractor upon his demand. Condu its penetrating through fire -rated walls and floor slabs shall be sealed against the spread of fire and products of combustion with smoke rating of the floor or wall through which the conduits pass. See Drawings for additional requirements. Each circuit shall be extended from a rigid conduit termination to a motor in a metal flexible conduit (liquidtight-LTC). Each circuit shall be installed so that conductors and terminal connections will not be damaged by machine vibration. Conduit Vents and Drains: A sufficient number of vents (breathers) and drains shall be installed to ensure adequate drainage. All vents and drains shall be thoroughly cleaned to ensure proper operation. Drains or drain seals shall be provided at the low point of long vertical or horizontal runs of conduit. Use "Duxseal" to plug any open-end conduits below area grade to prevent entry of water. Top entry of conduit into equipment such as motors, etc., shall be avoided. Where top entry is necessary, a drain shall be installed. Vertical loops in conduit runs shall be avoided if possible, but when they are necessary; the proper fittings with drain shall be installed. e. Underground or concrete encased: All risers from underground installations shall be PVC - coated GRC and shall have the upper side ofa coupling located 3 inches above the encasement with all empty conduits plugged. End bells shall be installed on all conduits entering manholes, vaults, cable trenches, etc. All installations under roadways shall be concrete encased. Encase all groups of process piping under roadway crossings and intersections with red -dyed, 3000 -psi concrete mixed with pea sized aggregate. Install 4" cement bricks 5'-0" on centers (or less) below all concrete encased conduit runs to allow concrete to fully surround the conduits. All process piping encasement locations shall be approved by engineer. Other encasements shall be as indicated on the plans. An alternative to encasement is to sleeve each roadway crossing conduit with schedule SO PVC pipe and extend pipe 5 feet beyond either side of roadway. Provide 12" of pea gravel as bedding material surrounding all sides of underground conduit runs. Gravel fill shall be placed only on earth back-filled conduits. Pea gravel shall not be used at concrete encased locations. 94-021.00273150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGa- 15 All underground conduit shall be continuously supported from interlocking plastic spacers at 5'-0" centers. Provide intermediate and top interlocking spacers as necessary to support all conduits at 5'-O" centers. Stake all underground conduits to anchor and prevent flotation or displacement of condu its during conduit placement, encasement or backfilloperations. Tape all supports with non-magnetic fiberglass banding tapes. Provide concrete reinforcing bar stakes #4 or larger driven into earth. Provide 6" wide yellow plastic marking tapes overall underground conduits. Tapes shall be installed in 12" lifts above the conduits during backfill. Space tapes 12" apart laterally, beginning 12" beyond each side of conduit runs. Tapes shall be 12" above conduits and 12" below grade, minimum. Tapes shall be continuous over the conduit runs. Tapes shall be marked "Buried Electric Line". Communication lines shall be blue and continuously marked. f. Raceways and Cable Supports: Conduits shall be rigidly supported to prevent deflection. Maximum spacing should not exceed that permitted by N.E.C. Table 346-12. Supports shall be provided on both sides of bends or elbows and within three feet of any outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Where conduits are to be terminated at equipment subject to vibration, terminations shall be made with approved flexible (LTC) conduit. Conduit terminated at metal clad equipment enclosures such as motor control, switchgear, etc., shall be adequately supported to prevent distortion of equipment enclosure due to stresses imparted by conduit. Conduit and conduit fittings shall not be welded to any structure. Properly designed structural clamps shall be used where conduit is supported from structural steel members or other form of bolted supports. Drilling or burning of holes in structural steel members will not be permitted. Supports may be welded to structural steel members only approved by the Engineer, by tested, certified electricians. Conduit supports shall be secured to concrete work by approved expansion anchors and bolts, or by inserts set at the time the concrete is poured. No wood, lead, or other makeshift plugs driven into holes shall be used. Anchors shall be as manufactured by "Hilti" or approved equal. Anchors shall be stainless steel, 1/4" diameter minimum sized with a 5X minimum load safety factor. Secure all raceway systems in building structure in a rigid and secure manner using approved type fasteners such as"Caddy Clips" or similar type of other manufacturer. Conduit hangers, clamps, light fixtures, supports, etc., shall be fastened to joists or beams only. Do not support from bottom of roof decking or mechanical ductwork. Conduits leaving rack shall be offset up or down so that future conduits may be installed in the remaining space. Horizontal 90° conduit bends in pipe racks shall be avoided unless specifically shown on the Contract Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Access to conduit racks shall be provided for wire or cable pulling at all fittings, sleeves, and all other pull points, even after future conduits are added tof ll the racks. Finished racks shall provide 25 percent spare capacity where multiple conduit runs are installed. Conduit racks shall initially pass under conduits. Hangers shall be sized and threaded to add a lower trapeze rack below installed racks. All conduit bodies shall be located 7/8" minimum from all wall, ceiling or structural surfaces. 94-021002:3150 g• 94-021.002:3150 SGa-16 Identify all exposed conduits with manufactured self -adhering pressure sensitive tags at junction boxes and terminations. Show voltage, source circuit number(s) and system served in 1" high letters. Cable supports of approved design shall be used in vertical runs ofconduitas required by the N.E.C.; provide wiremesh Kellums brand supports. Telephone and Communication Raceway: A two inch minimum size conduit shall be installed underground from nearest telephone pedestal into office building. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with local telephone company to locate the phone pedestal and verify the actual minimum conduit size requirement. Grounding: Ground the entire electrical distribution system, including all raceways, outlets, fixtures, equipment, etc., in full accord with the NEC. The Contractor shall provide separate grounding conductor in all raceways or sections of raceways. The Contractor shall provide separate grounding jumper from the screw of all receptacle devices to the metallic box in which mounted. Jumper may attach to box with a separate grounding screw or clip device. Jumpers may be eliminated if approved self -grounding devices are used. All conductors used for grounding and bonding purposes shall be copper only. Insulation color of #6 or smaller wires shall be green. Conductors larger than #6 shall be marked per exception #1 of NEC 250-57. Bond neutral conductors and raceway systems at the main service, then extend and connect to continuous, metallic underground cold water piping supply system at the point where it enters the building. Extension is to be made with copper conductor housed in rigid steel or PVC conduit where required, both sized per NEC. Connection is to be made to the water pipe with an approved clamp, which will bond both the conduit and the conductor to the water pipe. Provide grounding jumpers around the water meter of same size as main service ground. Provide driven ground rod or rods to properly ground the system per the NEC. Connect the ground to each building steel structure including handrails and metal structures All ground connections to equipment shall be made with approved solderless connectors and bolted to the equipment to be grounded. All grounding taps and connections to column and/or reinforcing steel shall be made by the exothermic process where bolted connections are not indicated on the Drawings. Connections to wire mesh, metal ducts, etc., may be brazed. All motor feeders and main feeders shall be grounded through the conduit system (in addition to the equipment ground wire) with a grounding bushing at each end. A bare copper wire, sized per code, shall be connected from the grounding bushing to the motor frame. Motor grounds shall not be grounded to the conduit entrance box, but shall connect direct to the frame. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGa-17 AH vent stacks and drainpipes shall be grounded with a #8 extra flexible wire to the ground grid system via the building steel, the ground grid, or other approved means. Connections to the vent stacks and drainpipes shall be made in an approved manner. All heating and ventilation duct runs containing flexible joints shall be grounded in a minimum of two places with a #12 extra flexible wire and grounding lug. Connections shall be made with a machine screw, hex nut, and lock washers. Sheet metal screws are not acceptable. Installation of grounding lugs must be coordinated with the Sheet Metal Contractor. Refer to the Mechanical Drawings for quantity and sizes of pipes and ducts. Underground metal pipes shall be connected to the ground system. All telephone term i nal backboards shall be provided with a#2 AWG insulated ground wire. h. Main Perimeter Groundin¢ Grid: J. 94-021.002:3150 A complete underground perimeter grounding grid system shall be provided per drawings with driven rods, underground bus encircling major buildings, connections to building steel, and shall have direct wire connections to unit substations and certain heavy equipment. The main conductors of the grounding grid shall be buried a minimum 30" below finished grade outside of building foundations. Conductors under buildings shall be laid directly below the building foundation. Conductors shall be laid slack to allow for ground movement. The grounding grid loop shall be bonded to metal structures at intervals specified on the drawings not to exceed 25 feet. Motor Wiring: The Contractor shall be responsible for mounting all starters, control devices and other electrical equipment whether specified herein or in other parts of these Specifications, except where such equipment is factory -mounted on the drive equipment. All starters shall be complete with three overload heaters, short circuit protection and shall conform to NEC and NEMA requirements. IEC and general purpose starters shall not be used. All wiring shall be furnished including conduit, wire, junction boxes, disconnecting switches, over -current protection, etc., not specified elsewhere in this Specification to and between all motors, starters, control devices and as well as factory mounted on the driven equipment. The Contractor shall provide horsepower rated disconnect switches for all motors where shown on the Drawings. Provide enclosure as required for location. Provide horsepower rated thermal overload switches for each motor furnished single phase, 120 volts, and without a built-in approved overload device. All switches shall conform to requirements as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Panelboards: Install ground fault circuit interrupter devices as required in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters." Mounting heights: Top trip 74 inches above finished floor, except as indicated. SGa- 18 k. Branch Circu its: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, branch circuit homeruns shall be arranged as follows: For two -wire systems, no more than two circuits shall be in a single conduit. Additional circuits in a common conduit will be allowed provided wires are derated according to the NEC. Where homerun circuit numbers are shown on Drawings, such numbers shall be followed in connecting circuits to switchgear and to panelboards. Each branch circuit homerun containing two or more circuits with a common neutral shall be connected to the circuit breaker or switch in a three -wire of four -wire panelboard in such a manner that no two ofthe circuits will be fed from the same phase. Cutting and Repairing: The Contractor shall be responsible for all drilling, channeling, chasing, cutting, etc., into or onto the structures as required for the electrical work. All work is to be carefully laid out in advance and coordinated with other trades and equipment so as to minimize any disturbance or damage to structures, piping or other equipment. Any damage done to the piping, building structure, finishes or equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and such damage shal I be repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer and at no expense to the Owner. m. Construction Power and Lighting: The Contractor shall provide all temporary power, lighting, and wiring as required during the construction period for the use of all the trades. Temporary facilities shall be installed per NEC and are to be properly grounded throughout. Provide approved ground fault interrupter devices for all temporary circuits as required by NEC and OSHA. All temporary facilities shall be governed by OSHA requirements. Remove all temporary wiring, outlets, etc., upon completion. n. Outages: Power outages when necessary shall be scheduled in advance with the Owner and shall be of minimum duration. Power shall be cut at only such times as Owner may approve. o. Maintenance Consideration: Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofequi pment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. p. Testing: When the entire electrical systems have been completed, the Contractor shall test the wiring and shall notify the Engineer when such tests are to be performed. The Contractor will be required to furnish apparatus necessary for the testing and shall have the systems in proper condition for service with all circuits suitably identified and tagged. The systems shall be entirely free from unintentional grounds, short circuits, and other defects. After the lighting fixtures, motors, controls, heaters, and all other current consuming devices have been connected to the system, the Contractor shall again go over the systems and satisfy the Engineer as to their proper operation, including the proper rotation of all motors. The grounding system shall be installed and completely tested prior to testing the electrical systems. 94-021.0021150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electrical and 1 & C Contractor shall correct or replace any malfunctioning products they supplied at no extra cost to the owner. A record of all test results shall be forwarded to the 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGa- l 9 Engineer. Cable ends shall be weatherproofed with electrical tape after testing each cable if not inside a covered building or enclosure. The Contractor shall be responsible for and coordinate proper phase rotation connections made by the serving utility company prior to energizing main service equipment. q. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work and testing, at a time to be designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner the operation of the entire electrical and control installations. r. Chan Ur): Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises in a clean, orderly condition. Clean all electrical equipment and materials of all foreign matter. Clean all light fixtures using only methods and materials as recommended by the manufacturer. 94.021.002:3150 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATION Gb INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS . PURPOSE: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment and supplies and of performing all operations needed to install a complete electrical control system as required by the Drawings and Specifications. The work shall include the provision and installation of such necessary material and devices that are neither indicated on the Drawings nor specifically mentioned in the Specifications but which are required for the successful operation ofthe entire control system as detailed in the Contract Documents and/or which are requ ired to complete the entire control system in compliance with applicable codes. The Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation because of this requirement. 2. OPERATION OF PLANT EOUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS: The following is a summary of the equipment operations at the new Ranch at Roaring Fork Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP). The intention is to coordinate all electrical and control items such that each item of equipment operates as intended in the design. a. Overview: 94-0210021150 (l) The existing headworks shall continue to function in the same capacity for the new WWTP. The existing pump station shall also remain in service, although it shall only operate in emergency conditions. In case of overflow or failure of the new WWTP, influent shall be routed to the pump station and pumped to the existing package plant. Under normal conditions the existing plant shall serve as a digester. All of the existing equipment and controls shall remain in tact. (2) Inside of the existing pump station is a chart recorder which is attached to a level sensor at the headworks. Influent flows shall continue to be monitored in this manner so no alterations are necessary. (3) A new 8 -inch sewer pipe shall redirect influent from the existing headworks to a selector channel at the head of the new WWTP. The volume ofthe selector channel shall provide a 5 to 10 minute detention time for the incoming wastewater. Air shall be supplied to the channel. (4) The Aeration Basin in the new WWTP shall have two identical 5 Hp vertical turbine mixers which shall operate almost constantly. Air shall be supplied to the mixers by two identical 20 Hp positive displacement blowers. Each blower is capable of providing the 200 SCFM required for the entire the basin. Therefore only one shall be in operation at any given time and the other shall serve as a backup unit. An alarm shall be activated and the phone dialer shall notify the Operator if either blower fails. (5) The contents of the aeration basin shall flow via an 8 -inch flare through a side inlet of the clarifier. The octagonal clarifier shall have a diameter of twenty-two feet. A flocculating feedwell shall be used to promote flocculation of the influent and to prevent short-circuiting and sludge blanket scour. The clarifier shall have two steel SGb-2 rake arms and one scum skimming mechanism and scum box. The shaft drive unit shall be powered by a 1/2 Hp TEFC motor suitable for 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power. (6) Four wet wells are located in the corners of the clarifier, and each performs a different function. A 2 Hp submersible pump in one of the wet wells shall convey return activated sludge (RAS) from the clarifier to the selector channel. The RAS pump shall operate almost continuously. A second wet well shall also have a 2 Hp submersible pump which shall pump waste activated sludge (WAS) from the clarifier to the existing package plant for digestion. The operation ofthe WAS pump shall be determined by the operator and controlled by a programmable 7 -day, 24 hour timer. Because both the RAS and WAS wet wells are supplied with sludge from the clarifier, the WAS pump shall serve as an emergency backup unit to the RAS pump. The last of the three submersible pumps is the SCUM pump, which is operated by float switches. The SCUM is located in a separate wet well and is identical to the WAS unit. In case of failure for either the WAS or SCUM pump, a backup submersible unit shall be kept in storage. Only the SCUM wet well shall have a low level alarm. The Phonedialer shall be notify the Operator if the low level alarm is activated. (7) Using a series of plug valves, the piping layout shall allow flows from each of the pumps to route flows to either the digester or back to the head of the plant at the selector channel. Under normal operating conditions, the RAS shall be pumped to the selector channel; the WAS and scum shall be pumped to the digester. The direction of flow can only be altered via manually controlled valves. Two magnetic flow meters with remote readouts located in the office control panel shall be used to monitor flows from both the RAS, WAS, and SCUM pumps. (8) The remaining wet well receives treated effluent from the clarifier trough and mixes in 10% sodium hypochlorite solution. The solution is pumped from a 120 VAC metering pump, which is located in the equipment room near two 55 gallon drums which contains the solution. A small mixer shall be used to agitate the contents ofthe wet well. Power to the mixer is provided by a 0.65 Hp TEFC motor. Prior to discharge from the wet well, the effluent flows over a 90° V -notch weir for discharge measurement. An ultrasonic level meter, mounted above a stilling well, shall continuously monitor the level of water going over the weir in the well, and therefore the flow rate as well. The ultrasonic level meter shall also provide a signal to the chlorine metering pump so it can vary the amount of solution pumped to the wet well, depending on the flow rate. The readout from the sensor shall be located in the office, and the chart recorder shall provide a continuous recording of these flows. (9) 94021.002:3150 Chlorine contact shall be achieved in the outfall pipe. At the peak day flow rate of 0.25 MGD, the 596 feet of 14 -inch outfall pipe, plus the 110 feet of 8 -inch outfall pipe and 375 gallons of constant effluent volume in the chlorine mixing well, shall provide just over the required 30 minute contact time. The discharge point shall remain in Sopris Creek at a point further downstream, in conformance with the new routing of the Creek, and also above the I00 year flood elevation. 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGb-3 3. PROCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION a. AERATION BASIN FILLING: Influent from the selector channel continuously flows into the Aeration Basin. b. MIXING: The mixers (MXRI and MXR2) shall operate continuously when the Operator sets the selector swtich to ON. The mixers shall stop when the selector switch is placed in OFF. c. AERATION: While the Aeration Basin is being filled, Blower #1 (BLWRI) shall operate continuously when the Operator sets the selector switch to ON. Blower #2 (BLWR2) shall serve as a backup unit in case BLWRI is removed from service. BLWR2 shall operate continuously when the Operator sets the se lector switch to ON. Each blower shall stop when its associated selector swich is set to OFF. (1) Initially there shall be two blowers (BLWRI and BLWR2) with provisions for one future blower(BLWR3). Both of the blowers shall be operational, BLWR1 shall be active and BLWR2 shall serve as backup. However each blower shall also serve as a backup for the other in case of failure. The blowers shall be identical models each with a variable frequency drive (VFD), so each unit shall be able to adjust the supply of air required for the Aeration Basin. (2) BLWR 1 and BLWR2: A motor circuit protector in the MCC serves as the disconnect for each blower's variable frequency drive (VFD) which supplies 460 VAC, three phase power. The MCC is located in the office. Running speed shall be controlled by manually inputting a speed into the controller keypad at the VFD. Following a power outage, the VFDs shall be manually restarted. (3) Future Blower #3 (BLWR3) shall be identical to BLWR1 and BLWR2 with a VFD. (4) The Phonedialer shall notify the Operator if either blower fails. f. CLARIFIER: The Clarifier shall operate continuously when the Operator sets the selector switch in ON. The Clarifier shall shut down when the selector switch is set to OFF from the ON position. An overload protection device shall be provided with the Clarifier. The overload device shall be actuated by torque generated from the main drive, which shall activate two independently adjustable switches (the alarm switch (LS I) set at 100 percent of design running torque and the motor cutoff switch (LS2) set at 120 percent of design running torque). These two switches shall be factory adjusted to accurately calibrate the alarm torque value and the overload position. The Contractor shall connect the alarm switch (LS 1) to the Phonedialer as required per manufacturer's recommendation. The Phonedialer shall notify the Operator of a clarifier high torque alarm if the alarm switch (LSI) is activated. The Contractor shall connect the motor cutoff switch (LS2) to the clarifier starter control circuit as required per manufacturer's recommendations. LS2 shall shut-offdrive motor if initiated. g. 94-D21.002:31SO SCUM PUMP: The pump shall operate continuously when the Operator sets the selector switch in HAND. The pump shall shut down when the selector switch is set to OFF from either the HAND or AUTO position. When the selector switch is place in AUTO, the SCUM Pump shall operate using float switches. The SCUM Pump shall start when LSH1 is SGb-4 activated. The SCUM Pump shall stop when LSLI is activated. The Plionedialer shall contact the Operator if the low level float switch (LSLL1) is activated. h. WAS PUMP: The pump shall operate continuously when the Operator sets the selector switch in HAND. The pump shall shut down when the selector switch is set to OFF from either the HAND or AUTO position. When the selector switch is placed in AUTO, the WAS Pump shall operate using a programmable 7 -day, 24-hour timer (TMR 1) where the Operator may select any day (or days) and a time duration for the pump to run. A flowmeter (FT2) on the discharge side of the pump shall measure flow and a 4-20mA signal shall be connected to a remote indicator (F12) for displaying the flow rate at the PCP. i. RAS PUMP: The RAS pump shall operate continuously when the selector switch is placed in ON. The RAS pump shall stop when the selector switch is set to OFF. An auxilliary contact in the pump starter shall be used as a fail signal. The Phonedialer shall notify the Operator if the RAS Pump fail signal is activated. A flowmeter (FTI ) on the discharge side of the pump shall measure flow and a 4-20mA signal shall be connected to a remote indicator (FI1) for displaying the flow rate at the PCP. j. CHLORINE MIXING AND FEED: The chlorine metering pump (CLMP) shall be plugged into a receptacle located near the chlorine equipment in the northeast corner of the equipment building. CLMP shall inject chlorine into the water in proportion to a 4-20 mA signal from the effluent Ultrasonic Level Transmitter (LEI, LT1). n. EFFLUENT FLOW MEASUREMENT: The effluent flow will be measured by an ultrasonic level transmitter (LEI, LTI) and shall be provided as required by Specification "Flow Measurement Equipment". The 4-20 maDC signal from the flowmeter shall be input to the chlorine metering pump (CLMP) and the 24-hour circular chart recorder (FIR 1) via a current loop. o. FLOOD ALARMS: A level switch for water on the floor alarm (LSWF) shall be located near the hatch in the equipment room and shall cause an alarm condition. The Phonedialer will notify the Operator if the water level rises to contact the sensor. P. 94.02t.002:3150 ALARMS: A new alarm system shall be provided with the Plant Control Panel (PCP) at the MCC located inside office. The alarm system consists of a Phone Dialer (PHD), contact closures for each alarm condition a common alarm acknowledgement pushbutton and other controls and equipment. (1) The phone dialer shall contact the operator and deliver a voice message corresponding to the situation at the plant. The operator should be notified if one of the following occurs: • Either Blower (BLWRI, BLWR2) does not work. • Water level in scum wet well is too low (LSLL1). • Building temperature is too low (TSL I, TSL2, TSL3). • Water on the floor alarm (LSWF). • Clarifier overload switch (LS2). • Intrusion Alarm. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGb-5 r. HEATING AND VENTILATING: Provide and install control and power wiring, conduit, circuit breakers. contacts, relays, sNritches. and other items as required to make the heating and ventilating equipment function as described in Specification "Heating and Ventilating". s. INTRUSION ALARM: Intrusion Limit switches shall be located at each entry door. An enable/disable selector switch shall be located at the Plant Control Panel (PCP). Switches shall be monitored and alarms controlled as follows: A "building intrusion" alarm condition shall be initiated 20 seconds (programmable from 0 to 60 sec) aftera door is opened when the selector switch is in the enabled position. Alarm condition shall be delayed 30 seconds after the selector switch is placed in the enable position. When operator enters plant he has 20 seconds to disable (switch intrusion selector to disable) the intrusion alarm. Upon leaving the plant the operator shall enable intrusion alarm by switching intrusion selector to enable. Operator has 30 seconds (programmable from 0 to 60 sec) to exit the plant. Any intrusion alarm will turn on a red flashing light on PCP and initiate an alarm (closed contact) to the phone dialer. Use 24VAC for this alarm system. t. All three phase motors shall be protected from poor power quality, phase loss/reversal, undervoltage, overvoltage, with time delay by a power monitor as shown on the drawings. Provide additional control relays for the power quality monitoring equipment as needed. u. All electrical and control work requiring connections or modifications to control panels or equipment provided by equipment manufacturers shall be carefully coordinated by the Contractor with the equipment manufacturers. 4. PLANT CONTROL PANEL (PCP): The PCP, located in the Office Room MCC, consists of an alarm system detailed previously and the Operator interface for control and monitoring. The indicators on the PCP shall allow the operator to monitor and control some of the process instrumentation and equipment in the new Ranch at Roaring Fork WWTP. All control hardware, software, and wiring required to operate the equipment at this facility shall be designed, provided, and installed under this contract. Submittal information, detailed shop drawings, installation of PCP equipment, the actual connection of signal wires to the PCP equipment, and system programming and startup assistance for the PCP shall be provided by the Controls Systems Integrator (CSI). The routing of the conduit and signal wires to terminal blocks in the PCP central terminal unit, and the verification of signal integrity and function prior to the actual termination of the wires to the PCP equipment shall be a part of the Contract work. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate all work with the CSI. a. PCP architecture: The new equipment in the PCP shall include the following: (1) A phone dialer mounted in the door. (2) A Ultrasonic Level Transmitter (LT 1) and level indicator (LI 1) mounted in the door. (3) A two -channel circular chart recorder (FIR1) to monitor flows from LT I mounted in the door. (4) Two remote indicators for flowmeter (FII and FI2) mounted in the door (5) Intrusion Alarm two -position black selector switch with "Enable/Disable" legend plate and a flashing red pilot light with "Intrusion Alarm" legend. b. A functional description and input/output listing for the Plant Control Panel and Phonedialer are provided in the signal list: 94-021.002:3ISO SGb-6 Alarms: Refer to the Alarms description in this Specification for the functioning of the Phonedialer with the various alarm signals. c. Acceptable System Integrators include: UCEC 303-425-1990 Big Sky Services, Inc. 303 904-8115 Amwest Control 303 289-2115 Mountain Peak Controls, Inc. 303-798-3534 Timberline Electric & Control Corp. 303-697-0440 5. SIGNAL LIST a. A listing of the signals to the plant control panel and phone dialer is furnished following: b. Discrete signals to PCP (signals to be from dry contacts suitable for 120 VAC, 100 ma minimum rating): (1) Blower #1 VFD, Motor Protector Fail (2) Blower #2 VFD, Motor Protector Fail (3) (Future) Blower #3 VFD, Motor Protector Fail (4) Level Switch, Float, LSH1, SCUM Pump Start (Elev. XXXX, ADJ. +1- 2ft). (5) Level Switch, Float, LSL1, SCUM Pump Stop (Elev. XXXX, ADJ. +/- 2ft). (6) Level Switch, Float, LSLL1, SCUM Pump Wetwell Low Level (Elev. XXXX) (7) RAS Pump Fail (8) Level Switch, Float, LSI -1I2, Chlorine Mixing Clearwell, High Level (Elev. XXXX) (9) Temperature Switch, TSLI, Equipment Room Low Temperature (10) Temperature Switch, TSL2, Clarifier Room Low Temperature (11) Temperature Switch, TSL3, Office Room Low Temperature (12) Water On Floor Sensor, LSWF, Equipment Building Water on Floor Alarm (13) Intrusion Alarm c. Discrete alarm signals to Phoned ialer (signals to be dry contact rated for 10 amps, 120 VAC): (1) Phonedialer Alarm #1, Blower #1 or Blower #2 Failure Alarm (2) Phonedialer Alarm #2, SCUM Wetwell Low Level Alarm (LSLL1) (3) Phonedialer Alarm #3, Clarifier, Equipment, Office Building Low Temperature Alarm (TSLI, TSL2, TSL3) (4) Phonedialer Alarm #4, LSWF, Equipment Room Water on Floor Alarm (5) Intrusion Alarm d. Analog display signals at Plant Control Panel (4-20 maDC, maximum resistive load of 1000 ohms): (1) (2) (3) e. Timers: 94-021.002:3150 Flowmeter #1, (FT1, FI!), RAS pump Flow, gpm Flowmeter #2, (FT2, F12), WAS pump Flow, gpm Ultrasonic Level Transmitter #3, (LT1), Effluent Flow, gpm (1) Timer 1 (TMRI ), WAS pump starter duration timer 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGb-7 f. Contractor shall request from the Engineer all equipment numbers, control setpoints, or device numbers designated "XXX X" in this Section. The request must be made 30 days minimum prior to final testing and start-up proceedings. 6. CONTROL EOUIPMENT: Equipment supplied to control the operation of the plant shall be from one manufacturer as nearly as possible. The Contractor is responsible that equipment provided for any part of an operation be compatible with other parts. Small piping parts, connection devices, auxiliary switches or any other equipment required due to differences in manufactured equipment shall be supplied as a part of the system at no extra cost to the Owner. No electrical components shall be mounted to or secured from vibrating process equipment. a. Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights: Units shall be heavy duty, oiltight, as manufactured by Cutler -Hammer (Type T), Square D, Allen Bradley or Engineer approved equal. Pilot lights Transformer type. Units installed in existing equipment shall match the existing when possible. b. Running Time Meter: Meters (RTM) shall be panel -mounted and have a synchronous motor which drives six -digit readout wheels to indicate the total time the unit is energized. Range shall be 99999.9 hours. Unit shall be non-resettable. Meters shall be as manufactured by Veeder-Root, Red Lion, or Engineer approved equal. c. Operations Cycle Counter: An operations cycle counter shall totalize the number of times each pump motor and each pump in the injection building is started. Mount counter insiade local PLC panel. It shall be non-resettable, count four figures, and operate on 120 VAC. Acceptable manufacturers are Veeder-Root, Red Lion, or Engineer approved equal. d. Control Relays: Standard control relays shall be multi -circuit relays with 120V coil and self-cleaning contacts. Timing relays shall be adjustable solid state type. Types and number of contacts shall be as required. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120V. Terminals shall be screw-type, for mounting in control panel. Control relays shall be 300V industrial type, similar and equal to Allen-Bradley 700N. e. Temperature Switches: (TSL1, TSL2, TSH3) The temperature switches for low building temperature alarms and ventilation equipment control shall be of the line voltage, hydraulic capillary type with SPDT contacts rated for 22A resistive at 120VAC and with a setpoint range of 30 to 100° F with a 3.5° F differential; Dayton 2E206 or Engineer approved equal. Thermostats for the heaters are to be provided as required by the heating and ventilation specification. f. Provide a Control Power transformer and circuit breakers as required for control power for all controls and instrumentation for the PCP and as shown on the drawings. g. Terminals: Provide for all field connections. Buchanan, Connectron, or Marathon. h. Name Tags: Metal for lights and switches by device manufacturer, and Phenolic for equipment and process equipment identification. 3/16 -inch lettering engraved to white core. Attach with brass screws. 94-021.002:3150 J. SGb-8 Digital Indicators: Panel mounted, 4 - 201naDC input, 31A digit, 'A -inch minimum numeral height, LED display for 120 VAC operation; by Veeder-Root. Red Lion, or Engineer approved equal. Float Switches: (LSLLI, LSLI, LSHI) Each float shall consist of a mercury switch hermetically sealed in a polypropylene float and connected to its own conductor cable. The cable shall be Type SO with a neoprene jacket, with three #19 conductors and 250 -volt insulation. The float switch shall be similar and equal to Flygt Model ENH-10 Liquid Level Sensors. k. Miscellaneous: (1) Incoming power to the PCP shall be protected by a circuit breaker. Control wire shall be 14 gauge M.T.W., or accepted equal. (2) All other equipment required to perform functions as described under Performance Section and individual Equipment Control Sections. All wiring shall be neatly routed in Panduit Raceway. I. Control Cable Marking: All control wiring shall be marked corresponding to numbering system used on shop drawings at all conductor terminations and splices. Either conductor markers or marked terminal blocks are acceptable. Further identifications using colored insulation shall be used to differentiate types of signals. m. Provide any other miscellaneous equipment required to perform all functions as described under PROCESS CONTROL above and individual equipment control sections of these Specifications. n. Electronic Level Switches: (LSHH1) Level switches shall have frequency shift tuning fork sensing element. The unit shall be rated NEMA 4X suitable in a wastewater environment. The units shall be suitable for mounting within wastewater tanks. The units shall be furnished with S.S. wall mount brackets with all exposed parts 316 S.S. System shall provide contact closure relay. System shall require 110-120 VAC input. Units shall be Series FTL as manufactured by Endress+Hauser or Engineer approved equal. o. Phone Dialer (PHD): Provide one sixteen (16) channel dialer as manufactured by RACO Verbatum, Microtel, Inc. or Engineer approved equal. Unit shall be furnished in aNEMA I enclosure with a clear lexan hinged cover. p. Continuous Ultrasonic Level Transmitter and Ultrasonic level element: (LITI, LE1) Ultrasonic open channel flow probes shall be suitable for wall mounting within a chlorine mixing clearwell. The units shall be furnished with S.S. wall mount brackets. Include single channel for flow measurement, two (2) isolated 4-20mA analog outputs, and 5 programmable relay outputs. Provide 20 feet of cable for connecting sensor elements (FE 1) with transmitter (FIT1). Unit shall be Series FMU 861 Prosonic Transmitter with FDU 80 ultrasonic sensor elements or Engineer approved equal. q. 7 -day, 24-hour timer: Provide one 7000 series electromechanical timer as manufactured by Tork. r. Intrusion Alarm Switch: Provide units as shown on the drawings. The switch shall be normally closed when the door is closed, so that anytime the door is open the switch will be open. Use Edwards catalog # 60 or equal, magnetic type switch, normally open (closed when 94021.002,3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGb-9 magnet engages or door is closed), rated for 120 volt, 50 mA. Use Edwards magnetic switch accessories to properly mount switches. 6. INSTALLATION: a. Electrical: All electrical work required in these Specifications shall also conform to the Specification "Electrical." b. Panel Wiring: All pilot lights, running timer meters, pushbuttons and selectors switches shall be door -mounted. All incoming wires shall be terminated at a master terminal strip. All wiring from panel interior to door mounted devices shall be extra flexible and bundled across hinge. All wiring shall be in panduit raceway systems. c. Electrical Controls: All electrical control components that are located adjacent to equipment items, whether supplied by the equipment manufacturer or by the Contractor, shall be mounted separately from the equipment such that no vibrations are transmitted to the electrical controls. d. Purchasing and Guarantees: Refer to Paragraph 3 of Specification 0, "Equipment General Requirements". e. Start -Up Provisions: A factory -trained service engineer shall be provided at no expense to the owner to assist the Contractor in the proper installation, testing, operational and start-up. Said Engineer shall also be available, without cost to the Owner, to instruct the owner's operating personnel in the proper calibration, testing, and maintenance of the entire control system for a period of not Tess than two (2) working days. f. Operations And Maintenance Manual: The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with operations and maintenance data and information in accordance with the requirements set forth in Paragraph 5 of Specification, "Equipment General Requirements." g. General Requirements: The information shall include the final "as -built" detailed wiring diagrams of all control devices and equipment furnished. Deliver information to the Engineer at least one week prior to the system test and demonstration. h. System Test and Demonstration: Upon completion ofthe entire control system, the Contractor shall perform tests of all control systems in the presence of the Engineer and Owner to demonstrate proper operation of all systems. END OF SECTION 94-021.002:3150 1 1 SGc-1 SPECIFICATION Gc VARIABLE FREOUENCY DRIVE 1. SCOPE -OF -WORK: This specification covers the purchase and installation of variable frequency drives (VFD). Refer to specific process equipment specifications and the electrical/control and ventilation specifications for coordination and additional requirements. 2. DESCRIPTION: a. The Contractor shall furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for or incidental to the complete installation of each variable frequency drive with a by-pass option as shown on the drawings and as specified in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. Contractor shal 1 coordinate all work with other trades. The contractor will purchase all variable frequency drives. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, contractor shall furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. b. This specification describes AC variable speed/torque drives used to control the speed/torque of a NEMA design B induction motor. The drive must also provide an optional operational mode for scalar or V/Hz operation. c. The drive shall be totally compatible with the type of load it shall power and control. The supplier of the drive equipment shall coordinate and ensure this compatibility. Refer to NEC Table 430-150 for minimum drive full load current requirements for various motor HP ratings. d. The drive shall be manufactured in the USA by a firm with at least ten (10) years experience in the production of this type of equipment. The VFD manufacturer shall have a Colorado Service Center with spare parts inventory and a factory -trained service technician on call 24 hours per day. Contractor shall provide an Allen-Bradley model 1336 or Engineer approved equal. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: a. The drive manufacturing facility shall be ISO 9001 certified. The drive shall be UL or CSA listed. b. All printed circuit boards shall be completely tested and burned -in before being assembled into the completed drive. The drive shall then be subjected to a preliminary functional test, minimum four (4) hour burn -in and computerized final test. The burn -in shall be at 104° F (40° C), at full rated load, or cycled load. Drive input power shall be continuously cycled for maximum stress and thermal variation. 94.021.002:31 SO SGc-2 c. The drive shall be designed to provide 100,000 hours mean time between failure (MTBF) when the specified preventative maintenance is performed. 4. SUBMITTALS: Submittals shall include the following information: a. Outline Dimensions, Weight, and Heat Output. b. Typical efficiency vs. speed graph for variable or constant torque load as required. c. Compliance to IEEE 519 -Harmonic analysis for particular job site including total voltage harmonic distortion and total current distortion. (1) The drive manufacturer shall provide calculations, specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5%. Input line filters shall be sized and provided as required by the drive manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE standard 519, Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation for Static Power Converters. The acceptance of this calculation must be completed prior to drive installation. (2) Prior to installation, the drive manufacturer shall provide the estimated total harmonic distortion (THD) caused by the drive. The results shall be based on a computer-aided circuit simulation of the total actual system with information obtained from the power provider and the user. with no line reactors. (3) If the voltage THD exceeds 5%, the drive manufacturer is to recommend the additional equipment to reduce the voltage THD to an acceptable level as a separate bid item. 5. WARRANTY: Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not -to -exceed 30 months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time, and expenses. 6. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: The drive shall be an AC to AC converter utilizing the latest isolated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) technology. The drive shall employ inner loop torque control strategy that mathematically determines motor torque and flux every 25 microseconds (µs) (40,000 times per second). The drive must also provide an optional operational mode for scalar or V/Hz operation. a. Ratings: The drive shall be rated to operate from three-phase power at 460VAC +1- 10% and 48Hz to 63Hz. The drive shall employ a full wave rectifier to prevent input line notching and operate at a fundamental input power factor of 0.98 at all speeds and loads. The drive efficiency shall be 97% or better at full speed and load. An externally mounted line reactor shall be provided to reduce i nput current harmonic content, provide protection from power line transients such as utility power factor correction capacitor switching transients and reduce RFI emissions. Line reactors shall not be installed inside the MCC. 94.021.002.7150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SGc-3 b. Output voltage and current ratings shall match the adjustable frequency operating requirements of standard 460VAC, 3ph, 6011z, NEMA design B motors. The overload current capacity shall be 150% of rated current for one (1) minute out often (10) m inutes and 200% for two (2) seconds out of 15 seconds with an instantaneous overcurrent trip at 350% or higher. Output frequency shall be adjustable between 01-Iz and 3001-1z. Operation above motor nameplate shall require programming changes to prevent inadvertent high speed operation. The drive's switching pattern shall be continually adjusted to provide optimum motor flux and avoid the high-pitched audible noise produced by motors energized by conventional PWM drives. c. The drive shall be furnished in the MCC enclosure rated for continuous full -load operation at ambient temperatures between 0° and 40° C at an altitude of 6198 feet, with relative humidity less than 95% and no condensation allowed. The enclosure shall be furnished with ventilationfilter(s). The drive shall be protected from atmospheric contamination by chemical gasses and sol id particles per IEC 721-3-3, classes 3C2 and 3S2. The drive shall be protected from vibration per IEC 68-2-6 (max. sinusoidal displacement 1.5 mm, 2Hz to 9Hz and max. acceleration 5 m/s2, 9Hz to 200Hz). d. Control Functions and Adjustments 94-021.002:3150 (1) Start-up data shall include motor nameplate power, speed, voltage, frequency and current. (2) A motor parameter ID function shall automatically define the motor equivalent circuit used by the sensorless vector torque controller. (3) A PID speed/torque loop regulator shall be provided with an autotune function as well as manual adjustments. (4) A selection of five (5) preprogrammed application macro parameter sets shall be provided to minimize the number of different parameters to be set during start-up. (5) Start/Stop control functions shall include three (3) wire start/stop, coast/ramp stop selections, optional dynamic braking and flux braking. An automatic reset function shall execute up to five (5) attempts to restart after individually selectable overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage and signal loss fault conditions. The automatic reset trial and delay times shall be individually adjustable. An HOA selector shall be mounted to door of VFD enclosure. In hand mode drive speed may be controlled by adjusting local VFD control unit. In auto mode drive speed will be remotely controlled by the P.C. (6) Accel/Decel control functions shall include two (2) Sets of ramp time adjustments with linear and three (3) s -curve ramp selections. (7). Speed/Torque control functions shall include: (a) Adjustable minimum/maximum speed and/or torque limits SGc-4 (b) Selection of up to 15 preset speed settings or external speed control (c) Three (3) sets of critical speed lockout adjustments. (d) A bui k -in PID controller to control a process variable such as pressure, flow or fluid level. (e) Reference signal processing shall include increase/decrease floating point control and control of both speed/torque and direction using a "joystick" reference signal. Two (2) analog inputs shall be programmable to form a reference by addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection or maximum selection. (8) Output control functions shall include: (a) Flux optimization to limit the audible noise produced by the motor and minimize efficiency by providing the optimum magnetic flux for any given speed/torque operating point. (b) Current and torque limit adjustments to limit the maximum drive output current and the maximum torque produced by the motor. These limits shall govern the inner loop torque regulator to provide tight conformance with the limits with minimum overshoot. (c) A torque regulated operating mode with adjustable torque ramp up/down and speed/torque limits. e. Static and Dynamic Performance (1) Open loop static speed regulation shall be 0. 1% to 0.3% (10% of motor slip). When motor speed feedback is provided from a suitable encoder, closed loop speed regulation shall be 0.01% or better. Dynamic speed accuracy shall be 0.4% or better open loop and 0.1% or better closed loop. (2) When a suitable motor is used, the drive shall provide breakaway torque equal to 200% of rated motor torque. The drive shall be capable of continuously developing 100% torque at zero (0) RPM. Torque response time shall be 5ms or less. In the torque -regulating mode, torque -regulating accuracy shall be 4% or better. f. Operator Control Panel (1) 44.021.002:3150 Each drive shall be equipped with a front mounted operator control panel consisting of a four- (4) line by 20 -character backlit alphanumeric display and a keypad with keys for Run/Stop, Local/Remote, Increase/Decrease, menu navigation and parameter select/save. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 g• 94-021.002:3160 SGc-5 (2) All parameter names, fault messages, warnings and other information shall be d isplayed in complete Engl ish words or standard English abbreviations to allow the user to understand what is being displayed without the use of a manual or cross- reference table. A display contrast adjustment shall be provided to optimize viewing at any angle. (3) The control panel shall include a feature for uploading parameter settings to control panel memory and downloading from the control panel to the same drive or to another drive. (4) During normal operation, one (1) line of the control panel shall display the speed reference, run/stop, forward/reverse and local/remote status. The remaining three (3) lines of the display shall be programmable to display the values of any three (3) operating parameters, At least 26 selections shall be available including the fol lowing: (a) Speed/torque in percent (%), RPM or user -scaled units (b) Output frequency, voltage, current and torque (c). Input voltage, power and kilowatt hours (d) Heatsink temperature and DC bus voltage (e) Status of discrete inputs and outputs (f) Values of analog input and output signals (g) Values of PID controller reference, feedback and error signals. (h) Acceleration and deceleration times Control interface inputs and outputs shall include: (1) Three (3) analog inputs, one (1) OVAC - IOVAC and two (2) 4mA - 20mA, all independently programmable with at least ten (10) input function selections. A differential input isolation amplifier shall be provided for each input. Analog input signal processing functions shall include scaling adjustments, adjustable filtering and signal inversion. Upon Toss of input signal, the drive shall be programmable to stop and display a fault message, run at a preset speed and display a warning message or display a warning message and run according to the Iast reference received. (2) Six (6) discrete inputs, all independently programmable with at least 25 input function selections. Inputs shall be designed for dry contact inputs used with either an internal or external 24 VDC source. (3) Two (2) analog outputs providing 4mA to 20mA signals. Outputs shall be independently programmable to provide signals proportional to at least 12 output function selections including output speed, frequency, voltage, current and power. SGc-6 (4) Three (3) form C relay contact outputs. all independently programmable with at least 30 output function selections. Relay contacts shall be rated to switch 8 Amps at 24VDC or 250VAC. Function selections shall include indications that the drive is ready, running, reversed and at set speed/torque. General and specific warning and fault indications shall be available. Adjustable supervision limit indications shall be available to indicate programmed values of operating speed, speed reference, current, torque and PID feedback. h. Serial communication interface modules shall be available for Modbus, Modbus Plus, Profibus and DeviceNet. Communications modules shall be connected to the drive by fiber optic cables. A fiber optic communication port shall also be provided for personal computer interface. Microsoft Windows based software shall be available for drive setup, diagnostic analysis, monitoring and control. The software shall provide real time graphical displays of drive performance. i. Protective Functions provided by each drive: (1) For each programmed warning and fault protection function, the drive shall display a message in complete English words or standard English abbreviations. The five (5) most recent fault messages and times shall be stored in the drive's fault history. (2) MOV's for phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground line voltage transient protection. (3) Ground fault and motor phase Toss protection and rated for 42,000 A symmetrical short circuit current per UL508C without relying on line fuses. (4) Electronic motor overload protection per UL508C. (5) AC line or DC bus overvoltage at 130% of rated maximum or undervoltage at 65% of rated minimum and input phase loss protection. (6) A power loss ride through feature al lowing the drive to remain fully operational after losing power as long as kinetic energy can be recovered from the rotating mass ofthe motor and load. (7) Stall protection programmable to provide a warning or stop signal to drive after motor has operated above a programmed torque level for a programmed time limit. (8) Underload protection programmable to provide awarningorstop signal to drive after the motor has operated below a selected underload curve for a programmed time limit. (9) 94-021.002:3150 Over -temperature protection indicating a warning ifpower module temperature is 5°C below the over -temperature trip level. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J• SGc-7 (1 0) Input terminals for connecting a motor therm ister (PTC type) to the drive's protective monitoring circuitry and an input programmable to monitor an external relay or switch contact. Drive shall be provided with a door interlocked, lockable disconnect motor circuit protector (MCP). Adjust MCP to provide short circuit protection without nuisance tripping. 7. INSTALLATION: The drive manufacturer shall provide adequate drawings and instruction material to facilitate installation ofthe drive by electrical and mechanical trades people employed by others. All aspects of installation shall be according to manufacturer's recommendations. a. START-UP: A manufacturer's "certified" factory start-up engineer shall be provided for each drive bya manufacturer's authorized service center. The start-up engineer shall complete a certified start-up form for each drive. One copy ofthe form shall be provided to owner, one to the project engineer and one copy kept on file at the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall extend the normal warranty for the drive with the certified factory start-up. END OF SECTION 94-021.002:3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SH - SPECIFICATION H HEATING AND VENTILATING I. SCOPE OF WORK: The Work under this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required, and of performing all operations needed in connection with furnishing and installing a complete and operable heating and ventilating system. 2. CODES AND ORDINANCES: All work shall comply with the rules and regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and all codes and ordinances ofthe local and state authorities. Such codes, where applicable, shall take precedence over the Drawings and Specifications. 3. PERMITS AND FEES: The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, taxes, royalties, licenses, and inspections in connection with the heating and ventilating system. Upon completion of work, he shall furnish to the Engineer a certificate of inspection and final approval by the local inspection authority. 4. RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR: The Contractor shall provide without extra charge, all incidental items required, as a part of his work, even though not particularly specified or indicated. The installation shall be so made that its several component parts will function together as a workable system, and shall be left in a properly adjusted and working order. 5. INSTALLATION OF THE WORK: The Contractorwill be held solely responsible for the proper size and location of all anchors, chases, recesses, openings, etc., required for the proper installation of his work. He shall arrange for the building of anchors, etc., and for the leaving of the required chases, recesses, openings, etc. and shall do all cutting and patching made necessary by his failure or neglect to make such arrangements with others. Any cutting or patching done by the Contractor shall be subject to the directions of the Engineer and shall not be started until approval has been obtained. Workmanship shall be the best. The good appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical efficiency. All work shall be done in accordance with good commercial practices. 6. RECORD OF CHANGES: Show on blue line prints in red ink all changes from original plans made during installation of work and file with Engineer when work is complete. 7. ELECTRICAL: All electrical equipment and material shall conform to the General Equipment Specifications the Drawings. All motors 1/3 Hp and smaller shall be single-phase, and motors V2 Hp and larger shall be three phase unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. 8. PURCHASING AND GUARANTEES: Refer to Paragraphs 3 and 5 of Specification, "General Equipment Provisions" for requirements for purchasing and guarantees. 94-021.002:3150 S H-2 9. POST INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the heating and ventilating equipment. The Contractor shall monitor and tabulate the amperage, voltage, and air flow for each fan and heater. Registers having opposed blade dampers shall be adjusted to distribute air evenly throughout an area. Balancing shall be accomplished under the presence of the Engineer by a firm experienced in testing, adjusting and balancing the mechanical equipment. Tabulated data including, at a minimum, motor amperage, input voltage, nameplate data, operating speed, and heater capacity shall be provided to the Engineer for his approval. 10. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: Refer to Paragraph 6 of Specification "General Equipment Provisions", for requirements for the Operations and Maintenance Manual. In addition, the information to be provided shall include an alphabetical list of all system components, with the name, address, and 24-hour phone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation. 11. QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION: All mechanical equipment provided under this Contract shall operate without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. Objectionable sound or vibration conditions shall be corrected in an approved manner by the Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators. 12. SHEET METAL: All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed so that no undue vibration or noise results. All joints shall be airtight with additional caulking provided if necessary. Ducts shall be constructed of the best grade galvanized mi Id steel sheets with joints, hangers, and reinforcing in accor- dance with the recommended construction standards set forth in the SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Standards Manual. Curved elbows, if used, shal I have a center line radius equal to 1'/2 times the duct width. Square elbows shall have turning vanes similar to Tuttle -Bailey ducturns. Job fabricated turning vanes will not be accepted without prior approval. Provide 1 -inch angle col lars for all exposed ducts passing through walls, ceilings or floors. Anchor collars in position after installation is complete. Provide flexible connections at inlet and discharge connections of fans (including generator's fan) and air handling equipment to prevent mechanical noises from being transmitted to connecting ductwork. Use flexible connections similar and equal to "Ventfab". Provide gasketed access ports for each motor actuated damper. At all places where the inside of a duct will be visible through return air grilles, louvers, etc., paint normally visible inside portion of duct with flat black paint. 13. FANS: 94.02:.002:3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S H-3 All fans shall be of a heavy duty, industrial quality with AMCA certified ratings for air handling and sound performance. Fans shall have permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings with a minimum design life of 200,000 hours. Pulleys shall be field adjustable for balancing and shall be cast iron, keyed, and balanced. Propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be 1 800 RPM unless otherwise noted. A listing of the fans and specific requirements for the fans follows: (1) Equipment Room Exhaust Fan: Sidewall mounted belt driven propel ler fan shall be installed. The fan shall be rated for 825 cfm at 0.25" S.P. with 1/4 HP, 115 VAC single phase motor. The fan shall be sim ilarand equal to the Greenheck Model SBE -1H20-4 and be provided with a wall collar, back draft damper, OSHA approved motor side guard, and weatherhood. The fan shall be epoxy coated. The associated motor operated inlet louver shall open whenever the fan runs. (2) Clarifier Doom Exhaust Fan: Sidewall mounted belt driven centrifugal fan shall be installed. The fan shall be rated for2,400 cfm at 0.25" S.P. with''/: HP, 115 VAC single phase motor. The fan shall be similar and equal to the Greenheck Model CWB-140-5. The fan shall be epoxy coated. The associated motor operated inlet louver shall open whenever the fan runs. Office Room Exhaust Fan: Sidewall inline cabinet fan shall be installed. The fan shall be rated for 250 cfm at 0.25" S.P. with 80W, 115 VAC single phase motor. The fan shall be similar and equal to the Greenheck Model CSP -226 and be provided with integral back draft damper, galvanized steel housing, and removable bottom access panel. The fan shall be manually operated. 14. LOUVERS: Louvers shall be of heavy gauge extruded aluminum construction. Operable louvers shall have 4 -inch frame, drainable blades, baked enamel paint finish and internally mounted aluminum insect screen. Louvers shall be 4 inches with 45 degree blades and shall be similar and equal to the Model EAD-401 as manufactured by Greenheck. Electric motor actuators shall be two position, power to open, spring return, for 120 VAC power, similar and equal to Model MP2985E by Greenheck. A listing of the required manually operated louvers is given in the following table: (3) 94-021.002:3150 Location Office Room Height Width Inches Inches 18 12 SH -4 A listing of the required electrically actuated operable louvers is given in the following table: Location Height Inches Width Inches Equipment Room 30 30 Clarifier Room 36 36 15. GRILLES: Grilles shall be of aluminum construction and shall be installed at the exposed ends of all ducts and other interior mechanical openings which do not have a register or louver. Grilles shall be similar and equal to the Series 900 VFB as manufactured by Shoemaker Air Flow with 45 degree fixed vertical blades. 16. HEATERS: Corrosion resistant electric heaters shall be installed at the approximate locations and have capacity as shown on the Drawings. The unit heater in the equipment room shall be an electric unit with a 5 kW, 480 VAC, 3 phase rating, and the clarifier room shall have a similar heater with a 7.5 kW, 480 VAC, 3 phase rating. Elements to be steel sheathed tube type with aluminum fins. Units to have integral contractors with control power transformers and 24 VAC coils. Fan to have 650 cfm nominal rating. The heater in the equipment room shall be UL listed and be similar and equal to the QMark Model MUH-05-4 1, and the clarifier room heater shall be similar and equal to the QMark Model MUH-07-4. Both shall be provided with a ceiling or wall mounting brackets, as required. Provide with integral 0 to 85 EF thermostats and wall mounting brackets. The competed installations shall be in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. Accessories shall be provided by the approved heater manufacturer when available. The heater in the office room shall be a low silhouette kickspace electric heater with built-in thermostat. The heater shal I have a 2 kW, 120 VAC, single phase rating and shall be similar and equal to Fasco Model D-2450. 17. THERMOSTATS (Vstat): Furnish and install thermostats to satisfy the Control Sequence of Operation requirements of this Specification at the locations shown on the Drawings. Thermostats for the electric unit heaters and the exhaust fans (if required for automatic operation) shall bean industrial grade, -30 to +100 degrees F set point range, 5 degree fixed differential, line voltage SPDT switch rated 16 amp inductive at 120 VAC, single-phase, similar and equal to the Honeywell Trade I ine Model T63IC1103. 18. NAME TAGS: Furnish and install'/. -inch Ietter height, engraved, phenolic identification tags for each wall mounted switch or thermostat. The legend for each tag shall be as approved by the Engineer. 19. CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: A functional description of the heating and ventilating equipment is provided following. The intention is to coordinate all mechanical, electrical and control items so that each piece of equipment operates as expected. 94-021.002:3150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SH -5 a. Exhaust Fans: The fans in the equipment and clarifier rooms (typical of 2) shall have a wall mounted HOA selector switch. In the automatic mode, the fans shall run whenever the space temperature in the room exceeds 75°F (adjustable). The fan in the office room shall be manually controlled. b. Unit Heaters: Unit heaters with wall mounted thermostat shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings. The unit heaters shall be provided with integral fan only switch, power contactor and fused 120 volt control circuit transformer. c. Louvers: The louvers in the equipment and clarifier rooms (typical of 2) shall have a wail mounted HOA selector switch. In the automatic mode, the louvers shall open whenever the respective fans are in operation. The louver in the office room shall be manually controlled. 94-021.002:3r50 SI -1 SPECIFICATION I MISCELLANEOUS METALS 1. SCOPE OF WORK: Provide and install miscellaneous metals work, complete as indicated, specified and required. • a. Work Included in This Section. Principal items are: (1) Steel channel and angle frames with anchors. (2) Aluminum pipe rail and railing assemblies with guard chains. (3) Access hatches (4) Ladders (5) Portable hoist (6) Guard posts. (7) Specially fabricated aluminum, stainless steel and galvanized steel devices except "off-the-shelf' purchase items. (8) Miscellaneous iron and steel aluminum items indicated, specified, or required for completion of the Contract, unless included under other sections of the Specifications. b. Related Work Not Included in This Section. (1) (2) Off -shelf purchased metal framing anchors and rough hardware for baffles and carpentry work, concrete and masonry anchors. Sheet metal work for HVAC and/or roofing, Steel supports, hangers, brackets and other miscellaneous items accessory to the plumbing, mechanical and electrical installations and indicated, required, or detailed on the Drawings. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Unless otherwise specified all work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following specifications and codes: a. Steel. Fabrication and erection of structural steel and miscellaneous steel shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel for Buildings", and "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". b. Aluminum. Fabrication of aluminum shall be in accordance with ASCE "Specification for Structures of Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6, Second Progress Report of the Committee of the Structural Division on Design in Lightweight Structural Alloys". 94-021.002.03130 SI -2 c. Welding Quality. All field and shop welding shall be preformed by welders qualified and certified in accordance with AWS D1.0 "Welding in Building Construction". Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code. 3. SUBMITTALS: Prior to Fabrication or delivery, submit the following and obtain Engineer's approvals. Show materials and specifications list, construction and fabrication details, layout and erection diagrams, and method of anchorage to adjacent construction. Give location, type, size and extent of welding and bolted connections and clearly distinguish between shop and field connections. Prior to submittal, coordinate shop drawings with related trades to insure proper mating of assemblies. Catalog work sheets showing illustrated cuts of item to be furnished, scale, details, and dimensions may be submitted for standard manufactured items. Where items must fit and coordinate with finished surfaces or constructed spaces, take measurements at site and not from drawings. Where concrete, masonry or other materials must be set to exact locations to receive work, furnish assistance and direction necessary to permit other trades to properly locate their work. Where welded connectors, concrete, or masonry inserts are required to receive work, shop drawings shall show exact locations required, and all such drawings shall be furnished to the trades responsible for installing the connectors or inserts. 4. MATERIALS - GENERAL: Materials shall be new, sound and shall conform to the following: a. Steel. Rolled shapes, plates, and bars shall conform to the latest edition of the AISC "Manual of Steel Construction" and shall also conform to current ASTM Designation A-36. b. Stainless Steel. Unless otherwise designated or approved, use stainless steel alloy types as follows which conform to ASTM A-167 and ASTM A-276: Stainless steel plates and bars shall be Type 304, except Type 316 or Type 317 shall be used in wet or humid locations. Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be Type 316. Stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 where connecting or bearing on aluminum. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SI -3 c. Cast Iron. Conform to ASTM A-48, Class 35B except as otherwise designated. d. Ductile Iron. Conform to ASTM A-536 using 60-40-18 or better, except as specifically designated otherwise. e. Aluminum. All aluminum plate, pipe and structural shapes shall be new and shall conform to appl icable Federal Specification for 6061-T6 alloy, unless otherwise noted. Aluminum pipe of sizes designated shall be of Schedule 40 or greater weight. f. Checkered Plate. Use thickness not less than '/,-inch thickness or that shown on Drawings. Raised lugs shall be diamond -shape and have an angled and opposed pattern. Steel shall be of ASTM A-36 carbon steel, hot dip galvanized. Common Bolts and Hoisting Eyes. Except as otherwise designated or specified, use standard commercial quality steel units conforming to ASTM A-307, Grade A, either cadmium plated or galvanized where used with galvanized work. Hoisting eyes shall be galvanized. Bolts used for connection of materials that will be submerged, normally or occasional ly, shalt be fabricated from Type 316 Stainless Steel in accordance with ASTM A193. g. h. Expansion Bolts. Expansion type bolts shall be used in lieu of anchor bolts only where specifically noted or detailed. Expansion bolts shall not be acceptable for anchorage of any vibrating machinery or equipment. Expansion bolts shall be stainless steel, and shall consist of the following: (1) For Interior Dry Locations anchorages provide snap -off or flush shell concrete anchors produced by Phillips Self -Drilling Concrete Anchors, Star Selfdril shields or equal. (2) For Exterior or Wet Locations anchorages shall consist of all stainless steel, Type 316, Molly Parabolt Concrete Anchors, Phillips Wedge Anchors, or equal. (3) For Concrete B lock use Rawl anchors or equal. h. Galvanizing. 94.021002 03150 (1) Iron and Steel. ASTM A123, with average weight per square foot of 2.0 ounces and not less than 1.8 ounces per square foot. Items to be galvanized shall be thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of molten zinc. (2) Ferrous Metal Hardware Items. ASTM A 1 53 with average coating weight of 1.3 ounces per square foot. (3) SI -4 Touch-up Material for Galvanized Coatines. Galvanized coatings marred or damaged during erection or fabrication shall be repaired by use of DRYGALV as manufactured by the American Solder and Flux Company, Galva!loy, Galvion, or equal, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. i. Welding Electrodes. (1) Steel Electrodes. Use E70XX rod shielded metal arc welding conforming to AWS A5.1 or A5.5, or for submerged arc welding use F7X-EXXX conforming to AWS A5.17. For steel alloys other than ASTM A36 and A53, use electrodes recommended in writing by AWS and by the parent steel manufacturer. (2) Aluminum Electrodes. Contingent upon alloys being welded, use only inert gas shielded arc or resistant welding process with filler alloys. Use no process requiring a welding flux. (3) Stainless Steel Electrodes. Perform welding of stainless steel with electrodes and techniques as contained in pertinent AWS A5 Series Specification, and as recommended in Welded Austenitic Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Techniques and Properties as published by the International Nickel Company, Inc., New York, New York. 5. MATERIALS - SPECIFIC: The following list of items is not necessarily complete. Check drawings, other Sections of Specifications, and with other trades and provide miscellaneous iron and steel items as required to complete entire work. Provide fasteners and connectors of approved types, whether or not indicated. a. Aluminum Pipe Rails and Railings. Provide complete 1 V2 -inch diameter rail of6063-T6 aluminum pipe, Schedule 40 with stanchions and toe plates. Welded and bolted fittings and attachments shall be fabricated true to size, configurations, and detail shown on drawings and details. Grind and polish welds flush and smooth. Curves where indicated or necessary, shall be bent on a radius of not Tess than six inches. Blind rivets, self -tapping screws, and fasteners shall be stainless steel. Post spacing and handrail location shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall in no case be over 6 feet. Posts and intermediate rails shall be single unspliced lengths of pipe. Handrails shall be similar and equal to Enerco-Aluma-Rail by Enerco Metal Products Company or Connectorial System by Julium Blun and Company. Handrails shall be in conformance with applicable requirements of Section "Standards for Aluminum Work," and provided with a uniform 204R Architectural Class I clear satin anodized finish. Safety chains shall be %2 -inch link chain of galvanized steel with stainless steel harness type snap. 94-021.002:03130 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SI -5 Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals and concrete for protection from galvanic deterioration. Aluminum embedded in concrete shall be coated with a 8 mil dry film thickness of zinc chromate paint or bituminous coating. b. Pipe and Conduit Supports and Bracing. Fabricate and install as required or detailed on the Drawings in fully coordinated manner with work of other trades. Where shown, hot dip galvanize after fabrication. Touch-up abraded or burned galvanized using specified materials. Where not galvanized members shall be shop primed with rust -inhibitive primer and field painted conforming with Specification "Painting and Coating". c. Access Hatches. The frame shall be of extruded aluminum with a continuous or strap type concrete anchors. The hatch panels shall be of at least 1k -inch thickness reinforced with aluminum stiffeners as necessary, and have a diamond pattern surface. Each hatch shall be provided with stainless steel hardware; the hinges shall be attached with stainless steel tamper proof fasteners. The locking arm and release handle, and the lifting device shall be of stainless steel. Each hatch leaf shall open to 90 degrees and automatically lock in that position, and be capable of sustaining a load of 300 lbs/ft2. The single leaf hatch shall be similar and equal to Halliday Series W 1S. The manufacturer shall guarantee the material and workmanship for five years. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation. d. Retractable Ladders. Retractable ladders shall be provided in the aeration basin, selector channel and each of the three wet wells which have pumps. The ladders shall be comprised of two 7' sections. Details of the ladders and guides are shown on the drawings and described herein. Fixed ladder guides/supports shall be installed at each location and shall consist of essentially full height guides for each side of the ladders and 6 -inch long, 8 -inch American Standard aluminum channel supports at maximum 3 foot centers. Each support shall be attached to the concrete basins with two 1 -inch stainless steel expansion anchors. The guides shall be fabricated from 13/4 " by 3" x '/a" wall rectangular aluminum tubing with the long side cut out to allow for the passage of the ladder rungs. The guides shall be continuously TIG welded to the supports. The bottom of the guides shall be located 6 -inches above the floor. Guides at the A -basin shall be constructed without splices. Guides at the other locations shall have a single splice with 6 -inch long '/e -inch plate splice plates TIG welded to the three other sides. e. Rod and Structural Attachments. A concrete rod attachment plate shall be installed directly above the center of each blower, including the future blower. The plates shall be installed in the concrete per manufacturer's recommendation. The plates shall be similar and equal to Grinnell fig. 52 for a rod size of '/z -inch. The rod shall be attached to the plate per manufacturer's recommendations and shall be similar and equal to Grinnell fig. 290 with a 1/2 -inch rod size. 94.021.002:03150 SI -6 f. Portable Hoist. The hoist shall be of stainless steel construction with a stainless steel cable of at least 30 feet in length. The hoist shall be capable of lifting a load of 500 lbs. with a reach of at least 36 inches. The unit shall be floor mounted in the locations shown on the Drawings. The hoist shall be similar and equal to Halliday Model D2B36B. 6. GENERAL FABRICATIQN AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: a. Oualitv and Standards. All fabrication shall be equal to good practice in a modern fabrication shop. Ferrous metals shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose scale and rust before being fabricated. Finished members shall be free of twists, bends or open joints, and shall present a neat workmanlike appearance when completed. b. Fabrication and Installation. Using specified new stock of standard sizes specified or detailed, fabricate in the shop and produce high grade metal work. Form and fabricate to meet required conditions. Include clips, straps, bolts, screws, and other fastenings necessary to secure the work. Conform applicable work to latest edition of Referenced Standards. Accurately make and tightly fit joints and inner -sections in true planes with adequate secure fastenings. All metal work shall be erected plumb, true on line, and in its designated location. Field welds on exposed surface shall be ground and finished smooth. Connections shall be bolted or welded as indicated on drawings. After installation, all work shall be left in a neat and clean condition, ready for final painting or coating. Coordinate work of this Section with related trades. Particular attention is required for items to be embedded in concrete work. Provide all punchings and drillings indicated or required for attachment of other work to that of this Section. Dimensions required for the fabrication and installation of handrails, ladders, grating, plate, pipe hangers and etc. which are not shown on the drawings, shall conform to the applicable requirements of OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Standards. c. Protection. Protect and repair adjacent surfaces and areas which may become damaged as a result of work of this Section. Protect work until completion and final acceptance of project by Owner. Repair or replace all damaged or defective work to original specified condition, at no additional cost to the Owner. Where welding is done in proximity to glass or finished surfaces, such surfaces shall be protected from damage due to weld sparks, spatter, or tramp metal. Aluminum members shall be isolated from contact with dissimilar metals and concrete to provide protection from electrolytic deterioration. Use non-absorptive tape or gaskets; heavy brush coat of approved zinc chromate primer made with a synthetic resin vehicle; or apply a heavy coat of approved alkali -resistant bituminous paint. 91.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SJ -1 SPECIFICATION J ROOFING AND SHEET METAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: Furnish all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required and perform all operations required for construction of roofing consisting of a single ply elastomeric roofing loose laid over roof insulation, held in place with stone ballast, and including flashing. 2. SUBMITTALS AND WARRANTY: a. 10 -year Warranty. Manufacturer shall provide a ten year warranty at completion of job, covering watertightness of installation. b. 2 -year Guarantee. All sheet metal work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against defective materials and workmanship for a period of two years after final acceptance. c. Submittals. The Contractor shall submit a letter from the manufacturer of the roofing materials to the Engineer approving the roofing details, installer, and installation instructions. 3. MATERIALS: a. Membrane. EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Monomer) rubber roofing membrane as manufactured by Carlisle Construction Materials Division or approved equal, 0.045 inches thick, 40 feet by 100 feet or the largest sheet possible as determined by job condition. EPDM compounded elastomer shall conform to ASTM D3253 and to the following minimum physical properties: 44421.002:03150 PROPERTY TEST METHOD SPECIFICATION Color Dark Brown Specific Gravity ASTM D 297 1.18 ±.03 Tensile Strength ASTM, D 412 1300 psi min. Elongation ASTM D 412 350% min. Tear Resistance, Die C ASTM D 624 175 lb./in. min. Shore A Hardness ASTM D 2240 60 ±10 (5 Second Reading) Ozone Resistance ASTM D 1149 No Cracks 7 days/100/pphm/ 104°F (40°C) 50% Ext. Heat Aging (Accelerated) ASTM D 573 Ten. Min 1200 psi 4 weeks/240°F Elong. Min. 210% Brittleness Temperature ASTM D 746 -50°F Permeability, Water Vapor ASTM E 96 Proc. BW 2 perm -mils, max SJ -2 Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not expose material to weather, direct sunlight, or excessive heat. b. Related Materials. Roof flashing membrane shall be uncured Neoprene by the manufacturer of the cured EPDM membrane, 0.060 inch thick. Adhesives, cements, and sealants, shall be furnished by the membrane manufacturer or certified and warranteed to be compatible by that manufacturer on company letterhead. Molded pipe flashings must be used where possible. Rubber Nailing Strips (RNS) and fasteners shall be certified and warranteed to be compatible by that manufacturer on company letterhead. c. Insulation. Insulation shall be 2 -inches thick Dow SM Board or approved equal. d. Ballast,. Ballast shall be loose -laid PA -inch rounded river washed gravel with the following restrictions: 50 percent must be retained by a three-fourths inch screen, 95 percent retained by a V2 -inch screen and 98 percent retained by a one-fourth inch screen. Ballast gradation shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C136, SIEVE OR SCREEN ANALYSIS OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES. e. Gravel Stop. The gravel stop shall be formed in a fabricating shop to the shape shown on the shop drawings. The metal shall be 20 gauge galvanized iron. f. Sheet Metal Flashing. Standard brand of galvanized steel (zinc -coated) having G-90 coating of 1.25 oz. of zinc per square foot of sheet conforming to ASTM A525. Gage shall be no lighter than 22 gauge. g. Paver Blocks. Paver block shall be concrete, 24x24x1'/2 inches in size with DUR-O-WALL reinforcement, 4-6 percent air -entrainment, a compressive strength no less than 4,000 PSI, with rounded edges on all sides of one face. Blocks shall have provisions for attaching steel tie bars V4 -inch thick by 1% -inch wide. Galvanized bars shall be provided that bolt to each connection device. h. Expansion Joint Filler. Joints in the concrete roofing substrate shall be filled with a flexible foam, pre -molded, joint filler. The joint filler shall be equal to "Cellu Joint" polyethylene foam as manufactured by Sealed Air Corporation. The foam shall have a density of 2.2 pounds per cubic foot, tensile strength of 40 psi minimum and a K factor of .3. The material shall be closed cell polyethylene foam. i. Nailer. Perimeter nailer shall be treated CCA Douglas Fir. 94-021.002:03150 S!-3 4. CQNSTRUCTION METHODS: a. Substrate Inspection. Inspect substrate to receive the EPDM roofing system. Roofing subcontractor shall notify Contractor in writing ofdefects in the substrate, and work shall not proceed until defects have been corrected. b. Substrate Preparation. Concrete tees shall be uniform in height. If 1/4 -inch or more variation occurs between edges level out with grout at'/. -inch per foot slope. Install expansion joint filler between ail flanges and around other openings. Lay 8 -inch wide strip of roofing material along each joint between concrete tee flanges, below insulation, for the full building width. c. Insulation Installation. Loose lay insulation board per manufacturer's recommendations. All roofs to have one 2 -inch layer. d. Membrane Installation. Position roofing membrane over approved insulation without stretching. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Allow membrane to relax approximately one-half hour prior to splicing and flashing. Position adjoining sheets in same manner lapping edges a minimum of three inches. Splice shall be three inch minimum overlap, bonded with manufacturer's splice cement. The edge of all splices shall be sealed with a bead of lap sealant prior to the end of each working day. e. Perimeter Nai ling. Rubber nailing strips shall be installed at the perimeter of each roof level, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, and similar penetrations. Install wooden nailers at the gravel stop perimeter of each roof level. Nailers shall be pressure treated with salt preservative; creosote or asphalt preservatives are not acceptable. Anchor wood nailers to resist a force of 75 pounds per lineal foot in any direction. The thickness of the nailer shall be such that the top of the nailer is flush with the surface to which the membrane is to be applied as approved by membrane manufacturer. f. Roof Flashing Membrane. Perimeter sealant flashing, flashing around vents, and other mechanical penetrations shall be done with uncured Neoprene flashing using the longest pieces practical. Splice shall extend to least three inches beyond the Rubber Nailing Strip. All flashings and terminations shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's approved details. Scuppers per Carlisle Detail U-1 8-A 8 -feet spacing, at tee ends. Flash all round entrants (pipes and conduits) passing through the membrane with molded pipe flash ings where possible. Where molded pipe flash ings cannot be installed, use field fabricated pipe seals. Seal clusters of pipes and unusual -shaped penetrations with Carlisle Sure -Seal Pourable Sealer. Use pitch pocket type seal as shown in manufacturer's approved details. 94.021.002 03150 g - SJ -4 Sheet Metal. All sheet metal work shall be first quality workmanship using proven acceptable standards of the Sheet Metal Industry and the publication "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACCNA) Arlington, Virginia, third edition, 1979. Make sheet metal work exposed to weather (flashings, etc.) permanently watertight and weathertight, with suitable provisions for free expansion and contraction without causing leaks. Flashing shall be formed in an 8 -foot length (minimum), except where shorter places are required; lap end joints shall be 2 -inches and soldered. Flashing at angles and corners shall be continuous. Provide expansion joints as necessary. Workmansh ip shall be equal to best standard practices of modern, approved sheet metal shops to provide weather and watertight completed installation. Accurately form sheet metal to dimensions and shapes detailed. Finish molded and broken members with true, straight and sharp lines and angles and, where intercepting each other, cope to an accurate fit and securely solder. Hem all exposed edges of sheet metal work unless otherwise detailed. Provide for expansion and contraction throughout. Make lock -seam work flat and true to line, seated full of solder. Make soldered flat -lock and lap -seams at least ''A -inch wide. Lap seams, unsoldered, according to pitch, but in no case less than 4 -inches. Make flat and lap seams in direction of flow. Lock and full solder corners. Extend sheet metal flanges 4 -inches minimum onto roof. Use non -corrosive soldering flux, as required, for joints to be made. Soldering shall be in accordance with recognized construction practice. Minimum overlap of metal shall be 4 -inches and bottom edges shall be bent out'' 'A -inch, Plate 38, Figure C. Where metal flashings are required for non-standard openings the Contractor shall prepare sketches for review prior to fabrication. h. Daily Seal. Exercise care to ensure that water does not flow beneath any completed sections of roof. Temporarily seal loose edge of membrane with Nite Seal when weather is threatening. i. Ballast. Ballast shall be laid uniformly and shall be sufficient to provide protection against wind uplift. Weight shall be minimum 15 pounds per square foot. J• 94-021.002:03150 Paver Block Walkways. Walkways shall be constructed on the roofs to access roof penetrations. Walkways shall be of 24 -inch square paver block installed in conformance with roof manufacturers recommendations. Blocks shall be installed with rounded edges on the bottom face. Paver blocks shall be located at 30 -inches on center around the entire perimeter of each roof with a second row at each corner for 10 -feet each direction. Place paver blocks at 15 -foot intervals across the entire roof, or at spacing recommended by the manufacturer, to prevent uplift on the roofing. Paver blocks shal I be connected with /-inch by l'h-inch steel bars bolted to attachments in pavers. SK- I SPECIFICATION K METAL DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 1. SCOPE OF WORK: Provide hollow metal door and frame work, complete as indicated, specified and required. Work in this section includes, hollow metal frames, hollow metal doors and transom panels, adapting and reinforcing the work of th is Specification to receive finish hardware, finished hardware, glazing, and installation of finish hardware. 2. OUALITY ASSURANCE: For purposes of defining type and quality, Drawings and Specifications are based upon doors of Steelcraft Manufacturing Company, Cincinnati, Ohio, or equal, of W. Ray Crabb meeting or exceeding these requirements. Use products ofa single manufacturer throughout. 3. SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings shall show complete fabrication, assembly and installation requirements, together with details, dimensions, and data governing materials used, and other accessories furnished. Make submittals for door, frame, panel details, hardware reinforcement and anchorage details. a. Templates. Paper template drawings will be required for all hardware applied to metal doors and frames. The supplier shall send proper templates, schedule, and information to the door and frame supplier. No templates or schedules shall be issued to any interested party until the hardware schedule has been approved by the Engineer. b. Submittals. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval five copies of the completely detai led schedule which shall include catalog cuts ofeach item required on the job. Show number required, all finishes, sizes, catalog numbers and pictures. Explain all abbreviations. Where cuts do not clearly show construction and quality, representative samples shall be submitted. A cover sheet shall be made a part of the schedule indicating the manufacturer's name ofeach item of hardware. Approval of the schedule will not relieve this supplier ofthe responsibility for furnishing all necessary and comparable hardware specified. 4. HOLLOW METAL DOORS: At all locations use doors that are 13/+ -inch thick, "Flush" construction. Interior door panels shall be 18 gauge. Exterior doors shall be assembled of two 16 -gauge roller leveled, prime quality, cold rolled steel panels. Vertical edges of 14 -gauge channel on lock rack and 12 gauge on hanger rail shall be welded to the panels. Top and bottom edges shall be 16 -gauge channels inverted to provide flush edges. Vertical stiffeners at 6 -inch spaces shall be welded to both face plates with sound deadening and insulation in spaces. Grind all exposed welds smooth to provide a completely flush door with no visible seams. Provide hinge and lock reinforcement for full height of door. Mortise doors for hinges and lock as required. Provide weep holes at door bottoms. 5. FRAMES: Combination type, back, frame and integral stop, of 16 -gauge steel, with a 2 -inch face width, %-inch stop and depth as required for opening. Provide set-up welded units with temporary metal spreaders to hold frames in alignment. Mitered corners of frames shall have reinforcements with internal welds. Grind all exposed welds flush and smooth. At head frames of exterior openings 94-021.002:03150 S K-2 provide 20 gauge galvanized steel drip flashing. Hinge jamb shall be mortised for specific hinges and Tock jamb prepared for universal lock strike. Equip frames with a minimum of6 wall anchorsof 14 gage steel and two base anchors as detailed and of manufacturer's standard design, as approved. Provide additional anchor for doors over 7 foot height. Factory install three silencers per strike jamb, and two per head of neoprene on each frame. 6. FINISH: All doors and frames shall be cleaned, bonderized and shop primed in conformance with applicable requirements specified in Specification: "Painting and Protective Coatings." Prime paint shall be compatible with proposed paint system. 7. KEYING AND MASTERKEYING: a. All locksets and cylinders shall be keyed, and masterkeyed at the factory where records shall be established and maintained. A11 master keys shall be identified with a registry number and NOT stamped with MASTER or letter "M." Individual room keys shall not be stamped with a key cut, but with a plain identification number. b. All Iocksets and cylinders shall be construction keyed. Contractor and hardware supplier shall be held responsible for permanent keys until all are delivered or otherwise cleared to the Owner's complete satisfaction. c. Keys shall be keyed to match existing locks and two keys shall be provided to the Owner. 8. HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Interior workings of all latch sets shall be stainless steel. All materials finish shall be satin stainless steel (32D). a. b. 94-021.002:03150 Hardware Schedule - A. For each exterior single door: 1%2 pair 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each 5 each 1 each Butts Lockset Deadlock Kickplate Threshold Weatherstrip Door Bottom Silencers Closure Hager Schlage Schlage Rockwood Pemko Pemko Pemko Rockwood Sargent Hardware Schedule - B. For each interior single door: 1%2 pair 1 5 Butts Passageway Silencers Hager Schlage Rockwood BB1191 NRP 4'/2x4'/2 US32D C53PD Orb 630 x 10-025 25l PD x 10-055-626 12" x 2" LDW US32D 170A -D 319AN Head and Jambs 315AN 608 350 BB1191 4%2x4%2 US32D C105 Orb. 630 x 10-025 608 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SK -3 9. GLASS MATERIAL: Glass for doors shall be'/. -inch tempered or laminated glass. Windows shall be glazed from the outside. Glass shall be bedded in aluminum window glazing compound and held in place by spring wire glazing clips and face puttied to a net trim line. Wire glass shall be 1/4 -inch, clear, diamond pattern. 10. WORKMANSHIP: All doors and frames shall be shop fabricated to required profiles with edges straight, true and sharp. Fabricate and fit accurately with hairline joints at corners, surfaces free of warp, wave, buckle and other defects. Welding best grade commercial work, with all exposed beads ground smooth. Door Clearances. Maintain the following door clearances: '/a -inch at head, 3/J2 -inch at strike jamb, '/a -inch at butt jamb, and as required where thresholds are listed. 11. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Handle, deliver and store doors in manner to prevent damage. Provide with proper ventilation to avoid creating a humidity chamber and entailed rusting. Provide temporary spreader in bottom of each jamb. Do not remove spreader until frames have been installed securely. 12. INSTALLATION AND CLEANING: a. Installation. Install frames plumb, rigid and in true alignment in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Brace properly until built in. Secure door frames to floor slab with a countersunk expansion device at each jamb. .Iambs built into masonry walls shall be slushed full of mortar at time of wall erection. All joints around door frames shall be sealed with General Electric Silicone "Sil-Pruf." Thresholds shall be set in a full bed of calk. b. Cleaning. After erection, clean all exposed surfaces of doors and frames. Touch-up abraded spots with same primer as used for shop coat, and leave in an acceptable condition ready for field painting. Remove all debris, packaging and excess material and leave work areas broom clean. 13. INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE: Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. After installation and fitting, remove all finish hardware, tag and box, and reinstall after completion of painting. Adjust and leave in perfect working condition. All doors shall operate freely, but not loosely, without sticking or binding, without hinge bound conditions, and with all hardware properly adjusted and functioning. Strikes shall be adjusted and so fitted to preclude rattling when doors are in closed and latched position. 94.021.002:03150 SK -4 a. Locations of Hardware. (1) Unless otherwise shown, hardware location shall be as follows: (a) Centerline of lock strike 38 -inches above floor. (b) Top Hinge: To Manufacturer's standard but not more than 11 inches from head of frame to centerline of hinge. (c) Bottom Hinge: To manufacturer's standard but not more than 13 inches from the finished floor to centerline of hinge. (d) Intermediate Hinge: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinge. (2) Door closing devices shall be installed in strict accordance with the templates and printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices. b. Inspections and Adjustments. At the completion of the work, a final inspection shall be made by the hardware supplier, or his agent, and the Engineer. Any hardware improperly installed shall be removed and reinstalled at the Contractor's expense. Make any and all adjustments recom mended by the hardware supplier or his agent. Save all adjusting wrenches instructions, keys and templates furnished with hardware and deliver same to the Owner. 14. PROTECTION: Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all doors and finish hardware from damage during the progress of the work. Upon completion, the Contractor shall properly clean all finish hardware and promptly replaced any damaged parts so that all hardware will be in perfect working order. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SL- I SPECIFICATION L GLAZING AND SKYLIGHTS 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The Specification covers furnishing and installing glazing, and skylights. 2. GLASS AND GLAZING: a. Materials. Wire glass shall be UL approved, and Safety Glass and Glazing shall comply with State Statutes, the UBC, and ANSI Z97.1 Elastic glazing compound shall comply with Federal Specification TT --781a, Type 1 or TT -G - 410e, Paintable type. Polyvinyl chloride glazing gaskets shall be extruded flexible PVC units of profile and hardness required for installation of watertight units. Setting blocks shall be ofneoprene, 70-90 durometer hardness with proven compatibility with sealant used. Preshimmed blazing tape shall be a preformed adhesive elastomeric butyl/polyisobutylene glazing tape with continuous built-in EPDM shim, and shall be specifically designed for pressure sealing of glazing units. The tape shall be compatible with sealant utilized. Spacers shall be of Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, and shall be compatible with sealants utilized. Compressible filler rod shall be closed -cell or waterproof -jacketed rod stock of rubber or plastic foam which is compatible with sealants utilized, shall remain flexible or resilient, and exhibit 5-50 psi compressive strength for 25 percent deflection. Cleaners, primers, and sealers shall be as recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Glazing compound shall be GS Silglaz N. Windows shall consist of clear tempered glass inside and outside, and separated by Y2- inch air space. b. Installation. Surfaces shall be clean and primed as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Verify that frames are plumb and square and that proper glass -to -stop face distance will be achieved. Openings shall be measured before tempered glass products are ordered. The opening to be glazed shall be taped to prevent glass from touching any metal. Center glass in glazing rabbet to maintain recommended clearances on all sides. Rest panes on setting blocks ar recommended by glass manufacturer. Install shims or use shim tape to 94-021.002:03150 S L-2 maintain clearance between strips and face of glass. Install glazing tape and stop in with metal stops. Cover top of tape with silicone sealant on exterior side of exterior windows. Maintain minimum face clearance between all glass faces and metal stops as called for by Flat Glass Marketing Association Standards. A I I glass shall be cut to smooth straight edges and to full size required by the openings. Edge distances shall comply with Flat Glass Marketing Association Standards. 3. SKYLIGHTS: The skylights shall be a double glazed, aluminum framed domed unit for fastening to a treated wood curb having a maximum O.D. curb dimensions of 251/4" x 491/4". The frame shall incorporate a thermal break to reduce condensation formation and an integral condensate gutter. The outer glazing shall be clear polycarbonate and the inner glazing shall be white translucent polycarbonate. The skylight shall be similar and equal to the Model 4 -MTB Duolite 2852 manufactured by Plasticrafts. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SM- I SPECIFICATION M SEALANTS AND CAULKING 1. SCOPE OF WORK: Provide alI sealant and caulking work, complete as indicated, specified, and required. This Specification is intended to be general in scope and not specific as to locations of caulking and sealants. Contractor shal I examine all Drawings and Details thoroughly and fam iliarize himself with the extent of the caulking and sealing involved. Only a complete and absolutely watertight and weathertight job will beaccepted. Additional information pertaining to sealing and/or caulking will be found in the various specific Specifications and shall be coordinated with the work of this Specification. 2. SUBMITTALS: Submit technical data by all manufacturers of proposed materials including color ofcaulk. Submit material manufacturer's printed preparation and application instructions to Engineer. 3. MATERIALS: a. Delivery. Deliver sealant and caulking compounds in unopened factory labeled containers. Labels shall bear statement of conformance to standards specified for each material and shall bear manufacturer's name and product designation. b. Sealant for Horizontal Surfaces, Exterior or Interior. Sealant shall be a two-part self leveling and pourable urethane equal to Vulkem 45 as manufactured by MAMECO International (The Master Mechanics Company), Cleveland, Ohio 44128, or approved materials produced by Product Research and Chemical Corporation, or Sika Chemical Company, or equal. Color of sealant shall be VuIkem standard gray. c. Sealant for Vertical Surfaces, Exterior or Interior. Sealant shall be a two-part non -sag (gun grade) manufactured by MAMECO International Vulkem 227, Sika Chemical Company, or equal. Color of sealant shall either be standard gray or standard black, whichever is compatible with the color of adjacent walls, as approved by the Engineer. d. primer. Where required, shall be used as recommended in writing by the sealant manufacturer. Primer shall have been tested for non -staining characteristics and durability on samples of actual surfaces to be sealed. e. Back -Up Materials and Preformed Joint Fillers. Use non -staining material, compatible with sealant and primer, and of a resilient nature, such as closed cell polyethylene rod, or elastomeric tubing or rod (neoprene, butyl, or EPDM). Materials impregnated with oil, bitumen, or similar materials shall not be used. Size and shape shall be as indicated by joint details in drawings and shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. Sealant shall not adhere to back-up material. f. Bond Breakers. Where required, shall be polyethylene tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. 94-021.002:03150 g. SM -2 Neoprene Pad. Designated neoprene pads at expansion joints shall be continuous in length and of designated width and length. Use neoprene which meets requirements of Section 25, Division 2 of AASHO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Table B Duro 70. 4. PRE -INSTALLATION: Install sealants and caulking by material manufacturer's approved applicator in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Sealant installer shall examine all surfaces and report to the Contractor all conditions not acceptable. 5. PREPARATION a. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt, frost, and old caulking materials. Sealant must be applied to the base surface. Previously applied paint or primer must be entirely removed. b. Porous materials such as concrete, masonry or stone should be cleaned where necessary by grinding, blast -cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or combination ofthese methods to provide a clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion. Laitance shall be removed by acid washing, grinding, or mechanical abrading. Form oils shall be removed by blast -cleaning. Loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading or blast -cleaning shall be removed by blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air (or vacuuming) prior to application of primer or sealant. c. Non -porous surfaces, such as metal and glass, shall be cleaned either mechanically or chemically. Protective coatings such as methacrylate lacquer on metallic surfaces shall be removed by a solvent that leaves no residue. Solvent shall be used with clean cloths or Tintless paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. Wipe dry with clean, dry cloths or lintless paper towels. d. Joint areas to be protected with masking tape or strippable films shall be cleaned before application of tape or film. e. All joints to receive sealant shall be as indicated on the Drawings or shop drawings. Do not seal joints until they are in compliance with drawings or meet with the approval of the Engineer. f. Joints to receive sealant shall be a minimum of wide by A -inch deep, unless otherwise approved. g. For joints in concrete, masonry, or stone the depth of the sealant may be equal to the width of joints up to %z -inch wide. For joints %z -inch to l -inch wide the depth shall be 1/2 -inch. For expansion and other joints, 1 to 2 inches wide the depth shall be not greater than %x the applied sealant width. For joints exceeding 2 inches in width: depth shall be as directed by sealant manufacturer. h. For joints in metal, glass, and other non -porous surfaces the sealant depth shall be a minimum of one-half the applied sealant width, and shall in no case exceed the applied sealant width. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SM -3 i. Joints to receive sealant, back-up material or preformed joint filler shall be cleaned out, raked to full width and depth as required by sealant installer. Joints shall be of sufficient width and depth to accommodate specified back-up material or preformed joint filler and sealant. 6. APPLICATION: a. Joint Filler. Install back-up material or joint filler, of type and size specified or required by the sealant manufacturer, at proper depth to provide sealant dimensions as detailed. Back-up material shall be of suitable size and shape and compressed 25-50 percent to fit joints as required. Sealant shall not be applied without back-up material and/or bond breaker strip. When using back-up tube avoid lengthwise stretching. Tube or rod shall not be twisted or braided. b. Apply masking tape, where required, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Prime surfaces, where required, with primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer. c. Follow sealant manufacturer's instruction regarding mixing(ifrequired), surface preparation, priming, and application procedure. For sealant application when air temperature is below 40°F consult sealant manufacturer for recommendations before applying sealant. d. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed. All joint surfaces shall be tooled to provide the contour as indicated on Drawings. When tooling joints, use tooling solution recommended by manufacturer. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. e. Cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 7. CLEAN -U(': Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition. 8. OUALITY CONTROL: The sealant joints shall be uniformly smooth, free of wrinkles, flush with adjacent surfaces and absolutely water tight. Adjacent surfaces which have been soiled by the application of the sealing compound shall be wiped clean and be left neat. The work wi l l be adjudged defective due to the sealant's hardening, cracking, crumbling, melting, wrinkling, shrinking, splitting, leaking, or running. 94-023.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SN -1 SPECIFICATION N CARPENTRY. MILLWORK, AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 1. SCOPE OF WORK: Furnish all material, equipment, supplies, and accessories required, and perform all operations needed for all woodwork shown on the Drawings and herein specified. The woodwork shall include, but not be limited to, all framing, retaining walls, signs, nailers for roofing and other connection work. Concrete form work is not included in this Specification. 2. MATERIALS: a. Standards. Standards for lumber and lumber products include: (1) Uniform Building Code; (2) National Design Standard for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastening; (3) American Lumber Standards, Simplified Practice Recommendations; (4) West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; (5) American Plywood Association; (6) American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA); (7) ASTM D245, Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber; (8) ASTM D2915, Allowable Properties for Grades of Structural Lumber; (9) Western Wood Products Association (WWPA); (10) American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC); (11) Standard for Structural Roof Decking (AITC 118). b. Dimension Lumber. Lumber shall be new, clean stock of Southern Pine or Douglas Fir S4S, grades shown for various uses. Grades shall conform to the grading rules of the manufacturer's association under whose rules the lumber is produced. Lumber shall bear the grade and trademark of the association under whose rules it is produced and a mark of mill identification. Dimension lumber shall be Douglas Fir -Larch. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, grading shall be as follows: 94.021.002:03150 (1) Light Framing - Light framing lumber 2 to 4 inches thick and 2 to 4 inches wide for use where high strength values are not required, such as plates, sills, cripples, blocking, etc., shall be WWPA Construction Grade. (2) Studs - Studs 2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 6 inches wide and 10 feet and shorter shall be of WWPA Stud Grade. (3) Structural Light Framing - Structural light framing 2 to 4 inches thick and 2 to 4 inches wide shall be WWPA N° 2 Grade. SN -2 (4) Structural Joists and Planks - Structural joists and planks 2 to 4 inches thick and 5 inches and wider for joists, rafters, and general structural framing shall be WWPA NQ 1 Grade. Lumber shall be seasoned and kiln dried. Except for trim and millwork, lumber shall be seasoned for not less than 30 days before being covered with finish material. The moisture content of the lumber shall not exceed 15 percent, in accordance with WWPA seasoning designation MC -15. Sizes shown on the Drawings are nominal. Actual sizes shall conform to American Lumber Association Standards PS 20-70. All lumber shall be S4S (surfaced four sides) unless otherwise indicated. c. Plywood. Each panel of construction and industrial plywood shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of U.S. Product Standard PS 1 and shall be identified with the appropriate grade -trademark of the American Plywood Association. All plywood which has any edge or surface permanently exposed to the weather shall be Exterior Type. Use -inch cedar exterior 32/16 plywood. Nail with 8d common spaced 6 -inches at panel edges and 12 -inches at intermediate supports or as detailed on the Drawings. Exterior siding shall be %-inch thickness, 4 x 8 foot panels, texture 1-11, Cedar. d. Wood Preservative. All exposed wood used in this project, joists, decking, and lumber in contact with concrete shall be pressure preservative treated with a water borne preservative equal to CCA (copper chromate arsenate). Retention and other requirements shall conform to AWPA Standard C28 and C2. Retention shall be 0.25 lbs. per cu. ft. All surfaces and edges shall be coated after any saw cutting. e. Connectors. All bolts and washers shall be cadmium plated or galvanized. Nails shall be galvanized. Sizes shall be according to requirements of the Uniform Building Code, Table 25-Q. 3. WORKMANSHIP: a. General. Furnishing, fabrication, installation, fastening, boring, notching, and cutting of all wood framing shall be in accordance with the reference specifications. Framing shall be constructed with joints true, tight and well -nailed or bolted, as required. All members shall have solid bearing without being shimmied. All horizontal members subject to bending shall be set with crown up and shall not be spliced between bearings. Do not splice framing members between bearing points, or shim short studs, trimmer, or headers. 94.021.002:03150 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SN -3 Frame opening with double studs with one stud to receive lintel in bearing. Roofdecking shall be installed in a two span continuous fashion. Provide double studs at openings; triple studs at corners; studs at all vertical joints of applied material. b. Storage -at -Site. Protect all materials from damage and weather. Store all lumber off the ground. Provide adequate ventilation for material. c. All Exposed Work. All exposed work shall be neat in every respect, with even spacing straight blocking lines and all nailing carefully done. d. Miscellaneous. Provide all necessary blocking, backing, bridging, fire stops, nailers, headers, cripples, etc., as required for all wood framing. e. Rough Hardware. Provide and install all rough hardware for proper installation of carpentry and millwork. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, and similar items shall be of types and sizes sufficient to draw and rigidly secure members in place, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 94-021.002.03150 SO -1. SPECIFICATION 0 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required, and of performing all operations needed in connection with furnishing and installing gypsum wallboard. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to the specification requirements, the gypsum wallboard and accessories by the following manufacturers is acceptable: US Gypsum Company National Gypsum Company Celotex Corporation Flintkote Building Products Company 3. MATERIALS: a. Gypsum Wallboard. Gypsum wallboard shall conform to ANSI/ASTM C36. Regular board shall be %-inch thick with tapered edges and furnished in lengths as long as practicable. All wall board in the equipment building shall be Moisture Resistant and have setting type joint compound. b. Screws. Screws shall conform to ANSI/ASTM C646 and shall be self -tapping with length to penetrate framing member or stud not less than %-inch. c. Accessories. Accessories shall be galvanized for general use and zinc for wet areas. Corner bead and casing and trim beads shall be standard type with mesh flanges. Where beads abut windows or other metal components, separate from other material by use of foam tape. d. Resilient Base. Resilient base shall conform to Base Standard, F.S. 55-2-40A(1), Type 1 or II. 4. INSTALLATION: a. General. Erect all wallboard vertically with edges over supporting members. Secure board to each support or framing member with screws so that head rests in a slight dimple without cutting face paper or fracturing core. Stagger edge joints on opposite side of a partition so they occur on different framing members. When cutting scribe and cut neatly. 94.021.002:03130 80-2 Set screws between 3/a and 1/2 -inch from edges spacing at 12 -inches maximum on center at edges and in field of board. b. Finishing. Securely attach continuous corner beads to all external corners. Apply joint treatment compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, filling joints and internal corners with compound. Embed tape in compound and after drying, apply additional compound feathering to a smooth even surface on each side of joint. Apply joint compound over heads of fasteners, allow to dry, then lightly sand. Apply second layer and sand. if wallboard is damaged or surfaces are roughened, repair or remove and replace. 94.021.002:03050 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP - SPECIFICATION P EXTERIOR FINISH 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work required under this Specification consists of furnishing all plant, labor and materials and performing all construction operations required by the Contractor to install an exterior wall covering on the Digester and new construction. The covering shall consist of mechanically attached insulation, mesh, polymer modified cement and textured finish. 2. GENERAL REOUIREMENTS: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval descriptions of all components, color and texture selection samples, and manufacturer's recommendations and installation details. The Contractor shall provide a manufacturer's warranty covering the materials and installation of the finish system. The warranty shall run for a period of five years and shall warrant the system to the Owner. 3. MATERIALS: Insulation shall be of the thickness shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C578-85, Type 4, and shall be extruded polystyrene as manufactured by the Dow Chemical Company. The insulation shall be fastened to concrete and/or masonry walls with non -rusting nails in nylon sheaths with expanding shanks and 11/2 -inch nylon collars. Fasteners for frame walls shall be non - rusting nails or screws with 11/2 -inch nylon washers. Reinforcing fabric shall be a balanced open - weave glass -fiber fabric made from twisted multi -end strands which conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1682. The base coat shall be a polymer -modified type 1 portland cement. The finish coat shall be an acrylic base material factory -mixed with color and texture forming materials. Fasteners, reinforcing fabric, base coat, and finish coat shall be by the same manufacturer, and shall be by Dryvit or equal. The Contractor shall also provide all drip channels, expansion joints, comer beds and other accessories as necessary to complete the installation of the surface system. Metal pieces shall be galvanized. The Contractor shall provide manufacturer certification that the finish system has been tested according to, and meets the minimum requirements of the following standards: Accelerated Weathering Freeze Thaw Resistance Impact Resistance Salt Spray Resistance Sand Abrasion Resistance Transverse Wind Load Mildew Resistance Rain Test (wind driven rain) 94-021.002 03150 ASTM G-53 ASTM C-67 ASTM D-1037 ASTM B-117 ASTM D-968 ASTM E-330, E-72 MIL STD 810B FED STD TT -C -55B SP -2 4. INSTALLATION: Insulation shall be placed from a level base line. Vertical joints shall be staggered and insulation boards interlocked at corners. Joints of insulation shall be butted tightly. Surfaces of adjacent boards shall be flush at joints. Reinforcing glass fabric shall be overlapped 3 inches. Insulation and reinforcing fabric shall be mechanically anchored with manufacturer's standard anchors spaced not more than 12 inches vertically or not more than 16 inches horizontally on masonry or 24 inches on studs. Approximately 50 percent of the mechanical anchors are fastened through the insulation board only and the balance through reinforcing mesh and board together. Provide expansion joints so that no area exceeds 150 square feet. The base coat shall be applied to the insulation by trowelling the materials into the reinforcing fabric in a tight coat and doubling back to 1/2 -inch to 3/16 -inch thickness. This coat shall be applied to level out surface areas and to fill joints smooth with adjacent areas. The finish coat shall be trowelled onto the base coat and floated, sprayed or otherwise worked to achieve an adobe texture. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SQ -1 SPECIFICATION Q PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and accessories required and of performing all operations needed in connection with the painting of the various parts of the work. No paint shall be applied to permanently finished equipment which is considered to be acceptable by the Engineer such as factory -finished motor control centers, control consoles, chlorinators, and motors for pumps, blowers, and mixers. All equipment, and their appurtenant parts such as guards and bases which arrive on the job site only shop primed, shall be painted in accordance with the appropriate painting system described following. All shop prime coats by equipment manufacturers shall be applied to surfaces as specified herein with paint that is approved and compatible with accepted top coat paint. A summary of the items to be painted or stained under this contract is given in paragraph 14 of this Specification. 2. MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. All paint and stain shall be mixed and applied with strict conformance to the paint manufacturer's directions, which will take precedence over this Specification. Selection of paints to be applied to each specific substrate material shall be verified with the paint manufacturer and his approval obtained. 3. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS: a. Unless otherwise specified, all work and materials for the preparation and coating of all metal surfaces shall conform to the applicable requirements specified in the Steel Structures Painting Manual. Volume 2. Systems and Specifications 1967, published by the Steel Structures Painting Council. b. The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council shall form a part of this Section. 94-021.002:03150 (1) White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP5). Removal of all visible rust, mill scale, paint, and foreign matter by blast cleaning by wheel or nozzle (dry) using sand, grit, or shot. (For very corrosive atmosphere). (2) dear -White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10). Blast cleaning nearly to White Metal Cleanliness, until at least 95 percent of each element of surface area is free of all visible residues. (For high humidity, chemical atmosphere, marine or other con-osive environment). (3) SQ -2 Commercial Blast (SSPC-SP6). Blast cleaning until at least 67 percent of each element of surface area is free of all visible residues. (4) Brush -Off Blast Clean ing(SSPC-SP7). Blast cleaning ofall except tightly adhering residues of mill scale, rust and coatings, exposing numerous evenly distributed flecks of underlying metal. (5) Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SPI). Removal of oil, grease, dirt, soil, salts, and contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion or steam. c. Ouality Assurance. Evaluation of surface preparation for ferrous metals will be based upon SSPC-Vis 1 ASTM Designation D 2200 and "Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces," SSPC-Vis 2 ASTM Designation D 610. 4. SUBMITTALS: a. Samples. Prepare and submit for Engineer's approval three copies of color samples on 8%" x 11" size cards for each paint and protective coating system. Each sample card shall clearly show each coat of the finish system, and shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name and product identification. Submittals shall be made in sufficient time to allow for approval and, if necessary, disapproval and resubmittal without causing any delay of the Project. Contractor shall furnish a one square foot steel panel for each type sandblasting specified. Panels shall be sandblasted in accordance with the sandblasting specifications and be coated with a non -yellowing clear coating. Panels shall be used as the standard for preparation of steel surfaces for the duration of this Project. b. Coating Materials List. The paints to be used on the various substrate materials shall be of the best quality commercial and industrial grades and shall be manufactured by nationally known and approved paint manufacturers with local representation. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of 3 copies of a Painting Schedule. This schedule shall give the information listed below for all the paints and stains he intends to use. This shall be done for substituted paints as well as those listed in the painting systems. Other manufacturer's products may be used provided they are approved as equal. 94-021.002:03130 Name of the manufacturer of the paint; Type of paint (chemical composition type such as alkyd, epoxy, vinyl, etc.); Trade name and number of each specific paint; Number of coats to be applied for each paint; Dry film thickness to be achieved for each coat; 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SQ -3 (6) Spreading rate at which each coat will be applied; (7) Color name and number accompanied by color chart; (8) Results ofaccepted tests (ASTM, Fed. Std.) for hardness abrasion, impact resistance, and affects of weathering, etc. c. Product Data Sheets. Contractor shall submit paint and coatings material manufacturer's printed technical data sheets for products intended for use in each of various paint and coating system. Data sheets shall fully describe material as to its intended use, make-up, recommended surface preparation and application conditions, primers, material mixing and application (including recommended dry mil thickness), precautions, safety and maintenance cleaning directions. d. Painting Schedule. The Contractor shall submit his protective coating schedule for shop and field coatings of items to receive protection. The schedule shall list the specified requirements for surface preparation, priming, coating, and color for items scheduled by this specification, and shall list the same requirements for similar work not specifically called -out. No bare ferrous nonworking surfaces shall be omitted from the schedule. Particular care shall be taken to cover in sufficient detail the coating of mechanical joints and other mechanical devices which shall conform to the recommended practice of the manufacturer of the joint or other mechanical devices. e. Written Approval of Coatings Manufacturer. For all coatings to be applied to new and existing concrete, concrete block, and wood, written approval shall be obtained from the coatings manufacturer for the items listed below. Six copies of this written approval shall be submitted to the Engineer after the coatings manufacturer has personally inspected each of the following conditions: (1) Final surface preparation of all surfaces prior to coating application. (2) Sequencing of application of coatings as to when each surface of each wall and ceiling shall be coated. This is intended to keep the coatings manufacturer informed of the status of the job at all times so that he can govern the application process to be assured that alt coatings are applied within his recommendation. f. Certificates. Coatings to be used on plastic and fiberglass materials shall be certified as acceptable by all plastic and fiberglass manufacturers whose products are to be coated. Certification copies shall be submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor shall be certified in writing by all painting and coating material manufacturers as qualified applicators of their products, and copies of the certification submitted to the Engineer. 94.021.002:03150 SQ -4 5. PROTECTION OF WORK: The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage to his work or the work of others during the time his work is in progress. 6. EXTRA STOCK: The Contractor shall del iver to the Owner a minimum of a one gallon can of each type and color of finish paint and coating used on the project and a one gallon can of each primer. Each container shall be unopened and properly labeled for identification. 7. JOB CONFERENCE: Prior to commencing work a pre -job conference shall be held for the purpose of reviewing and clarifying the painting and coating requirements of the project. The Owner, Contractor, Applicator, Coatings and Paint Manufacturers, and the Inspector shall be present. A schedule of work to be accomplished will be established. 8. MATERIALS: a. General. Surfaces to receive paint protective coating materials as scheduled or specified in this Section shall be coated in conformance with the applicable coating systems specified. All paint and coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations as approved by Engineer. So far as possible, all paint and coating materials shall be provided by a single source supplier. The term "coating materials," as used herein, shall include enamels, paints, sealers, epoxy resins, stains, and al I other paints and protective coatings, excepting galvanizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. All materials specified by name or selected for use under these Specifications, shall be delivered unopened at the job site in their original containers and shall not be opened until inspected by the Engineer. Paint and protective coating materials shall be sealed in containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than five gallons. Materials shall conform to the specifications shown herein and to the requirements hereinafter specified. Products shall be standard for recognized manufacturer engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical or similar applications in the water and wastewater treatment industry. b. Compatibility. Only compatible materials shall be used in the work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, subject to approval of the Engineer, a compatible barrier coat shall be applied between all existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to insure compatibility. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SQ -5 c. Colors. All colors and shades of colors of all coats of paints and protective coating material shall be as selected by the Engineer. Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade, as directed by the Engineer to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. 9. PAINTING SYSTEMS: The following are the general painting systems. Painting Schedule and Coatings Materials List to be submitted by the Contractor shall contain painting systems similar and equal to those listed below, for each substrate category. a. Concrete, Concrete Block, and Brick Masonry: (1) System Al. Exterior Concrete Block Walls. Paint Type: Acrylic Latex Surface Preparation: Substrate surface shall be sound, clean and free of dirt, loose mortar, paint, films, protective coating, efflorescence, etc. All steel tie rods and rein forcement shall be held or cut back to'/. -inch from substrate surface and patched tightly with cementious patching material. Manufacturer: Tnemec paint Name and N2 Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate Coat NQ 1: 6 -Color Tneme-Cryl 2.0 - 3.0 263 sq.ft./gal. Coat N2 2: 6 -Color Tneme-Cryl 2.0 - 3.0 263 sq.ft./gal. (2) System A2. Interior Concrete Block Walls to be painted. Paint Type: Polyamide Epoxy Surface Preparation: Substrate surface shall be sound, clean and free of dirt, loose mortar, paint, insulation, insulation glue and mastic films, protective coating, efflore- scence, etc. All steel tie rods and reinforcement shall be held or cut back to 3/4 -inch from substrate surface and patched tight with cementious patching material. Patch any other defects as directed. Prepare surfaces by etching with solution containing I part muriatic acid to 2 to 4 parts fresh water. Rinse with clean water under pressure while scrubbing with stiff brushes or brooms. Test with pH paper and continue rinsing until pH of 7 or higher is obtained. Remove excess water by brooms or squeegees and allow to dry thoroughly before coating. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N0 Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate Coat N°l: Hi -Build Epoxoline 66 5 *1 180 sq.ft./gal. 94-021.002:03150 (3) SQ -6 Coat NQ2: Hi -Build Epoxoline 66 5 ±1 180 sq.ft./gal. System A3. Exterior Concrete - Below Grade Paint Type: Asphalt Base Coating Surface Preparation: The same as A2, allow concrete to cure 28 days. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and NQ Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate Coat NQ 1: Foundation Coating Series 478 Coat NQ 2: Foundation Coating Series 475 100 sq.ft./gal. 140 sq.ft./gal. (4) ,System A4. Submerged or Continually Moist Concrete or Concrete Block. Paint Type: Asphalt Extended Urethane Elastomer Surface Preparation: Any curing compound shall be removed by sand blasting. Substrate surface shall be sound, clean and free of dirt, loose mortar, paint, films, protective coatings, efflorescence, etc. All steel tie rods and reinforcement shall be held or cut back to 3/4 -inch from substrate surface and patched tight with cementitious patching material. Brush blast surface immediately ahead of application as per manufacturer's directions. Surface shall be dry. Manufacturer: CIM Industries Paint Name and NQ Dry Mil Thickness Svreadina Rate Bonding Agent n.a. 450 sf/gal Coat NQ 1: CIM 1000 30 mil 50 sf/gal Coat N2 2: CIM 1000 30 mil 50 sf/gal b. Steel, structural and plate: (I) 94-021.002:03130 System B 1. Interior/Exterior Steel - Submerged in water. Paint Type: Polyamide Epoxy Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oils, and contaminants. Remove all weld splatters and grind rough and sharp welds to smooth rounded contour and blast clean to near -white metal finish (SSPC-SP10). Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N° SQ -7 Dry Mil Thickness Spreading, Rate Coat Ns I : 66-Epoxoline Primer 2.5 +1 or -0.5 Coat N9 2: 66 -Hi -Build Epoxoline 4± 1 Coat N9 3: 66 -Hi -Build Epoxoline 4 ± 1 215 sq.ft./gal. 225 sq.ft./gal. 225 sq.ftigal. Note: Coat N2 1 does not have to be applied to materials which have been shop primed in accordance with these specifications. (2) System B2. Interior/Exterior Steel Railings, Doors, Miscellaneous Metalwork—Not submerged but Exposed to Moist Atmosphere and/or Sunlight and Weather. (3) Paint Type: Aliphatic Polyurethane semi -gloss Enamel over polyamide epoxy. Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oils and contaminants. Remove all weld splatters and grind rough and sharp welds to smooth rounded contour and blast clean to near -white metal finish (SSPC-SP10). Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N2 Coat NQ 1: Hi -Build Epoxoline 66 Coat N2 2: 71 -Color Endura -Shield Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate 5±1 1.5 to 2.5 System B3. Interior Steel - Not submerged, Very Mild Exposure. Paint Type: Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel 180 sq.ft./gal. 433 sq.ft./gal. Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oils and contaminants. Remove all weld splatters and grind rough and sharp welds to smooth rounded contour and blast clean to commercial blast finish (SSPC-SP6). Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N° Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate Coat NQ 1: 37-77 Chem -Prime Coat NQ 2: 23 Enduratone Coat NQ 3: 23 Enduratone 2.0 to 3.5 1.5 to 3.0 1.5 to 3.0 250 sq.ft./gal. 384 sq.ft./gal. 384 sq.ft./gal. (4) System B4. Interior/Exterior Galvanized Steel Surfaces. Paint Type: Aliphatic Polyurethane semi -gloss enamel over Polyamide Epoxy 9442 .002:03 50 SQ -8 Surface Preparation: All galvanized surfaces which are scratched, marred, or otherwise damaged shall be patched with Carbolinets Carbo Zinc 11, "Drygaly" by American Solder and Flux Company, Rust-Oleum 7085 Cold Galvanizing Compound, or equal. This applies whether or not the surface is to be painted. Prior to painting, remove all grease, oils and contaminants with solvents (SSPC-SPI) recommended by the specific paint manufacturer. Ifrequired by paint manufacturer, apply etching solution and flush off in accordance with specific paint manufacturer's recommendations. All surfaces to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N2 Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate Coat N0 1: Hi -Build Epoxoline 66 5 f 1 180 sq.ft./gai. Coat N4 2: 71 -Color Endurashield 1.5 to 2.5 433 sq.ft./gal. c. Piping: (1) System CI. Steel and Ductile and Cast Iron without exterior Bituminous Coating: Use painting systems B1 through B3. (2) System C2. Ductile and Cast Iron, Bituminous Coated: (3) 94-021.002:03150 (a) Submerged: Use painting system B1 including blast cleaning. (b) Interior Piping, not submerged: Use painting system B2 except Coat N2 1 shall be a one or two dry mil thickness and Coat N4 2 of 5 dry mil coat of Polyamide Epoxy (Hi -Build Epoxoline 66) and then one coat of Aliphatic Polyurethane (71 -Color Endura Shield). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 System C3. Copper Piping, Plastic Piping and Fiberglass Piping (and small tanks): ' Do not paint when submerged. For other applications use: Paint Type: Aliphatic Polyurethane semi -gloss enamel over polyamide epoxy. Surface Preparation: Prepare according to manufacturer's recommendation for each specific application. Remove all grease, oils and contaminants. Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N2 Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate Coat N0 1: Hi -Build Epoxoline 66 5 ± 1 175 sq.ft./gal. Coat N4 2: 71 -Color Endura -Shield 1.5 to 2.5 577 sq.ft./gal. 1 1 1 1 1 1 d. Wood and Drywall: (1) SQ -9 System D 1. I nterior/Exterior Wood and Drywall - Wal Is, Ceilings, Doors, Trim, etc. not exposed to continually wet conditions: Paint Type: Semi -gloss Alkyd Enamel Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oil, and contaminants. Putty all nail holes. Shellac knots and pitch pockets. Fill cracks and nail holes after primer is dry. Sand smooth. Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N° Dry Mil Thickness Spreading Rate For Drywall: Coat N2 1:51-792 PVA Sealer 1.5 ± 0.5 299 sq.ft./gal. For Wood: Coat NQ 1: 36-603 Undercoater 2.5 ± 0.5 340 sq.ft./gal. For Both: Coat N4 2: Series 23 Enduratone Coat NQ 3: Series 23 Enduratone 1.5 to 3.0 1.5 to 3.0 384 sq.ft./gal. 384 sq.ft./gal. (2) System D2. Interior/Exterior Wood and Drywall - Walls and Ceilings not exposed to wet conditions. (3) 94-021.002:03150 Paint Type: Flat Acrylic Latex Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oil and contaminants. Putty all nail holes. Sand smooth. Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Tnemec Paint Name and N2 For Wood only: Coat NQ I : 36-603 Undercoater Dry Mil Thickness 2.5 ± 0.5 For Wood, Drywall, and Concrete Ceilings: Coat N4 2: Series 6 Tneme-Cryl 2.5 ± to 0.5 Coat N2 3: Series 6 Tneme-Cryl 2.5 * to 0.5 System D3. Interior/Exterior Wood - Semi Transparent Stain: Spreading Rate 340 sq.ft./gal. 263 sq.ft./gal. 263 sq.ft./gal. 4 SQ -10 Stain Type: Alkyd -Resin Stain Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oil and contaminants. Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Olympic Stain Name and N9 Spreading Rate Coat N9 1: Olympic Semi -Transparent Stain Coat N2 2: Olympic Semi -Transparent Stain 150 sq.ft./gal. 250 sq.ft./gal. (4) System D4. Interior/Exterior Wood - Heavy Bodied Stain: Stain Type: Alkyd -Resin Stain Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oil and contaminants. Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Olympic Stain Name and N2 Spreading Rate (5) Coat N2 1: OIympic Solid Color Stain Coat N4 2: Olympic Solid Color Stain 150 sq.ft./gal. 250 sq.ft./gal. System D5. Interior/Exterior Wood - Clear, Wood Preservative: Paint Type: Pentachlorophenol Penetrating Resin Surface Preparation: Remove all grease, oil and contaminants. Surface to be dry. Manufacturer: Woodlife Paint Name and N2 Spreading Rate Coat N2 1: Woodlife Coat N9 2: Woodlife e. Aluminum (1) 150 sq.ft./gal. 150 sq.ft./gal. System E1. Interior/Exterior Aluminum: Use painting system B4. Aluminum hand- rails are not to be painted unless shown on the Drawings. 10. SURFACE PREPARATION: Surface preparation of each substrate material shall be as described in the painting systems breakdown and completed prior to beginning the painting operation. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SQ -11 a. Sandblasting. As a minimum all structural steel, metalwork, piping, and other metal surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, oil, and contaminants by the use of solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the paint which will be applied. When blasting is required in the surface preparation of a painting system, the blasting shall be performed with conformance to the SSPC standards referenced above. All dust created by the blasting operation must be removed immediately after the blasting operation by vacuuming or brushing. The first coat of paint should be applied to the steel as soon as possible and always the same day that the blasting is done. The Contractor shall continue to blast the surface of the steel until such time as the Engineer is satisfied that the steel being blasted is of a quality equal to the specified SSPC grade. When sandblasting is done in the field, care shall be taken to prevent damage to structures and equipment. Pumps, motors, and other equipment shall be shielded, covered, or otherwise protected to prevent the entrance of sand. No sandblasting may begin before the Engineer inspects and approves the protective measures. b. Items not to be Coated. Hardware, hardware accessories, name plate data tags, machined surfaces and similar items in contact with coated surfaces not to be coated shall be removed or masked prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Following completion of coating of each piece, removed items shall be reinstalled. Such removal and installation shall be done by workmen skilled in the trades involved. c. Shop Coating. Fabricated metalwork and equipment which requires coating may be shop primed with specified primer. Any such work delivered to the job site with any other shop coat shall have this coating removed and the specified coating applied in the field. Manufactured equipment with approved corrosion resistant factory finishes and galvanized finishes shall be exempt from this requirement of stripping. Any prime coat which shall be shop applied shall meet the requirements stated in this specification. The manufacturers of such items shall submit the information required in paragraph 4-b. of this section, for each manufactured item. The Contractor shall coordinate shop prime coat painting and finish coat painting to insure compatibility. 11. APPLICATION METHODS: a. Workmanship. Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on all work. All paint and coatings shall be applied in aworkmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of specified uniform thickness. Edges,corners,crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to insure that they have been thoroughly cleaned and that they receive an adequate thickness of paint. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of another coat of paint would not increase the hiding. Adjacent installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures. 94.021.002:03150 SQ -12 b. Application. Exterior painting shall not be done during damp or freezing weather. Paint manufacturer's directions for cold weather applications shall be followed explicitly. Al! fresh work shall be protected from damage including drift from sandblasting. For interior work, the temperature shall not be allowed to fall below 60°F, and for exterior work, below40°F in the shade, while paint is being applied, or while it is drying. Each coat of paint shall be given at least 48 hours to dry before the next coat is applied, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer's instructions. Where conditions are other than normal because ofthe weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, longer drying times will be necessary. Additional coats of paint shall not be applied, nor shall units be returned to service until paints are thoroughly dry. On metal surfaces, each coat of paint shall be applied at the rate specified to achieve the average dry mil thickness required. Allowable maximum variations from the average are given, however, the average must be achieved. Deficiencies in the average or in the maximum variation must be corrected. On concrete and/or masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture. However, in no case shall the stated spreading rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, a protective and decorative finish shall be achieved. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s) of paint. Paint both faces and all edges of doors which require painting. Doors between rooms having different finishes shall have edges finished to match the room the door opens into. Knife -putty nail holes upon the priming coat with putty tinted to color of finished work. Putty full and flush with surrounding surfaces; thumb -puttying will not be perm itted. Permit to dry and harden before applying next coat. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint, and for the particular purpose, shall be allowed, and all such thinning shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, as well as with the full knowledge and approval of the Engineer. The dry film thickness shall remain the same and the spreading rate shall be reduced in proportion to the thinner. All coats will be of the same color except where specified differently. 12. CLEAN-UP/TOUCH-UP WORK: Upon completion, carefully remove all spatterings of paint material from adjoining work, glass, plumbing fixtures, trim and concrete surfaces. A detailed inspection of paint work shall be made and disfigured portions thereof shall be satisfactorily touched -up or refinished to produce an acceptable job. All used implements of service, rubbish and I debris, resulting from the work shall be removed from the premises and the entire project left in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition. 13. TESTING AND INSPECTION: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. Contractor's Inspection. The Contractor shall conduct film thickness measurements and electrical inspection ofthe coated surfaces with equipment furnished by him and shall re -coat and repair as necessary for compliance with the Specifications. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SQ -13 b. Inspection Devices Furnished. The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating and painting, inspection devices described below in good working cond ition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry -film thickness of coatingsandpaints. The Contractor shall also furnish U.S. DepartmentofCommerce, National Bureau ofStandards certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of dry -film thickness gauge and certified instrumentation to test accuracy. Dry-fi Im thickness gauges shall be made available for the Inspector's use at all times until final acceptance ofapplication. Holiday detection devices shall be operated in the presence of the Inspector. Inspection devices shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at the direction of the Inspector. c. Owner's Inspection and Devices Used. After repaired and re -coated areas have cured, final inspection tests will be conducted by the Owner or Owner's representative. Coating thicknesses specified in mils on ferrous substrates will be measured with a nondestructive magnetic type dry -film thickness gage such as the Elcometer, manufactured by Gardner Laboratories, Inc. Discontinuities, voids and pinholes in the coatings will be determined with a nondestructive type electrical holiday detector. Epoxy coatings and other thin fi Im coatings will be checked for discontinuities and voids with a low voltage detector of the wet -sponge type, such as Model M I as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor. Use a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo -Flo, which shall be added to the water prior to wetting the sponge. A high voltage, low current, spark type detector such as Model EP, manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, will be used for electrical inspection of only coal tar enamel. All pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations and retested. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted. Wide film thickness discrepancies shall be measured and verified with a micrometer or other approved measuring instrument. Coatings not in compliance with the Specifications will not be acceptable and shall be replaced, and reinspected at Contractor's expense. On non-ferrous surfaces, dry film thickness readings shall be taken at random locations with a Tooke Gauge at the rate of approximately five readings per 100 square feet of surface. Groove cut into coating shall be repaired by application of all coats of paint or coating film being tested. The average of all readings for a given area or surface shall be within required dry film thickness range and no individual reading shall be more than 20 percent below the recommended dry film thickness. Any areas that are found to be below standard shall be marked and re -coated to obtain proper film thickness. d. Warranty Inspection. Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of al coating and painting work. All personnel present at the Pre -Job Conference shall attend this inspection. 94-021.002:03130 1 1 SQ- 14 14. PAINT AND COATING SCHEDULE: 1 a. General. The following schedules shall indicate the coating system to be used at different locations. The list shall not be construed as a complete list of all surfaces to be coated but rather as a guide as to the application of the various coating systems. All surfaces shall be painted except those specifically excepted. The Engineer shall select the colors. Where reference is made to ferrous metal in this schedule, it shall not include stainless steel but does include galvanized metals. b. process Pining Code. Exposed steel and iron pipe shall be painted in accordance with the Pipe color Schedule below. A11 exposed pipe, including steel, copper and brass tubing, galvanized steel, and polyvinyl chloride, shall be identified by labeling to show its function. Stencil painted labels and arrows showing the direction of flow shall be instal led every 15 feet or each change of direction in accordance with ANSI A13.1. Labeling and flow arrows shall be Located at all wal I penetrations. The label may be abbreviated and shall conform to the piping abbreviations or legends shown on Drawings. Letters on major process piping shall be at least 2 -inches high. On smaller piping letters shall be of the largest feasible size. Snap on pipe markers by Seton Name Plate Corporation are an acceptable alternative. Pipe Color Schedule Title Color Label/Letters Air Light Green Blue/White Compressed AirDark Green Yellow/Black Potable Water Dark Blue w/ 6 -inch Green/White white bands @ 30 -inches Chlorine (gas and solution) Yellow Green/White Sewer Dark Grey Green/White Non -titled Piping Light Gray - — Electrical Conduit Match wall Do not label conduit Scum Light Brown Green/White WAS/RAS Dark Brown Green/White c. Miscellaneous Items. (1) Indicator post, traffic posts, guard rails and ladders, shall be safety yellow, matching OSHA Safety Yellow color using specified coating System 8-2. (2) Handwheels and operating handles of all valves and equipment shall be safety red, matching OSHA Safety Red Color, using Coating System 13-2. d. Coating System Schedule. The following Schedule indicates the coating system required for general areas. For this coating system "Piping" shall be defined as all pipes, valves, fittings, 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SQ- 15 supports, operating steins and guides. Mechanical equipment shall include all drives, motor control panels, electrical equipment and accessory equipment requiring a protective coating. The colors of mechanical equipment shall be selected by the Engineer. Piping colors are specified above. COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE J.ocation to be Coated Coating Color System 1. Paint all interior concrete block walls. Beige A2 2. Paint all exposed non -galvanized, non -submerged steel surfaces both interior and exterior, including steel supports, platforms, doors, windows, and frames. * B2 3. Interior drywall and sheathing. 4. Paint all existing and new flashing and scuppers. 5. Paint all exposed steel piping. 6. Paint all exposed ductile and cast-iron piping. 7. Paint all exposed copper, PVC, and fiberglass piping. 8. Paint all exposed galvanized piping. 9. Paint all exposed electrical conduit. * Match roof color -- see Specification "Roofing and Sheet Metal" ** Refer to previous requirements of this specification. 94.021.002:03150 Beige ** DI B4 C1 C 1 ,C2 C3 B4 C3,B4 SR.- I SPECIFICATION R LABORATORY FURNISHINGS 1. SCOPE: The work to be performed in accordance with this Specification includes the provision and installation of the laboratory furnishings in the office as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Refer to Specification Interior Piping and Plumbing and General Equipment Provisions. 2. OFFICE FURNITURE: A. General. Each sectional unit shall be completely fabricated, ready for placement in the office, and shall be a complete, rigid, integral unit in itself to permit relocation at any subsequent time. All steel used shall be cold rolled, prime grade, free from scratches, ragged edges or other imperfections steel shall be cleaned and phosphatized before finish coatings. Minimum steel thickness shall be 18 gauge, except as noted herein. Standard cabinet units shall be so constructed that they will permit quick and easy change, after installation, from drawers to doors, or vice versa, or a substitution of two half -depth drawers in place of a standard depth drawer without the use of drills or machinery with only the purchase of the necessary parts. All sectional units to be located on the floor shall be equipped with leveling devices easily adjustable from within the units, to compensate for unevenness in the concrete floor. B. Cabinets. Uprights shall be formed into not less than a channel construction at front, top, back, and bottom. Uprights shall be electrowelded at all junctures. Bottom front horizontal toe space rail shall be formed to provide a rectangular recessed toe space fully enclosed, having a channel formation at the face and bottom. Toe space shall be integral with cabinet, 3 -inches deep by 5 -inches high and dust -proof. The frame assembly shall consist of welded angular sections forming an outer frame. Vertical and horizontal intermediates shall be channel sections. The frame shall have a cushioning neoprene gasket against which all drawers and doors will close to prevent dust gaps and to provide sound deadening. The frame shall be designed so that all drawers and doors are separated by concealed horizontal support rails. Backs of all units shall have a 16 gauge top and bottom rail, and the section between the rails shall be left open for mechanical access. Removable backs to close this space between the top and bottom rails. Adjustable shelves shall be constructed with 14 gauge, double channels at front and rear, formed down on ends. Shelves shall be supported by a shelf support channel which shall rest on adjustable shelf clips. 94.021.002:03150 S R-2 Drawer assembly shall consist of a drawer back, drawer body, inner drawer head and outer drawer head. Either drawer head assembly shall be less than 3/4 -inch thick. Drawer shall operate quietly and smoothly on a nylon roller channel suppression with front ball-bearing roller set into case channels and rear nylon rollers set into drawer channels. No steel -to -steel contact shall be perm itted. All drawer parts shall be phosphate coated and completely painted before final assembly. Door assembly shall consist of an inner and outer door pan. Door assembly shall be'/. -inch thick. One 14 -gauge hinge reinforcement shall be welded to inner pan at hinge locations before pan assembly. All parts of the door assembly, which will be concealed after door is assembled, shall be painted completely be assembly of door. Wal I case cabinets, aprons, and drawer sections shall compliment and match adjoining units and conform to the specifications for base cabinet construction. Base cabinets, wel I cabinets, and all accessories shall be equivalent to those manufactured by VWR Scientific. c. Counter Tops and Working Surfaces. All counter tops and working surfaces shall be of molded epoxy resin. Tops shall be a uniform mixture throughout. Tops with a surface coating are not allowed. All counter tops and working surfaces shall have physical and mechanical properties to provide excellent resistance to chemicals, stains, and abrasion and shall be similar to the Kemresin material of VWR Scientific. Ali joints shall be made with a chemical and corrosion resistant cement having the same properties as the base material. Counter tops shall have a raised, rounded dripguard feature on the front edge and shall have a minimum'/4-inch thick working surface with molded 4" high rear curb. Counter tops shall be provided in as long of lengths as practical to minimize joints and shall be predrilled and precut for mounting of sink, electrical, and service fittings. d. Lab Furnishing Schedule. The arrangement of the lab furnishings is diagrammed on the Drawings. Item letters refer to those shown on Drawings. Model numbers refer to furnishings by VWR Scientific. A Drawer cabinet (CFD -2306-I0) B 94-021.002:03150 Sink cabinet (CFG-2006-F2I ), provide with sink top counter, 15" wide x 18" long x 1 I" deep sink (VF -1003-00) with faucet (VET -0340-00) and sink outlet (VF -0469-00). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SS -1 SPECIFICATION S VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 1. SCOPE QF WORK: This section covers vinyl composition tile floor coverings, and cove base. This type of floor covering to be provided in the office. 2. MATERIALS: The materials furnished shall be as follows: Vinyl Composition Tile Fed Spec SS -T-312, Type IV, Composition I. Size 12 inches square. Thickness '/s -inch. Reducing Strip Material compatible with floor covering, formed into tapered strip. Cove Base Fed Spec SS -W-40, Style B; vinyl or rubber, 0.080 inch thick. Height 4 inches. Adhesives As recommended by manufacturer of resilient flooring material. Floor Leveling Material Factory prepared; Camp "Latex Liquid Felt" or Flintkote "Tile -Tex Latex Underlayment." Protective Paper Fed Spec UU-B-790, Type 1, Grade C. Style 4; laminated paper with nonstaining adhesive; St. Regis "Seekure." 3. COLORS: Colors will be selected from the manufacturer's standard colors after the award of contract. If requested by the Engineer, samples shall be submitted for color selection. Only one color of vinyl composition tile will be required for the project. 4. SAMPLE$: After the color has been selected, samples of resilient floor covering and base materials shall be submitted to the Engineer. Tile samples shall be full thickness, and each sample shall be marked on the back with identifying color, shade, pattern, thickness, and manufacturer's name. Samples of cove base and reducing strip shall be submitted in 6 -inch lengths. 5. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Materials shall be delivered to the job in the original unopened containers clearly marked with manufacturer's brand and name. Materials shall be handled carefully and stored in weatherproof enclosures. Materials shall be stored at not less than 70°F for 48 hours before installation. 94.021.002:03150 1 SS -2 1 6. SURFACE PREPARATION: Installation of floor coverings shall no begin until the subfloor is completely dry and, insofar as practicable, the work of all other trades has been completed. Before laying floor coverings, the floor surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, plaster, oil, grease, paint, or other foreign substances. All holes, hollow spaces, and other imperfections in the surfaces to be covered with resilient floor covering shall be filled with floor leveling material. The leveling material shall cure for 24 hours before the floor covering is installed. The floor shall be dry and shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 70°F for 48 hours before, during laying, and for 10 days after the floor covering is laid. 7. APPLICATION: Floor coverings shall be thoroughly and continuously cemented to the floor with adhesive applied in a thin film and spread evenly with a notched steel trowel or other suitable application tool. Tile shall be laid with grain running in perpendicular direction between adjacent tiles. Tile shall be laid starting at the center of each room, working toward the walls, with the run of tile laid out so that opposite edge tiles are the same width. Except where otherwise indicated on the drawings, all lines shall be kept straight and parallel or at right angles with room lines, straightness being checked at frequent intervals. Edge tile shall be scribed to the wall, cut, and fitted in place after the field tile has been applied. Care shall be taken to make all tile joints flush, so as to present a smooth, continuous even surface, free from gaps or irregularities, with all joints tight, and each unit firmly and tightly cemented. Except at doorways where metal thresholds are specified under the finish hardware section, reducing strips shall be installed at exposed edges of floor covering where the elevation of the floor covering is higher than the adjacent floor surface. 8. INSTALLATION OF BASES: Bases shall not be installed until the surfaces against which they are to be applied are dry and clean. Bases shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and continuously cemented in place. All joints and angles shall be neat and tight. Each base, throughout its entire length, shall have top and bottom edges in firm contact with walls and floors. Stair base shall be carefully scribed and cut to contour to fit tightly at each tread and each riser. 9. EXTRA TILE: One extra full box of vinyl composition tile shall be furnished to the Owner. 10. PROTECTION AND FINAL CLEANING: Resilient floor coverings shall be protected from damage until acceptance by the Owner. Areas that are subject to traffic or over which materials or equipment are to be moved shall be temporarily covered with durable nonstaining protective paper. Just before final inspection, the entire surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, waxed, and polished with a heavy polishing machine. Chemicals and waxes used in cleaning and dressing floor surfaces shall be suited to the type of floor covering. 94021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ST -1 SPECIFICATION T WOOD CRIBBING RETAINING WALLS 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed in accordance with the requirements of this specification consists of furnishing and installing all equipment, materials and labor necessary to complete the wood cribbing retaining wall as shown on the plans. 2. MATERIALS: a. Timbers. Shall be Ponderosa Pine rough sawn, treated to 0.40 Ib/cu ft of CCA. All timbers, 6x6, shall meet the following AWPA specifications: P593, C193, and C293. b. Hardware Cloth. Full galvanized, '/i -inch opening. Metal wire screen shall be placed in continuous sections behind sections for retaining wall openings. Screen shall be securely fastened to timbers prior to backfilling. c. Fasteners. Fasteners consist ofa minimum 18 -inch length ofgrade 40, No 4 rebar, hot dipped galvanized. 3. INSTALLATION: Base timbers shall be installed level on thoroughly compacted backfill or foundation material. After each layer of timbers and counterforts are installed and fasteners are in place, the backfill shall be installed and compacted in place over counterfonts. Compact fill to 90 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D698. Place hardware cloth behind facing timbers to prevent backfill material from exiting open spaces in the front of the wall. Any timbers cut shall be re -coated with the wolmanizing compound as directed by the manufacturer. All holes for fasteners shall be drilled 7/1G -inch in diameter, full depth. Every second timber shall be drilled and fastened so that the fastener penetrates the two timbers below. 94-021.002:03150 SU -1 SPECIFICATION U DEWATERING WELLS 1. SCOPE OF WORK: The work under this Specification shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and services as are necessary for the drilling, construction, development, and testing of dewatering wells as described herein and as shown on the Drawings. The locations and design of the dewatering wells are presented in the Drawings and include several assumptions for the purpose of this Specification, pending the outcome of construction and testing of two dewatering wells, and the dimensions of the excavation. Installation and testing of two dewatering wells are needed to quantify aquifer hydraulics and dewatering rates, and to design and locate additional dewatering wells. Six additional wells are anticipated at this time. The actual depth to bedrock will affect well depths and final well design. Aquifer hydraulics will affect well spacing and well design. The Contractor shall reference the Soils Report for additional information. 2. ANTICIPATED HYDROGEOLOGIC CONDITIONS: Actual lithology for this site is partially known. Review of records from soil borings and geologic maps suggest the following which shall be considered assumptions for this Specification: a. The aquifer (unconfined) is comprised of Pleistocene and post -Pleistocene glacial outwash and stream alluvium associated with the Roaring Fork River. Alluvial sediments include boulders, cobbles, gravel, and sand with an anticipated total thickness that ranges from about 30 to 50 feet. b. The bedrock material is anticipated to be weathered and nonweathered sandstone, siltstone, shale, gypsum, and/or halite of the Eagle Valley Formation or Eagle Valley Evaporite. c. The anticipated depth to the water table is about 3 feet below the ground surface. d. The anticipated yield is 500 to 1,000 gallons per minute (gpm) per well. e. The anticipated dewatering rate is 5,000 to 10,000 gpm. 3. D1ULLING METHOD. DRILLING FLUID, AND DRILLING DEPTH: Drilling and well construction practices shall conform to the Water Well Construction Rules (2CCR402-2), effective August 1, 1996, or as may be amended prior to drilling and well construction. The drilling method shall be cable -tool or air -percussion such that the steel well casing can be placed simultaneously with the drilling operation. Drilling fluid shall be air. Chlorinated water may be used, as necessary. Additives such as bentonite or polymers shall not be used without the approval of the supervising field geologist. The total drilling depth shall be determined by the supervising field geologist based on a geologist's log of the borehole cuttings and from consultation with the driller. The anticipated total drilling depth is 30 to 50 feet. 94-021.002:010100 SU -2 During drilling operations, the driller shall collect continuous or interval grab drill -cutting samples every two to five feet of borehole depth for review and description by the supervising field geologist. Upon completion ofdrilling, drill cuttings shall be cleaned from the borehole by bailing, sand -pumping, other appropriate methods until it is clear of recoverable drill cuttings. Al! drill cuttings shall be contained on site in a mud pit or area away from traffic and pedestrians as designated by the Engineer. Since a temporary well casing will be installed during drilling, a Iarge volume of water should not be produced. Water produced onsite should be contained in a mud pit. Any overflows should be fairly clear and directed into a tributary of the Roaring Fork River or nearby detention pond as determined by the supervising field geologist. Hay bails may be necessary to filter any excess runoff. For safety, traffic should be directed away from the drill site with cones, flagging, temporary fencing, etc. as appropriate. Beyond the "barrier line", there should be no physical effects (mud, equipment, supplies, etc.) of the drilling. 4. TEMPORARY SURFACE CASING: The borehole diameter for the surface casing installation shall be 20 inches nominal to accommodate a 20 -inch O.D. surface casing to a depth of 15 feet below the ground surface. The surface casing shall be new, 20 -inch O.D., steel plain -end pipe with a total length of 16 feet, and a minimum wall thickness of 0.25 inches. It shall be placed in the 15 -foot deep borehole such that one foot of the surface casing is above the ground surface. There shall be no annular space between the borehole wall and the outside of the surface casing. 5. WELL CASING: Following the installation of the surface casing, the borehole shall be drilled to the total depth using a 16 -inch drill bit; a l6 -inch O.D. well casing shall be installed simultaneously with drilling operations. The anticipated length of well casing is 20 feet as shown in the Drawings. The well casing shall consist of new steel, plain -end standard pipe with a 0.5 -inch wall thickness, approximately 82.8 Ib/ft in weight, and with a grade A or B test -pressure rating. 6. SAMPLING AND GRADATION ANALYSIS: Drill cutting samples shall be collected by the supervising field geologist and submitted to a soils laboratory for gradation analyses. The gradation analyses shall be performed and reported in accordance with USBR 5330 or 5335, except that the following sieve sizes shall be used: 0.75 inch 0.375 inch #4 #8 #16 #30 #50 #100 #200 Hydrometer tests shall not be performed. 7. WELL SCREEN ASSEMBLY: A telescope well screen assembly shall be installed in the well bore and shall consist of 141/4 -inch O.D. (13'/s -inch I.D.) Type 316 UOP Johnson stainless-steel wire - wrapped screen. The length and slot -size opening of the well screen shall be determined by the 94-021.002:010300 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SU -3 supervising field geologist pursuant to the results of the laboratory gradation analysis and geologic log. The anticipated length of well screen is 20 feet as shown in the Drawings. The well screen shall be welded to a 14 -inch O.D. (13.25 -inch I.D.) riser pipe (5 feet long) with a 0.375 -inch wall thickness, approximately 54.6 Ib/ft in weight, and with a grade A or B test -pressure rating. The length of the riser pipe shall be determined by the supervising field geologist. A figure K - packer shall be installed at the top of the riser above the well screen to form a watertight seal between the 16 -inch O.D. steel well casing and the 14% -inch O.D. well -screen assembly. Upon installation, the well -screen assembly shall be telescoped through the 16 -inch O.D. well casing and set at a depth to be specified by the supervising field geologist. Refer to the Drawings. A 14 -inch O.D. (13.25 -inch I.D.) tail pipe (5 feet long) shall be welded to the bottom of the well screen and shall have the same properties as the riser pipe. The length of the tail pipe shall be determined by the supervising Meld geologist. A steel bottom plate shall be welded to the base of the tail pipe. 8. GROUTING: A cement -grout seal shall be placed by positive displacement in the annular space between the well casing and the surface casing from 10 feet of depth up to the ground surface. The cement grout shall be made from Type I1 Portland cement or API Class B cement as shown on the Drawings. Approximately 5 to 6 gallons ofwater shall be mixed with the cement to develop the liquid grout mixture. After the cement grout is placed in the annular space, the temporary 20 -inch surface casing shall be pulled from the hole so that the grout forms a seal between the borehole wall and the well casing. 9. WELL DEVELOPMENT: The well shall be completed by natural development. A sand filter pack shall not be used. The well shall be developed by surging, swabbing, and bailing techniques to remove drilling cuttings and fine sediment from the well. The well shall be developed for sufficient time to cause the water to clear to near drinking -water standards. The development period shall be determined by the supervising field geologist. 10. WELL. TESTING: A 1- to 3 -day pumping test of each well shall be performed under the direction of the supervising geologist. The driller or a designated pump installer shall provide, install, and operate a submersible pump with a check valve and a generator capable of producing 1000 gpm from the well for the duration of each pumping test. The pumping test shall be followed by a recovery test which may last as long as the pumping test. The duration of each test shall be determined by the supervising field geologist to ensure the objectives of each test are achieved. The driller or a designated pump installer shall provide, install, and operate a totalizing flow meter with an instantaneous -flow register and a gate valve to monitor and regulate the discharge rate from the well during the well test. Flows shall be directed into a tributary of the Roaring Fork River as determined by the supervising field geologist. Pressure transducers shall be obtained by the supervising geologist and used to monitor drawdown and recovery in both dewatering wells. Additional transducers may be installed in one or more other existing monitor wells to measure aquifer hydraulic properties. Monitoring shall be conducted by the supervising field geologist. 94-021.002:010300 SU -4 Well -test results will be tabulated and analyzed by the supervising field geologist. These results will be used to develop further dewatering well and submersible -pump specifications and locations. 1 I. LICENSING: The driller and pump installer shall be licensed to perform work in the State of Colorado in accordance applicable State laws and regulations. 12. WELL DISINFECTING: After completion of the pump testing, the Contractor shall disinfect both wells in accordance with the Colorado State Engineer's Water Well Construction Rules. Both dewatering wells shall be capped with a secure, watertight well cover. 13. PERMITS: The Contractor shall obtain the necessary well permit(s) from the Colorado State Engineer's Office to construct and test the wells in accordance the Water Well Construction Rules. Any need for variance(s) from these rules shall be approved by the Colorado State Engineer's Office. 14. ADDITIONAL DEWATERING WELLS: The location and design of subsequent dewatering wells shall be determined pursuant to the findings of the well tests described above in item 10. For the purpose of this Specification, an assumption shall be made that six additional dewatering wells shall be located, constructed, developed, disinfected, and capped as described above and as shown in the Drawings. No additional well tests shall be performed. However, if additional well tests are needed, such additional tests shall be considered a change order that must be authorized by the Engineer. 94-021.002:010300 SV -1 SPECIFICATION V LINER SYSTEM 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work consists of installing the synthetic lining system including low- density polyethylene (LDPE) geomembrane, geotextiles, and geogrid material as shown on the Drawings and as specified below. 2. GENERAL: The materials supplied under these specifications shall be first quality products and manufactured specifically for the purposes of this work, and which have been satisfactorily demonstrated by prior use to be suitable and durable for such purposes. The manufacturer of the LDPE, geomembrane, geotextile and geogrid shall have at least five (5) years continuous experience in the manufacture of the material. The LDPE geomembrane manufacturers shall also have at least a total experience of 10,000,000 square feet of manufacturing polyethylene experience. 3. DESCRIPTION OF SYNTHETIC LINING MATERIALS: The synthetic lining system consists of 80 mil LDPE, 12 oz. non -woven geotextile, and slope reinforcement geogrid. The materials shall have the following physical characteristics. a. Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) Qeomembrane. The geomembrane shall be manufactured of polyethylene resins produced in the United States and shall be compounded and manufactured specifically for the intended purpose. The resin manufacturer shall certify each lot for the following properties. The natural polyethylene resin without the carbon black shall meet the following specifications: LDPE property Tess Method Requirement Density, g/cc (ASTM D 1505 or ASTM D792) 0.915 - 0.926 Melt Index, g/10 min. (ASTM D 1238 Condition E) C 0.6 The surface of the smooth geomembrane shall not have striations, roughness, pinholes, or bubbles. Carbon black shall be added to the resin if the resin is not compounded for ultra -violet resistance. The geomembrane shall be manufactured by Poly -Flex, Inc. or approved equal and meet the following physical characteristics. 94.021.002:03150 SV -2 Property Test Method Nominal Values Thickness, mils Resin Density, g/cc Carbon Black Content, % Carbon black Dispersion ASTM D 1593 ASTM D 1505 ASTM D 1603 ASTM D 3015 80 0.92 2.5 A2 Tensile Properties 1. Tensile Strength at Yield, ppi 2. Elongation at Yield, % 3. Tensile Strength at Break, ppi 4. Elongation at Break, (2.0" G.L.) % (2.Y G.L.)% ASTM D 638 (Type IV Specimen a 2 ipm) 140 18 376 950 760 Tear Strength, lbs. Puncture Resistance, lbs. ASTM D 1004 FTMS 101 - 2065 ASTM D 4833 60 120 160 b. Non -Woven Geotextile. The geotextile shall be used for separation between the 3 " rounded washed rock and native bedding materials as shown on the Drawings. The geotextile shall be manufactured by Amoco Fabrics and Fibers Company or approved equal and shall conform to the following property values. Test Designation Geotextile Nonwoven Unit Weight ASTM D 5261 12.0 oz/yd' Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 300 psi Grab Tensile Elongation of Yield ASTM D 4632 50% Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 650 psi Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.9 sec'' Trapezoid Tear ASTM D 4533 115 lbs Puncture Resistance ASTM D4833 195 lbs c. Geogrid. The geogrid shall be utilized for slope stability or reinforcement. The Geogrid material shall be the Fortac 20/13-20 manufactured by Huesker, Inc. or approved equal and shall conform to the following physical properties. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S V-3 Geogrid Test Designation ReQuirement Weight ASTM D 3776 5.5 oz/sy Thickness At Rib ASTM D 1777 40 mil Aperture Size --- 0.9" x 0.9" Open Area — + 90 % Tensile Strength ASTM D 4595 1500 lb/ft Elongation at Break ASTM D 4595 12% 4. INSTALLATION: The installer shall be the manufacturer or a dealer trained and licensed to install the manufacturer's liner material. Installation shall be performed under the constant direction of a field installation supervisor who shall remain on site and be responsible, throughout the liner installation, for liner layout, seaming, testing, repairs, and all other activities by the installer. The field installation supervisor shall have installed or supervised the installation of a minimum of 2,000,000 square feet of polyethylene geomembrane. Seaming shall be performed under the direction of a master seamer (who may also be the field installation supervisor) who has seamed a minimum of 2,000,000 square feet of polyethylene geomembrane, using the same type of seaming apparatus specified for this project. The field installation supervisor and/or master seamer shall be present whenever seaming is performed. a. LDPE Geomembrane. (1) (2) (3) 94.021.002:03150 The geomembrane shall be stored so as to be protected from puncture, dirt, grease, moisture and excessive heat. The damaged material shall be stored separately for repair or replacement. The rolls shall be stored on a prepared smooth surface (not wooden pallets) and should not be stacked more than two rolls high. Prior to liner installation the subgrade shall be compacted in accordance with the project specifications. All surfaces to be lined shall be smooth, free of all foreign and organic material, sharp objects, or debris of any kind. Standing water or excessive moisture shall not be allowed. The rolls shall be deployed using a spreader bar assembly attached to a loader or by other methods approved by the project engineer. The installer shall be responsible for the following: • Equipment or tools shall not damage the geomembrane during handling, transportation and deployment. • Personnel working on the geomembrane shall not smoke or wear damaging shoes. S V-4 • The method used to unroll the panels shalt not cause scratches or crimps in the geomembrane and shall not damage the supporting soil. • Adequate loading (e.g., sand bags or similar items that will not darnage the geomembrane) shall be placed to prevent uplift by wind (in case of high winds, continuous loading is recommended along edges of panels to minimize risk of wind flow under the panels). (4) Geomembrane deployment shall proceed between ambient temperatures of 32°F to 104°F. Placement can proceed below 32°F only after it has been verified by the inspector that the material can be seamed according to the specification. Geomembrane placement shall not be done during any precipitation, in the presence of excessive moisture (e.g., fog, rain, dew) or in the presence of excessive winds. (5) Approved seaming processes are fusion and extrusion welding. The 80 mil geomembrane shall be seamed with double fusion seams only. On side slopes, seams shall be oriented in the general direction of maximum slope, i.e., oriented down, not across the slope. In corners and odd -shaped geometric locations, the number of field seams shall be minimized. Geomembrane panels must have a finished minimum overlap of 4 inches for fusion welding and 6 inches for extrusion welding. b. Geotextile. (1) Secure the geotextile by placing sandbags as ballast during deployment. Leave ballast in place until geotextile is covered. (2) Unless U.V. stabilized, cover geotextiles within 48 hours. (3) The geotextiles shall be seamed by sewing using polymeric thread with chemical resistance properties equal to or exceeding those of the geotextile or by fusion welding. (4) Seams shall have a minimum strength equal to 90 percent for nonwoven and 80 percent for woven of the geotextile strength as measured in a wide strip tensile test. (5) Repair holes or tears in geotextiles with a patch from the same geotextile material and continuously sew in place. Remove soil and other material which may have penetrated through the torn geotextile. c. Geogrid. (1) The geogrid shall be ballasted during deployment. (2) Overlap seams a minimum of 6 inches. 94021.002:03130 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SV -5 (3) 5" long cable ties shall be placed at minimum 3 foot intervals along the seam length. 5. TESTING: The geomembrane seams shall be field tested. Seam tests shall be conducted on the liner to verify that seaming conditions are satisfactory. Test seams shall be conducted at the beginning of each seaming period and at least once each 4 hours, for each seaming apparatus and personnel used that day. All test seams shall be made in contact with the subgrade. Welding rod used for extrusion welding shall have the same properties as the resin used to manufacture the geomembrane. The test seam samples shall be 10 feet long for fusion welding and 3 feet long for extrusion welding with the seam centered lengthwise. Five specimens shall be cut from each end of the test seams. A tensiometer shall be used to test 5 specimens for shear and 5 specimens for peel. Each specimen shall be one inch wide with a grip separation of 4 inches plus the width of the seam. The seam shall be centered between the clamps. Test results for seam strength properties shall be the average of five specimens. Four out of five specimens shall pass seam acceptance criteria. The minimum shear strength for the 80 mil liner shall be 120 PPI. The minimum peel strength for the 80 mil shall be 100 PPI. If a test seam fails to meet field seam specifications, the seaming apparatus and/or seamer shall not be used for seaming until the deficiencies are corrected and a successful test seam is achieved. a. Non -Destructive Seam Testing. The Contractor shall non-destructively test all field seams over their full length. (1) Vacuum Box Testing. Equipment for testing extrusion seams shall be comprised of the following: • A vacuum box assembly consisting of a rigid housing, a transparent viewing window, a soft rubber gasket attached to the bottom, port hole or valve assembly, and a vacuum gauge. • Soapy solution in a plastic bucket with a mop. The following procedures shall be followed by the Contractor: ' • Excess sheet overlap shall be trimmed away. 1 • Wet a strip of geomembrane approximately 12 inches by the length of box with the soapy solution. 1 1 1 94.021,002:03130 1 • Place the box over the wetted area and compress. • Create a vacuum of 3 - 5 psi. • Ensure that a leak tight seal is created. SV -6 • For a period of approximately 5 seconds, examine the geomembrane through the viewing window for the presence of animated soap bubbles. • If no animated bubbles appear after 5 seconds, close the vacuum valve and open the bleed valve, move the box over the next adjoining area with a minimum 3 inches overlap and repeat the process. • All areas where animated soap bubbles appear shall be marked, repaired and then retested. The following procedures shall apply to locations where seams cannot be non- destructively tested. • If the seam is accessible to testing equipment prior to final installation, the seam shall be non-destructively tested prior to final installation. • If the seam cannot be tested prior to final installation, the seams shall be spark tested according to the spark tester manufacturer's procedures. (2) Air Pressure Testing (For Double Fusion Seams Only). Equipment for testing double fusion seams shall be comprised of the following: • An air pump equipped with pressure gauge capable of generating and sustaining a pressure between 25 and 30 psi. • A pressure gauge equipped with a sharp hollow needle. The following procedures shall be followed by the installer: • Seal one end of the seam to be tested. • Insert needle or other approved pressure feed device through the sealed end of the channel created by the double wedge fusion weld. • Energize the air pump to verify the unobstructed passage of air through the channel. • Seal the other end of the channel. • Energize the air pump to a pressure between 25 and 30 psi, close valve, allow 2 minutes for the injected air to come to equilibrium in the channel, and sustain pressure for approximately 5 minutes. • If loss of pressure exceeds 4 psi, or pressure does not stabilize, locate faulty area, repair and retest. 94.021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SV -7 • If pressure does not drop below the acceptable value after five minutes, cut the air channel open at the opposite end from the pressure gauge. The air channel should deflate immediately indicating that the entire length of the seam has been tested. b. Defects and Repaird. All seams and non -seam areas of the geomembrane shall be inspected by the inspector for defects, holes, blisters, undispersed raw materials, and any sign of contamination by foreign matter. The surface of the geomembrane shall be clean at the time of inspection. (1) Evaluation. Each suspect location in seam and non -seam areas shall be non- destructively tested as appropriate in the presence of the Engineer/Inspector. Each location that fails the non-destructive testing shall be marked by the inspector, and repaired accordingly. (2) Repair Procedures. (3) • Defective seams shall be cap stripped or replaced. • Small holes shall be repaired by extrusion welding. If the hole is larger than IA inch, it shall be patched. • Tears shall be repaired by patching. Where the tear is on a slope or an area susceptible stress and has a sharp end it must be rounded prior to patching. • Blisters, large cuts and undispersed raw materials shall be repaired by patches. • Patches shall be done by extrusion welding. The weld area shall be ground no more than 10 minutes prior to welding. No more than 10% of the thickness shall be removed by grinding. Welding shall commence where the grinding started and must overlap the previous seam by at least 2 inches. Reseaming over an existing seam without regrinding shall not be permitted. The welding shall restart by grinding the existing seam and rewelding a new seam. Patches shall be round or oval in shape, made of the same geomembrane, and extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond the edge of deflects. Verification of Repairs. Each repair shall be non-destructively tested. Repairs that pass the non-destructive test shall be taken as an indication of an adequate repair. Failed tests indicate that the repair shall be repeated and retested until passing test results are achieved. c. Watertightness Testing. Upon completion of the liner system and, the pond shall be filled to elevation 6202 for water tightness testing. The Engineer/Inspector shall inspect the 94.021.002:03150 SV -8 underdrain outlet over a 72 -hour period. There shall be no visible water flowing from the underdrain system. Visible water shall be indication of a failing test. The filter shall be repaired and retested until passing the 72 -hour water test. 94-021.002:03150 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TO: RANCH AT ROARING FORK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY PROPOSAL Ranch at Roaring Fork Homeowners Association c/o McLaughlin Water Engineers, Ltd. 2420 Alcott Street Denver, CO 80211 PROJECT: Ranch at Roaring Fork Wastewater Treatment Facility Receipt of Addendum Nos. are hereby acknowledged. A. PROPOSAL: Pursuant to the "Advertisement for Bids" for the above named project, and being familiar with all contractual requirements, therefore, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, equipment, plant, transportation, services, and all other things necessary for the completion of the contractual work and pay all taxes and patent costs, and perform the work in accordance with the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents, within the time of completion set forth herein, for and in consideration of the following unit and lump sum prices: Item Amount No. Description, Approximate Quantity, and Unit Price of Bid 1. Base Bid. Construct complete and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the new wastewater treatment facility, including, but not limited to, the aeration basin, clarifier and superstructure, equipment room (with blowers, HVAC, metering equipment and other items), office, submerged turbine mixers, wet wells, sludge digester connections, all yard piping, installation of pumps and dewatering operations (not includingoutfall pipe pumping), outfall discharge apron and flap valve, landscaping, roads, power supply, electrical and control work, for the lump sum price of: (Words -Lump Sum Price) 2. Outfall Pipe: Includes furnishing and handling all materials, all earth excavation, removal of existing materials, dewatering, connection to new manholes, couplings, bends, fittings, pipe installation, imported bedding and pipe zone backfill, backfil ling, compacting, leakage testing, flushing, pressure testing, surface restoration, erosion control measures, disposal of materials, cleanup, seeding, and all other items needed to complete the system, as shown on the Drawings, and as specified, except those items specifically listed herein this PROPOSAL, the unit price per lineal foot of pipe in place, measured from center of manholes or from fittings where applicable, measured along centerline: 94-021.002:03150 (1) 14 -inch C905 PVC outfall; 596 LF at: $ $. (Words -Unit Price) (Figures) (2) 8 -inch C900 PVC outfall; 110 LF at: P-2 $ $ (Words -Unit Price) (Figures) 3. Dewatering Wells: Includes furnishing and handling all materials, all drilling, drilling fluids, collecting and disposal of drill -cutting samples, installation of well casing, well screen, centralizers, sand pack, bentonite seal, and cement grout. Includes well development, well testing, disinfection, cleanup, surface restoration, capping, and other items as needed to complete the wells as shown on the Drawings, and as specified, per lineal foot of well, measured from ground surface to the bottom of the well: (1) Two 14 -inch test wells as designed, to a depth of 40 feet, for the lump sum price of: (Words -Lump Sum) (2) Six 14 -inch dewatering wells as designed, to a depth of 40 feet, for the lump sum price of: (3) (Words -Lump Sum) Extra depth of 14- inch well over 40 ft, measured to the nearest 1.0 feet per 1 inear foot of extra depth 50 feet (estimated for comparative bid purposes only), for the unit price of: $ $ (Words -Unit Price) (Figures) 4. Trench Stabilization Material: Includes furnishing and placing imported crushed rock concrete aggregate material for replacement of unstable foundation, including the extra excavation and disposal required when authorized by the Engineer, the unit price per cubic yard in place within the pay limits specified, 20 cubic yards (estimated quantity for comparative bid purposes only) at the unit price per cubic yard of: $ $ (Words -Unit Price) (Figures) TOTAL BID (Items 1-4) 94.021.002:111699 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. QUANTITIES: It is to be understood that the quantities of each item of work set forth in this Proposal are approximate only and will be revised depending on field conditions encountered. The Owner has the right to revise quantities in its best interest without affecting any of the unit prices set forth above. In all cases, the stated unit prices proposed shall be used in determining the final value of the completed work. C. TIME FOR COMPLETION: Ifawarded this work, the Bidder agrees to begin work within ten (10) days from the date of the Notice to Proceed and agrees to prosecute the work with all due diligence and effort to assure completion as set forth in the Special Construction Provisions of the Contract Documents. Time for completion is an essential of this Contract. Furthermore, the Bidder agrees that failure to complete the Contract within the time proposed, including any extension thereof, shall be considered a breach of the Contract, and entitles the Owner to liquidated damages or rights of severance as specified. D. PARTIES INTERESTED IN BID: The Bidder hereby certifies that the only persons or parties interested in this Proposal are those named herein, and that no other Bidder or prospective Bidder has been given any information concerning this Proposal. In submitting this Proposal, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive informalities and irregularities in Proposals received, and to accept that Proposal which in its judgment best serves the interests of the District. FIRM NAME_ BY TITLE BIDDER'S LEGAL STATUS STATE OF INCORPORATION FIRM'S ADDRESS PHONE DATED THIS DAY OF 1999 ATTEST: Corporation Secretary 94.021.002:111699 (CORPORATION SEAL) To: NOTICE OF AWARD (Contractor) NA -1 (Date) The (Owner) having duly considered the proposals submitted on (Opening Date) for the construction of (Project Title) as outlined in these Contract Documents and detailed on the Drawings, and it appearing that your Proposal for performing the work outlined is fair, equitable and to its best interest, the said Proposal is hereby accepted at the bid prices contained therein. In accordance with the terms of these Contract Documents, you are required to execute the formal Agreement and furnish the required Performance and Payment Bonds within ten (10) consecutive calendar days from and including the date of this notice. In addition, you are requested to furnish at the same time five (5) copies of certificate of insurance evidencing compliance with the requirements for insurance stated in the Contract Documents. Your certificate shall be accompanied by a letter from your insurance company stating that the insurance certified meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Bid Security submitted with your Proposal will be retained until the Agreement has been executed and the required Performance and Payment Bonds have been furnished and approved. In the event that you should fail to execute the Contract and furnish the Performance and Payment Bonds within the time limit specified, the said Bid Security will be retained as liquidated damages and not as penalty for the delay and extra work caused thereby. (Owner) By SSI :Nor -A W AR.STD:012500 A-1 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT made and entered into this day of , 19 by and between, party of the first part, hereinafter called the "Owner," and parry of the second part, hereinafter called the "Contractor." WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the promises contained in the Contract Documents, of which this instrument is a part, the performance thereof, and the payments hereafter to be made, the said parties hereby covenant and agree as follows: 1. In consideration of the covenants and agreements to be kept and performed by the Contractor, and for the faithful performance of this Contract, and the completion of the work embraced therein, according to the Drawings and Specifications and conditions herein contained and referred to, the Owner shall pay, and the Contractor shall receive and accept as full compensation for everything furnished and done by the Contractor under this Agreement, and also for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work, the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen contingencies or difficulties encountered in the prosecution of the work, the prices stipulated in the Contractor's Proposal, which are made a part of this agreement. 2. The Contractor, at his own proper cost and expense, shall do all work and furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, machinery, and other equipment that may be necessary for the construction of • (Project Title) as outlined and as described in the Specifications and detailed on the Drawings. 3. The maintenance of a rate of progress in the work which will result in its completion within the specified time is an essential feature of the Contract, and the Contractor agrees to proceed with all due diligence and care, at all times to take all precautions to insure the time of completion as defined in this Agreement. Said work shall be commenced within 10 days from the date of the "Notice to Proceed"; and the Contractor shall have the work called for under the Contract fully completed within consecutive calendar days from and including the date of the said "Notice to Proceed." 4. It is also understood and agreed that the Contract Documents, including any Addenda thereto issued prior to the opening of bids, consisting of the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Construction Provisions, Specifications, Proposal, Notice of Award, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Notice to Proceed, and Drawings are all essential parts $51: A G R E EMT. ST D:012500 A-2 of this Agreement, and are each and all made a part hereof, and have the same force and effect as if set forth at length herein. 5. Pursuant to Section 24-91-103.6, C.R.S., the Owner hereby states that it has appropriated an amount equal to or in excess of the Contract amount. Owner shall not issue a Change Order or other form of order or directive requiring additional compensable work to be performed, which work causes the aggregate amount payable under the Contract to exceed the amount appropriated for the original Contract, unless Contractor is given written assurance by the public entity that lawful appropriations to cover the costs of the additional work have been made or unless work is covered under a remedy -granting provision of the Contract. 6. It is agreed by the parties to this Contract that this Contract shall be executed in five counterparts, two copies being retained by the Owner, one to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Engineer, and one to the Contractor's Surety. 7. It is agreed by the parties to this Contract that this Agreement shall be binding upon the Owner and the Contractor and upon all their successors, assigns, heirs, executors, and administrators. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner, party of the first part, has caused these presents to be executed the day and year first above written, and the said party of the second part has caused these presents to be executed and hereunto affixed its seal the day of 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ATTEST/WITNESS: , (Owner) ATTEST/WITNESS: (Corporation Secretary) (Corporate Seal) SSI:AGREEMT.STD:012500 By (Contractor) By Title 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A-3 CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT (to be filled in when Contract Agreement is executed in behalf of a Corporation) State of Colorado ) )ss. County of ) On this day of , 19 99 , before me appeared , to me personally known, who being by me duly sworn, did say that he is of And that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of Said Corporation, and that said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors, and said acknowledged said instrument to be the free act and deed of said Corporation. WITNESS my hand and Notarial Seal the day and year in this certificate first above written. (Notary Public) My commission expires SS1:CORP-ACK.STD:012500 PB- 1 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT as Principal, and a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of AND AUTHORIZED TO TRANSACT BUSINESS WITHIN THE STATE OF COLORADO, as Surety, are held and firmly bound to: , as Owner, in the penal sum of DOLLARS, lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind themselves and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, as follows: The condition of the above obligation is such that: WHEREAS the above Principal has heretofore on the day of entered into a written contract, a copy of which is by reference made a part hereof, with: , 19, , for the construction of (Owner) (Project) said work of construction to be done according to the requirements of said Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, if the above Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform said Contract and any alteration in or addition thereto, and comply with all of the terms and provisions thereof and satisfy all of the obligations of said Principal arising thereunder (including the matter of infringement, if any, of patents) and comply with all the covenants therein contained, and contained in the Specifications, Drawings, and other documents constituting a part of said Contract required to be performed by said Principal, and satisfy all claims and demands for same, in the manner and within the time provided in said Contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damage which they may suffer by reason of failure so to do, and shall fully reimburse and repay them all outlay and expense which may incur in making good any default, and reasonable counsel fees incurred in the prosecution of defense of any action arising out of or in connection with any such default, as well as all other reasonable counsel fees incurred by the Owner and arising out of or negotiations with such claim or default, and shall pay all persons who SS1: P ER F- B N D. Sf D:01 ?300 PR -2 have contact directly with the Principal, for labor, equipment, and materials, if any, included in said Contract, or any alteration in or addition thereto; and if for a period of one year following the Final Acceptance of work performed under the Contract the Principal shall faithfully and satisfactorily repair and/or replace all work, material, and equipment which is determined to be defective during that period of time, providing such defection results directly or indirectly from faulty workmanship or negligence by the Principal, or from faulty manufacturing, faulty erection, faulty materials, or improper handling of materials and equipment furnished and installed by the Principal, then this obligation is to be null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. And the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration in or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or to the Specifications and Drawings accompanying the same, and no forbearance on the part of either the Owner or said Principal to the other, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, or release the Principal and the Surety or either of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns from their liability hereunder, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, forbearance, alteration in or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or to the Specifications and Drawings and other documents constituting a part thereof. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-named Principal and Surety have signed these presents this day of , 19_. ATTESTIWITNESS: (SEAL) APPROVED: Owner By Principal (Contractor) By 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Surety By 1 (Its Attorney -In -Fact) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners shall execute BOND. SSI: PERF-BND.STD:O 12500 1 1 1 1 1 1 PB -3 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT , as Principal, and , a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of AND AUTHORIZED TO TRANSACT BUSINESS WITHIN THE STATE OF COLORADO, as Surety, are held and firmly bound to: , as Owner, in the penal sum of DOLLARS, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind themselves and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, as follows: The condition of the above obligation is such that: WHEREAS the above bounded principal has heretofore on the day of 19 , entered into a written contract, a copy of which is by reference made a part hereof, with: , for the construction of (Owner) (Project) said work of construction to be done according to the requirements of said Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the work provided for in such Contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its SSI:PAYM-BO\. STD:4I2500 PB -4 obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each (number) one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of 19 ATTEST/WITNESS: (SEAL) APPROVED: Owner By Principal (Contractor) By Surety By (Its Attorney -In -Fact) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners shall execute BOND. SSI: PAYM-BON.STD:012500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TO: NOTICE TO PROCEED (Contractor) NP -1 (Date) You are hereby authorized to proceed on this date, but not later than ten (10) consecutive calendar days hereafter, with the construction of (Project Title) as set forth in detail in the Contract Documents therefor. (Owner) By SSI: NQT•PRQC.STD:01230D